ABB ACH550usermanual

ACH550
User’s Manual
ACH550-01 Drives (0.75…110 kW)
ACH550-UH Drives (1…150 HP)
ABB
ACH550 Drive manuals
GENERAL MANUALS OPTION MANUALS
(delivered with optional equipment)
ACH550-01/UH User's Manual Embedded Fieldbus (EFB)
(0.75…110 kW) / (1…150 HP) Control Manual
3AFE68258537 (English) 3AFE68320658 (English)
ACH550-02/U2 User's Manual Embedded Fieldbus (EFB)
(110… 355 kW) / (150… 550 HP) Control/BACnet Manual
• Safety OHDI-01 115/230 V Digital Input
• Installation Module User's Manual
3AUA0000003101 (English)
• Start-up
OREL-01 Relay Output Extension
• Diagnostics Module User's Manual
• Maintenance 3AUA0000001935 (English)
• Technical data RLON-01 LonWorks Adapter
HVAC Info Guide CD Module User’s Manual
• Detailed product description Typical contents
– Technical product description • Safety
including dimensional • Installation
drawings • Programming/Start-up
– Cabinet mounting information
• Fault tracing
including power losses
– Software and control • Technical data
– User interfaces and control
connections MAINTENANCE MANUALS
– Complete options descriptions
– Spare parts
Guide for Capacitor Reforming in
– Etc.
ACS50/150/350/550
• Practical engineering guides 3AFE68735190 (English)
– PID & PFA engineering
guides
– Dimensioning and sizing
guidelines
– Diagnostics and maintenance
information
– Etc.
1. Contents of this manual
2. Preparing for installation
3. Installing the drive
4. Start-up and control panel
5. Application macros and wiring
6. Real-time clock and timed functions
7. Serial communications
8. Parameter listing and descriptions
9. Diagnostics and maintenance
3AFE68258537 REV C
EN 10. Technical data
EFFECTIVE: 24.05.2006
ACH550 User's Manual
Table of contents
1. Contents of this manual ............................................. 7

What this chapter contains .......................................... 7
Compatibility ................................................................ 7
Intended use ................................................................ 7
Intended audience ....................................................... 7
Use of warnings and notes .......................................... 8
Safety instructions ....................................................... 8
Drive package ............................................................ 11
Lifting the drive .......................................................... 12
2. Preparing for installation.......................................... 13

What this chapter contains ........................................ 13
Drive identification ..................................................... 14
Frame size ................................................................. 17
Motor identification..................................................... 19
Motor compatibility ..................................................... 21
Suitable environment and enclosure ......................... 22
Suitable mounting location......................................... 23
Wiring and EMC considerations ................................ 26
Cabling instructions ................................................... 29
Motor cables .............................................................. 29
Control cables ............................................................ 33
Tools required ............................................................ 36
Checklist for installation preparations ........................ 37
3. Installing the drive..................................................... 39

What this chapter contains ........................................ 39
Preparing the mounting location ................................ 39
Removing front cover (IP54) ...................................... 40
Removing front cover (IP21) ...................................... 41
Mounting the drive (IP54) .......................................... 42
1
Mounting the drive (IP21)........................................... 43

Overview of wiring installation (R1…R4) ................... 44
Overview of wiring installation (R5…R6) ................... 45
Power wiring (IP54).................................................... 46
Control wiring (IP54) .................................................. 49
Power wiring (IP21).................................................... 50
Control wiring (IP21) .................................................. 53
Check installation....................................................... 55
Re-install cover (IP54) ............................................... 57
Re-install cover (IP21) ............................................... 58
Apply power ............................................................... 59
4. Start-up and control panel........................................ 61

What this chapter contains......................................... 61
Control panel compatibility......................................... 61
HVAC control panel (ACH-CP-B) features................. 61
Start-up ...................................................................... 62
Modes ........................................................................ 65
Standard display mode .............................................. 66
Parameters mode ...................................................... 68
Start-up assistant mode ............................................. 70
Changed parameters mode ....................................... 73
Drive parameter backup mode................................... 74
Clock set mode .......................................................... 80
I/O settings mode....................................................... 83
Fault logger mode ...................................................... 84
5. Application macros and wiring ................................ 85

What this chapter contains......................................... 85
Applications................................................................ 85
Selecting an application macro .................................. 86
Restoring defaults ...................................................... 87
1. HVAC default ......................................................... 88
2. Supply fan .............................................................. 90
3. Return fan .............................................................. 92
4. Cooling tower fan ................................................... 94
5. Condenser ............................................................. 96
2
6. Booster pump ........................................................ 98

7. Pump alternation.................................................. 100
8. Internal timer ........................................................ 102
9. Internal timer with constant speeds / Powered
roof ventilator ........................................................... 104
10. Floating point ..................................................... 106
11. Dual setpoint PID ............................................... 108
12. Dual setpoint PID with constant speeds ............ 110
13. E-bypass (USA only) ......................................... 112
14. Hand control ...................................................... 114
Connection example of a two-wire sensor ............... 116
6. Real-time clock and timed functions..................... 117

What this chapter contains ...................................... 117
Real-time clock and timed functions ........................ 117
Using the timer......................................................... 118
1. Enabling the timer ................................................ 120
2. Setting the time period ......................................... 121
3. Creating a timer ................................................... 122
4. Connecting parameters ....................................... 124
Example of timer use ............................................... 125
7. Serial communications ........................................... 129

What this chapter contains ...................................... 129
System overview...................................................... 130
Mechanical and electrical installation of the plug-in
fieldbus .................................................................... 132
Setting up communication through a plug-in
fieldbus adapter (EXT FBA) module ........................ 134
Drive control parameters ......................................... 136
Fieldbus control interface......................................... 146
Generic Drive Profile................................................ 160
3
8. Parameter listing and descriptions........................ 165

What this chapter contains....................................... 165
Parameter groups .................................................... 165
Overview of PID controllers ..................................... 264
Complete parameter list........................................... 314
9. Diagnostics and maintenance................................ 347

Diagnostics displays ................................................ 348
Correcting faults....................................................... 349
Fault resetting .......................................................... 358
History...................................................................... 359
Correcting alarms..................................................... 359
Maintenance intervals .............................................. 364
Heatsink ................................................................... 365
Main fan replacement .............................................. 365
Internal enclosure fan replacement.......................... 368
Capacitors................................................................ 369
Control panel............................................................ 370
10. Technical data........................................................ 371

Ratings..................................................................... 371
Input power (mains) cable and fuses ....................... 378
Cable terminals ........................................................ 383
Input power (mains) connection............................... 383
Motor connection ..................................................... 384
Control connections ................................................. 387
Efficiency.................................................................. 391
Cooling..................................................................... 391
Dimensions and weights .......................................... 393
Ambient conditions................................................... 409
Materials .................................................................. 410
Applicable standards................................................ 411
CE marking .............................................................. 411
C-Tick marking......................................................... 412
4
UL marking .............................................................. 412

IEC/EN 61800-3 (2004) Definitions ......................... 413
Compliance with the IEC/EN 61800-3 (2004) .......... 413
Equipment warranty and liability .............................. 415
Product protection in the USA ................................. 416
Contact information.................................................. 417
Index ........................................................................ 421
5
6
Contents of this manual
What this chapter contains

This chapter contains the safety instructions which you must
follow when installing, operating and servicing the drive. If
ignored, physical injury or death may follow, or damage may
occur to the drive, the motor or driven equipment. Read the
safety instructions before you work on the unit. This chapter also
contains an introduction to the contents of this manual.
Compatibility
The manual is compatible with the ACH550 drive firmware
version 3.00c or later. See parameter 3301 FW VERSION on page
248.
Intended use
The ACH550 and the instructions in this manual are intended for
use in HVAC applications. The macros should only be applied to
the applications defined in the respective section.
Intended audience
This manual is intended for personnel who install, commission,
operate and service the drive. Read the manual before working
on the drive. The reader is expected to know the fundamentals
of electricity, wiring, electrical components and electrical
schematic symbols.
Contents of this manual 7

Use of warnings and notes

There are two types of safety instructions throughout this
manual:
• Warnings caution you about conditions which can result in
serious injury and death and/or damage to the equipment.
They also tell you how to avoid the danger.
• Notes draw attention to a particular condition or fact, or give
information on a subject.
The warning symbols are used as follows:
Danger; electricity warns of high voltage which can
cause physical injury and/or damage to the equipment.
General danger warns about conditions, other than those
caused by electricity, which can result in physical injury
and/or damage to the equipment.
Safety instructions
WARNING! The ACH550 should ONLY be installed by a

qualified technician.
WARNING! Even when the motor is stopped, dangerous voltage

is present at the power circuit terminals U1, V1, W1 and U2, V2,
W2, and, depending on the frame size, UDC+/BRK+ and
UDC-/BRK-.
WARNING! Dangerous voltage is present when input power is

connected. After disconnecting the supply, wait at least 5
minutes before removing the cover. To check, measure for zero
voltage at the DC terminals, which are, depending on the frame
size, UDC+/BRK+ and UDC-/BRK-.
WARNING! Even when the power is switched off from the input
terminals of the ACH550, there may be dangerous voltage (from
external sources) on the terminals of the relay outputs
R01…R03 and, if the relay extension board is included in the
installation, R04…R06.
8 Contents of this manual

WARNING! When the control terminals of two or more drive

units are connected in parallel, the auxiliary voltage for these
control connections must be taken from a single source which
can either be one of the units or an external supply.
WARNING! If a drive whose EMC filter is not disconnected is

installed on an IT system [an ungrounded power system or a
high resistance-grounded (over 30 ohms) power system], the
system will be connected to earth potential through the EMC
filter capacitors of the drive. This may cause danger or damage
the drive.
If a drive whose EMC filter is not disconnected is installed on a
corner grounded TN system, the drive will be damaged.
Note: When the EMC filter is disconnected, the drive is not EMC
compatible.
For disconnecting the EMC filter, see pages 44 (frame sizes
R1…R4) and 45 (frame sizes R5…R6) in chapter Installing the
drive.
WARNING! The ACH550 is not a field repairable unit. Never

attempt to repair a malfunctioning unit; contact the factory or
your local Authorized Service Center for replacement.
WARNING! The ACH550 will start up automatically after an

input voltage interruption if the external run command is on.
WARNING! The heat sink may reach a high temperature. See

chapter Technical data.

WARNING! Do not control the motor with an AC contactor or

disconnecting device (disconnecting means); use instead the
control panel start and stop keys or external commands (I/O or
fieldbus). The maximum allowed number of charging cycles of
the DC capacitors (i.e. power-ups by applying power) is three in
five minutes.
Note: For more technical information, contact the factory or your

local ABB representative.

Drive package
After opening the package, check that the following items are
included:
• ACH550 drive (1)
• IP21: box containing clamps and connection box (2),
IP54: box containing hood
• box containing control panel (operator keypad) ACH-CP-B
and panel connector (3)
• cardboard mounting template (4)
• user’s manual (5)
• warning stickers.
The figure below shows the contents of the drive package.
1
5
3

Lifting the drive

The figure below shows how to lift the drive.
Note: Lift the drive only from the metal chassis.

Preparing for installation

This chapter contains instructions for preparing for the
installation of the drive. It contains the drive identification, wiring
and EMC guidelines and a list of tools necessary for the
installation.
Note: The installation must always be designed and made

according to applicable local laws and regulations. ABB
does not assume any liability whatsoever for any
installation which breaches the local laws and/or other
regulations. Furthermore, if the recommendations given by
ABB are not followed, the drive may experience problems
that the warranty does not cover.
Preparing for installation 13

Drive identification
IP54 labels
The location and the contents of the labels for the IP54 degree
of protection are shown in the figure below.
Note: The location of the labels may vary between different

frame sizes.
14 Preparing for installation

IP21 labels
The location and the contents of the labels for the IP21 degree
of protection are shown in the figure below.
Note: The location of the labels may vary between different

frame sizes.

Type code
The contents of the drive type code shown on the labels are
described below.
ACH550-01-08A8-4+…
AC, HVAC Drive – 550 product series
Construction (region specific)

UH = Setup and parts specific to US installation and NEMA compliance
01 = Setup and parts specific to IEC installation and compliance
Output current rating

08A8 = 8.8 A, see the table in section Frame size on page 17 for details
Voltage rating
2 = 208…240 VAC
4 = 380…480 VAC
Degree of protection
No specification = IP21
B055 = IP54
Serial number
The format of the drive serial number shown on the labels is
described below.
Serial number is of format CYYWWXXXXX, where
C: Country of manufacture
YY: Year of manufacture
WW: Week of manufacture; 01, 02, 03, … for week 1, week 2, week 3, …
XXXXX: Integer starting every week from 0001.

Frame size
Type I2N PN
Frame size
ACH550-01/UH- A kW
Three-phase supply voltage, 220…240 V
04A6-2 4.6 0.75 R1
06A6-2 6.6 1.1 R1
07A5-2 7.5 1.5 R1
012A-2 11.8 2.2 R1
017A-2 16.7 4 R1
024A-2 24.2 5.5 R2
031A-2 30.8 7.5 R2
046A-2 46 11 R3
059A-2 59 15 R3
075A-2 75 18.5 R4
088A-2 88 22 R4
114A-2 114 30 R4
143A-2 143 37 R6
178A-2 178 45 R6
221A-2 221 55 R6
248A-2 248 75 R6
02A4-4 2.4 0.75 R1
03A3-4 3.3 1.1 R1
04A1-4 4.1 1.5 R1
1
05A4-4 5.4 2.2 R1
06A9-4 6.9 3 R1
08A8-4 8.8 4 R1
012A-4 11.9 5.5 R1
015A-4 15.4 7.5 R2
023A-4 23 11 R2
031A-4 31 15 R3
038A-4 38 19 R3
044A-4 44 22 R4

Type I2N PN
Frame size
ACH550-01/UH- A kW
059A-4 59 30 R4
072A-4 72 37 R4
2
077A-4 77 37 R5
096A-4 96 45 R5
124A-4 124 55 R6
157A-4 157 75 R6
180A-4 180 90 R6
1
195A-4 195 110 R6
1 Not available in -UH type series 00467918.xls A.7
2
Not available in -01 type series
Mark the frame size of your drive in the box on

the right.
Note: For detailed technical information, see chapter Technical

data.

Motor identification
An example motor rating plate for an IEC motor is shown below.
ABB Oy, Electrical Machines

LV Motors, Vaasa, Finland
3 Motor M3JP 250SMA 4 EExd IIB T4 B3
IEC 250S/M 65
S1 No. 3492820
LJ-20964-1 / 2001 Ins.cl. F IP 55
V Hz kW r/min A cos Duty
690 Y 50 55 1479 58 0.83
400 D 50 55 1479 101 0.83
660 Y 50 55 1475 60 0.85
380 D 50 55 1475 104 0.85
415 D 50 55 1480 99 0.82
440 D 60 63 1775 103 0.85
Prod.code 3GJP252210-ADG138148
LCIE 00 ATEX 6030
6315/C3 6313/C3 450 kg
A BB IEC 60034-1
Collect the following information:

• voltage
• nominal motor current
• nominal frequency
• nominal speed
• nominal power.

The figure below shows a motor with star and delta connections.
For the highlighted row of the example motor rating plate on
page 19, the connection is delta.
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
U1 V1 W1 U1 V1 W1
W2 U2 V2 W2 U2 V2
Note: Check which connection is correct for your motor type.

Motor compatibility
The motor, drive and supply power must be compatible:
Motor
Verify Reference
specification
Motor type 3-phase induction -
motor
Nominal current type dependent • type code label
on drive, entry
for “Output I2N”
(current), or
• type code on
drive and rating
table in Ratings
in chapter
Technical data.
Nominal frequency 10…500 Hz -
Voltage range Motor requirement 208…240 V
and supply voltage 380…480 V
are both 3-phase
voltage and are
within the ACH550
voltage range.

Suitable environment and enclosure

Confirm that the site meets the environmental requirements. To
prevent damage prior to installation, store and transport the
drive according to the environmental requirements specified for
storage and transportation. See section Ambient conditions on
page 409.
Confirm that the enclosure (degree of protection) is appropriate,
based on the site containment level:
• IP21 type enclosure. The site must be free from airborne
dust, corrosive gases or liquids, and conductive
contaminants such as dripping water, condensation, carbon
dust, and metallic particles.
• IP54 type enclosure. This enclosure provides protection from
airborne dust and light sprays or splashing water from all
directions.
Compared to the IP21 enclosure, the IP54 enclosure has:
• the same internal plastic shell as the IP21 enclosure
• a different outer plastic cover
• an additional internal fan to improve cooling
• larger dimensions
• the same rating (does not require a derating).
If, for some reason, an IP21 drive needs to be installed without
the conduit box or cover, or an IP54 drive without the conduit
plate or top cover, see the note on page 412.

Suitable mounting location

Confirm that the mounting location meets the following
constraints:
• The drive must be mounted vertically on a smooth,
non-flammable, solid surface, and in a suitable environment
as defined in section Suitable environment and enclosure on
page 22.
• For horizontal installation, contact ABB for more information.
Mounting on a machine frame is also possible. No additional
plates are needed for cooling as the drive has an integral
heatsink backplate.
See section Mounting dimensions on page 394 for mounting
dimensions for all frame sizes and protection types.
The figure below shows the necessary free space for the
installation of the unit.
R1…R6
IP21 & IP54: 200 mm [8 in]
IP21 & IP54: 0 mm [0 in] IP21 & IP54: 0 mm [0 in]
IP21 & IP54: 200 mm [8 in]

Make sure that the hot air does not re-circulate into the drive.
The figure below show the minimum space for cooling air.
200 mm
200 mm

Stop the hot air from a drive from entering the cooling air intake
of another drive. The figure below shows the minimum space for
cooling air.
200 mm
200 mm
200 mm
200 mm

Wiring and EMC considerations

Determine electro-magnetic compliance (EMC) requirements
per local codes. In general:
• Follow local codes for cable size.
• Keep these three classes of wiring separated: input power
wiring, motor wiring and control/communications wiring.
• Check the operational limits for the allowed maximum motor
cable length in section Motor connection on page 384.
• If the installation must meet the European EMC Directive
requirements (see section Compliance with the IEC/
EN 61800-3 (2004) on page 413), check also the EMC limits
for the allowed maximum motor cable length in section Motor
connection on page 384.
Note: Non-proper wiring is the source of the majority of EMC

problems. Please follow the instructions to avoid these
problems.

The figure below shows an example of correct wiring.
min. 300 mm [12 in] min. 300 mm [12 in]
Note: If an output isolator or contactor is used, it is considered

as good engineering practice to supply either a stop signal or
Run enable signal (see parameter 1601) from an auxiliary
contact of the isolator to the ACH550.

The figure below shows an example of correct wiring.
min. 300 mm [12 in]
min. 300 mm [12 in]
Note: Wiring is discussed in more detail in chapter Installing the

drive.

Cabling instructions
Keep individual unscreened wires between the cable clamps
and the screw terminals as short as possible. Route control
cables away from power cables.
Motor cables
See section Motor connection on page 384 for the maximum
motor cable lengths meeting the IEC/EN 61800-3 requirements
for category C2 or C3, as applicable.
The figure below shows the minimum requirements for the motor
cable screen.
Galvanized steel or tinned copper wire with braided shield.
Layer of copper tape with concentric layer of copper wire.
Concentric layer of copper wire with an open helix of copper

tape.

The figure below shows non-recommended motor cable types.
Figures courtesy of NK cables. Copyright © 2003 NK cables.
The figure below shows the recommended conductor layout.
Recommended (CE & C-Tick) Allowed (CE & C-Tick)

Symmetrical shielded cable: three- A separate PE conductor is
phase conductors and a concentric or required if the conductivity of the
otherwise symmetrically constructed PE cable shield is < 50% of the
conductor, and a shield conductivity of the phase
PE Shield conductor.
conductor
and shield Shield
PE
Not allowed for motor cables
(CE & C-Tick) Shield
A four-conductor system: three-phase

conductors and a protective conductor,
without a shield.
Allowed for motor cables with
phase conductor cross section up
PE to 10 mm2.

Effective motor cable screens

The general rule for cable screen effectiveness is: the better and
tighter the screen, the lower the radiated emission level. The
figure below shows an example of an effective construction (for
example Ölflex-Servo-FD 780 CP, Lappkabel or MCCMK, NK
Cables).
Insulation jacket Inner insulator L2
L1
Braided metallic screen L3
Clamp the cable shield into the gland plate at the drive end, twist
the cable screen wires together into a bundle not longer than
five times its width and connect it to the terminal marked (at
the bottom right-hand corner of the drive) if you are using a
cable without a separate PE conductor.

The figure below shows the grounding principles of cables.
SUPPLY CABLE MOTOR CABLE
As short unshielded
wires as
elbpossible
issop sa seriw
Cable shielding
Short pigtail covered with
conductive tape
Unpainted gland plate htiw derevoc
epat evitcudnoc
Conductive shielding
and compression seal
EMC cable gland
Clamping nut
Continuity of Cable
Faraday cage
At the motor end, the motor cable screen must be earthed 360
degrees with an EMC cable gland, or the screen wires must be
twisted together into a bundle not longer than five times its width
and connected to the PE terminal of the motor. The same
principle applies to cabinet installations.

Control cables
General recommendation
Use shielded cables, temperature rated at 60ºC (140ºF) or
above.
The figure below shows examples of recommended cables.
Jamak by Draka NK Cables
Nomak by Draka NK Cables
Figures courtesy of NK cables. Copyright © 2003 NK cables.
• Control cables must be screened and of twisted pair type.

• The screen must be twisted together into a bundle not longer
than five times its width and connected to terminal X1:1 (for
digital and analog I/O cables) or to either X1:128 or X1:32
(for RS485 cables).
Route control cables to minimize radiation to the cable:
• Route as far away as possible from the input power and
motor cables (at least 20 cm [8 in]).
• Where control cables must cross power cables make sure
they are at an angle as near to 90º as possible to minimize
interference.
• Keep at least 20 cm (8 in) away from the sides of the drive.
• Run relay-controlled signals as twisted pairs (especially if
voltage > 30 V). Relay-controlled signals using less than
30 V can be run in the same cables as digital input signals.

The figure below shows an example of control cable installation.
Control cable
Control cable
90° min. 500 mm [20 in]

min. 200 mm [8 in]
Input power cable Motor cable
Note: Do not mix relay-controlled signals using more than 30 V

and other control signals in the same cable.
Note: Never mix 24 VDC and 115/230 VAC signals in the same
cable.

Analog cables
Recommendations for analog signal runs:
• Use double-shielded, twisted-pair cable.
• Use one individually shielded pair for each signal.
• Ground at one end only.
Digital cables
Recommendations for digital signal runs:
• A double-shielded cable is the best alternative, but a single-
shielded twisted multipair cable is also usable.
Control panel (operator keypad) cable

If the control panel is connected to the drive with a cable, use
only twisted-pair, ethernet cable. For example Standard CAT5
UTP Ethernet Patch Cable, wiring 568-B. Maximum length is 3
meters.

Tools required
To install the ACH550 you need the following:
• screwdrivers (as appropriate for the mounting hardware
used)
• wire stripper
• tape measure
• drill
• mounting hardware: screws or nuts and bolts, four each. The
type of hardware depends on the mounting surface and the
frame size as follows:
Frame Frame Mounting Mounting

Frame weight weight hardware hardware
size kg lb. Metric Imperial
IP21/IP54 IP21/IP54 units units
R1 6.5 / 8 14 / 18 M5 #10
R2 9.0 / 11 20 / 24 M5 #10
R3 16 / 17 35 / 38 M5 #10
R4 24 / 26 53 / 57 M5 #10
R5 34 / 42 75 / 93 M6 1/4 in
R6 69 / 86 152 / 190 M8 5/16 in
Note: Do not lift frame size R6 without a lifting aid.

Checklist for installation preparations
Check
Check the frame type of the drive from the
identification label (Drive identification on
page 14, Frame size on page 17).
Check the compatibility of the motor and the
drive (Motor identification on page 19, Motor
compatibility on page 21).
Check the suitability of the environment and
mounting location (Suitable environment and
enclosure on page 22, Suitable mounting
location on page 23).
Check that the motor and control cables meet
the EMC requirements (Wiring and EMC
considerations on page 26, Compliance with
the IEC/EN 61800-3 (2004) on page 413).
Check that the power cables meet the EMC
requirements (Wiring and EMC
considerations on page 26, Compliance with
the IEC/EN 61800-3 (2004) on page 413).
Check that you have the required tools (Tools
required on page 36).
Check that the walls support the drive weight
(Weights and mounting screws on page 395).


Installing the drive

This chapter contains the mechanical and electrical installation
procedure of the drive.
WARNING! Before installing the ACH550, ensure the input

power supply to the drive is off.
Note: The ACH550 should only be mounted where all of the

requirements defined in chapter Preparing for installation are
met and the checklist has been completed.
Preparing the mounting location

1. Use the mounting
template to mark the
position of the mounting
holes.
2. Drill the holes.
3. Insert the screws halfway
into the holes.
Note: Frame sizes R3 and R4 have four holes along the top.
Use only two. If possible, use the two outside holes (to allow
room to remove the fan for maintenance).
Installing the drive 39

Removing front cover (IP54)

1. Loosen the captive screws (four or five, depending on the
size of the frame) around the edge of the cover.
2. Remove the cover.
1 2
40 Installing the drive

Removing front cover (IP21)

1. Remove the control panel, if attached.
2. Loosen the captive screw at the top.
3. Push side clamps in.
4. Pull up to lift the cover.
1 2
3 4

Mounting the drive (IP54)

1. Remove the rubber plugs by pushing from the outside.
2. Position the ACH550 onto the mounting screws or bolts 1
and securely tighten in all four corners.
3. Place the protective plugs over the screws.
4. Warning stickers in different languages are supplied with
this manual. Attach a warning sticker in the appropriate
language on the inside plastic shell.
1
Lift R6 drives from
their lifting holes.

Mounting the drive (IP21)

1. Position the ACH550 onto the mounting screws or bolts 1
and securely tighten in all four corners.
2. Warning stickers in different languages are supplied with
this manual. Attach a warning sticker in the appropriate
language on the inside plastic shell.
1
1 Lift R6 drives from
their lifting holes.

Overview of wiring installation (R1…R4)

The figure below shows an overview of the terminal layout for
frame sizes R1…R4.
J1 – DIP switches for analog inputs (two switch types can be used)
J1 J1
AI1: (in voltage position) 0(2)…10 V
ON
1 2
ON
ON
AI2: (in current position) 0(4)…20 mA
Panel connector
X1 – Analog inputs and outputs

(and 10 V ref. voltage output) Power LED (Green)
Fault LED (Red)
X1 – Digital inputs
(and 24 V aux. voltage output)
Optional module 1
(Extended relay
output module)
X1 – Relay outputs X1 – Communications
(RS485/Modbus/
FLN/N2)
J2/J5 – DIP switches
for RS485 termination Optional module 2
J2 J5 J2 J5 (Plug-in fieldbus)
ON ON
ON ON
off position on position
Frame Power input Power output to motor

sizes 3-phase: U1, V1, W1 (U2, V2, W2)
R5…R6 1-phase: U1 (live), W1 EM3
differ. EM1
See the
following PE GND
pages.
X0003
The figure shows the R3 frame size.

Other frame sizes have similar layouts.
WARNING! For IT systems, corner grounded TN systems and

residual current circuit breakers, remove screws at EM1 and
EM3 to disconnect the EMC filter. Note that when the EMC filter
is disconnected, the drive is not EMC compatible.

Overview of wiring installation (R5…R6)

The figures below show the general terminal layouts for frame
sizes R5…R6.
R5 R6
F2
F1
F2
PE GND
GND
Power input Power output to motor
(U1, V1, W1) (U2, V2, W2)
F1
Power input
3-phase: U1, V1, W1
1-phase: U1 (live), W1
X0013
PE GND
Power output to motor
(U2, V2, W2)
WARNING! For IT systems, corner grounded TN systems and

residual current circuit breakers, remove screws at F1 and F2 to
disconnect the EMC filter. Note that when the EMC filter is
disconnected, the drive is not EMC compatible.

Power wiring (IP54)

1. Cut the rubber cable seals as needed for the 1) power, 2)
motor, and 3) control cables.

2. On the input power cable, strip the sheathing back far

enough to route individual wires. Also strip the individual
wires.
3
2
4 4
3. On the motor cable, strip the sheathing back far enough to

expose the copper wire screen so that the screen can be
twisted into a pigtail. Keep the pigtail short to minimize noise
radiation. Also strip the individual wires.
4. Route the input power and motor cables through the clamps
and tighten the clamps. On the motor cable, 360º grounding
under the clamp is recommended to minimize noise
radiation.

5. Connect the input power, motor and the grounding wires to

the drive terminals. Frame size R6: See the figures below.
R6: Cable lug installation (16…70 mm2 / 6…2/0 AWG cables)

Remove the screw
terminals. Fasten cable
lugs to the remaining
bolts with M10 nuts.
Isolate the ends of the
cable lugs with insulating
tape or shrink tubing.
R6: Cable terminal installation (95…185 mm2 / 3/0…350 AWG cables)
a. Connect the cable to the terminal.

b. Connect the terminal to the drive. a
WARNING! If the wire size is less than 95 mm2 (3/0 AWG), a

cable lug must be used. A cable of wire size less than 95
mm2 (3/0 AWG) connected to this terminal will loosen and
may damage the drive.
Note: Check the cable lengths according to section Wiring and

EMC considerations on page 26.

Control wiring (IP54)

1. On each control cable, strip the sheathing back far enough
to expose the copper wire screen for the cable clamp. Also
strip the individual wires.
2. Clamp the control cables.
3. Connect the control wires to the drive terminals.
1
2
WARNING! All ELV (extra low voltage) circuits connected to the

drive must be used within a zone of equipotential bonding, i.e.
within a zone where all simultaneously accessible conductive parts
are electrically connected to prevent hazardous voltages appearing
between them. This is accomplished by a proper factory grounding.
For completing the connections, go to chapter Application

macros and wiring.

Power wiring (IP21)

1. Open the appropriate knockouts in the connection box.
2. Install the cable clamps for the input power and motor
cables.

3. Install the connection box and tighten the cable clamps.
Note: The connection box can be left out in cabinet installations

if the cabinet is grounded. Screen the connection (360º) in the
cubicle.

4. On the input power cable, strip the sheathing back far

enough to route individual wires.
5. On the motor cable, strip the sheathing back far enough to
expose the copper wire screen so that the screen can be
twisted into a pigtail. Keep the pigtail short to minimize noise
radiation.
7 8
6. Route both cables through the clamps. On the motor cable,

360º grounding under the clamp is recommended to
minimize noise radiation.
7. Strip and connect the input power and motor wires and the
input power grounding wire to the drive terminals. Frame
size R6: See the figures on page 48.
8. Connect the pigtail created from the motor cable screen to
the ground.
Note: Check the cable lengths according to section Wiring and

EMC considerations on page 26.

Control wiring (IP21)

1. Install the cable clamp(s) for the control cable(s). (Input
power and motor cables are not shown in the figure).
2. Strip the control cable sheathing.

3. Route the control cable(s) through the clamp(s) and tighten

the clamp(s).
4. Connect the ground screen for digital and analog I/O cables
at X1:1.
5. Strip and connect the individual control wires to the drive
terminals. See chapter Application macros and wiring.
6. Install the connection box cover (one screw).
WARNING! All ELV (extra low voltage) circuits connected to the

drive must be used within a zone of equipotential bonding, i.e.
within a zone where all simultaneously accessible conductive parts
are electrically connected to prevent hazardous voltages appearing
between them. This is accomplished by a proper factory grounding.
For completing the connections, go to chapter Application

macros and wiring.

Check installation
Check
The installation preparations have been com-
pleted according to the installation checklist.
The drive is mounted securely.
The space around the drive meets the drive’s
specifications for cooling (Suitable mounting
location on page 23).
The motor and driven equipment are ready for
start.
For IT systems, corner grounded TN systems
and residual current circuit breakers: the inter-
nal EMC filter is disconnected (Overview of wir-
ing installation (R1…R4) on page 44, Overview
of wiring installation (R5…R6) on page 45).
The drive is properly grounded.
The input power (mains) voltage matches the
drive’s nominal input voltage.
The input power (mains) connections at U1, V1
and W1 are connected and tightened as speci-
fied.
The input power (mains) fuses and mains
switch are installed. (Input power (mains) cable
and fuses on page 378).
The motor connections at U2, V2 and W2 are
connected and tightened as specified.
The motor cable is routed away from other
cables.
NO power factor compensation capacitors are
in the motor cable.
The control connections are connected and
tightened as specified.

Check
NO tools or foreign objects (such as drill shav-
ings) are inside the drive.
NO alternate power source for the motor (such
as a bypass connection) is connected - no volt-
age is applied to the output of the drive.

Re-install cover (IP54)

1. Align the cover and slide it on.
2. Tighten the captive screws around the edge of the cover.
3. Re-install the control panel.
Note: The control panel window must be closed to comply with

IP54.
1 2

Re-install cover (IP21)

1. Align the cover and slide it on.
2. Tighten the captive screw.
3. Re-install the control panel.
1 2

Apply power
WARNING! Always re-install the front cover before turning

power on.
WARNING! The ACH550 will start up automatically at power-up

if the external run command is on at I/O.
1. Apply input power.

2. Green LED is lit.
Note: Before increasing motor speed, check that the motor is

running in the desired direction.
Note: If you want to generate a fault to check the I/O, select

HAND mode and remove the control panel.

The figure below shows changing the direction of motor rotation,

seen from the shaft end of the motor.
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
U1 V1 W1 U1 V1 W1
W2 U2 V2 W2 U2 V2
Motor terminal box
M M
Note: The direction of rotation can be changed from the drive,

but we recommend switching the motor cables to associate the
drive forward direction with the clockwise motor rotation.
Note: Now the drive is fully operational for manual operation. If

you wish to use I/O connections, refer to chapter Application
macros and wiring.

Start-up and control panel

This chapter contains a brief description of the assistant (HVAC)
control panel (operator keypad), start-up assistant and
application selection.
Control panel compatibility

The manual is compatible with the HVAC control panel
ACH-CP-B Rev H with panel firmware version 1.7 or later.
HVAC control panel (ACH-CP-B) features

The ACH550 HVAC control panel (operator keypad) ACH-CP-B
features:
Status LED
Green when nor-
mal, if flashing or
red, see Diagnos-
tics displays on
page 348.
UP
SOFT
SOFT KEY 2
KEY 1
DOWN
AUTO HELP
(always available)
OFF HAND
• language selection for the display

• drive connection that can be made or detached at any time
• start-up assistant to facilitate drive commissioning
• copy function for moving parameters to other ACH550 drives
• backup function for saving parameter sets
Start-up and control panel 61

• context sensitive help

• real-time clock.
Start-up
Start-up can be performed in two ways:
1. using the Start-up assistant or
2. changing the parameters individually.
At the first start, the drive activates the Start-up assistant. You
can restart it and its individual tasks in the Start-up assistant
mode as described in section Start-up assistant mode on page
70.
1. Start-up by using the Start-up assistant

To start the Start-up assistant, follow these steps:
1 Press MENU to go to the

main menu
2 Select ASSISTANTS with

the UP/DOWN keys and
press ENTER.
3 Scroll to Commission drive

with the UP/DOWN keys.
4 Change the values

suggested by the Start-up
assistant to your
preferences and then press
SAVE after every change.
62 Start-up and control panel

5 After selecting the macro,

specify whether you want to
use the mechanical HAND-
OFF-AUTO switch.
To be able to use the
switch, EXT1 (HAND) Start
command must be
connected to DI1 and EXT2
(AUTO) Start command to
DI6.
6 After completing a task, the
Start-up assistant asks if
you want to continue with
the next one. Press OK
(when Continue is
highlighted) to continue
with the next task, select
Skip with the UP/DOWN
keys and press OK to move
to the next task without
doing this one or press
EXIT to stop the Start-up
assistant.
The Start-up assistant will guide you through the start-up. For
more information, see section Start-up assistant mode on page
70.

2. Start-up by changing the parameters individually

To change the parameters, follow these steps:

main menu.
2 Select the PARAMETERS

mode with the UP/DOWN
keys and press ENTER to
go to the Parameters
mode.
3 Select the appropriate

parameter group with the
UP/DOWN keys and press
SEL.

parameter in a group with
the UP/DOWN keys. Press
EDIT to change the
parameter value.
5 Press the UP/DOWN keys

to change the parameter
value.
6 Press SAVE to store the

modified value or press
CANCEL to leave the set
mode. Any modifications
not saved are cancelled.
7 Press EXIT to return to the

listing of parameter groups,
and again to return to the
main menu.
To complete the control connections by manually entering the

parameters, see chapter Parameter listing and descriptions.

For detailed hardware description, see chapter Technical data.
Note: The current parameter value appears below the

highlighted parameter.
Note: To replace the displayed value of a parameter with the

default value, press the UP/DOWN keys simultaneously.
Note: The most typical and necessary parameters to change are

the following parameter groups: Group 99: START-UP DATA,
Group 10: START/STOP/DIR, Group 11: REFERENCE
SELECT, Group 20: LIMITS, Group 21: START/STOP, Group
22: ACCEL/DECEL, Group 26: MOTOR CONTROL and Group
30: FAULT FUNCTIONS.
Note: To restore the default factory settings, select the HVAC

default application macro.
Modes
The HVAC control panel (operator keypad) has several different
modes for configuring, operating and diagnosing the drive. The
modes are:
• Standard display mode – Shows drive status information and
operates the drive.
• Parameters mode – Edits parameter values individually.
• Start-up assistant mode – Guides the start-up and
configuration.
• Changed parameters mode – Shows changed parameters.
• Drive parameter backup mode – Uploads or downloads the
parameters between the drive and the control panel.
• Clock set mode – Sets the time and date for the drive.
• I/O settings mode – Checks and edits the I/O settings.

Standard display mode

Use the standard display mode to read information on the drive’s
status and to operate the drive. To go to the standard display
mode, press EXIT until the LCD display shows status
information as described below.
Status information
Top. The top line of the LCD display shows the basic status
information of the drive.
• HAND – Indicates that the drive control is local, i.e., from the
control panel (operator keypad).
• AUTO – Indicates that the drive control is remote, such as
the basic I/O (X1) or fieldbus.
• – Indicates the drive and motor rotation status as follows:
Control panel display Significance
Rotating arrow (clockwise or • Drive is running and at
counterclockwise) setpoint.
• Shaft direction is forward
or reverse.
Dotted rotating arrow Drive is running but not at
setpoint.
Stationary arrow Drive is stopped.
Dotted stationary arrow Start command is present, but
the motor is not running, e.g.
because start enable is
missing.
• Upper right – shows the active reference.
Center. Using parameter Group 34:
PANEL DISPLAY, the center of the LCD
display can be configured to display:
• Three signals from Group 01:
OPERATING DATA – The default
display shows parameters 0103 (OUTPUT FREQ) in hertz, 0104
(CURRENT) in amperes and 0120 (AI1) as a percentage.
• A bar meter instead of each signal
value.

Bottom. The bottom of the LCD display shows:

• Lower corners – Show the functions currently assigned to the
two soft keys.
• Lower center – Displays the current time (if configured to
show the time).
Operating the drive

AUTO/HAND – The very first time the drive is powered up, it is
in the AUTO mode (remote control), and controlled from the
Control terminal block X1.
To switch to HAND mode (local control) and control the drive
using the control panel (operator keypad), press the HAND key
or the OFF key .
• Pressing the HAND key switches the drive to local control
while keeping the drive running.
• Pressing the OFF key switches to local control and stops the
drive.
To switch back to AUTO mode, press the key.
Hand/Auto/Off – To start the drive, press the HAND ( ) or
AUTO key ( ). To stop the drive press the OFF key ( ).
Reference – To modify the reference (only possible if the display
in the upper right corner is highlighted in inverted color) press
the UP or DOWN keys (the reference changes immediately).
The reference can be modified in the HAND mode. It can be
parameterized (using Group 11: REFERENCE SELECT) to also
allow modification in the AUTO mode.

Parameters mode
To change the parameters, follow these steps:

main menu.

keys and press ENTER to
go to the Parameters
mode.

parameter group with the
SEL.

parameter in a group with
the UP/DOWN keys. Press
EDIT to change the
parameter.
5 Press the UP/DOWN keys

to change the parameter
value.
6 Press SAVE to store the

modified value or press
CANCEL to leave the set
mode. Any modifications
not saved are cancelled.
7 Press EXIT to return to the

listing of parameter groups,
and again to return to the
main menu.
To complete the control connections by manually entering the

parameters, see chapter Parameter listing and descriptions.

For detailed hardware description, see chapter Technical data.
Note: The current parameter value appears below the

highlighted parameter.
Note: To replace the displayed value of a parameter with the

default value, press the UP/DOWN keys simultaneously.
Note: The most typical and necessary parameters to change are

the following parameter groups: Group 99: START-UP DATA,
Group 10: START/STOP/DIR, Group 11: REFERENCE
SELECT, Group 20: LIMITS, Group 21: START/STOP, Group
22: ACCEL/DECEL, Group 26: MOTOR CONTROL and Group
30: FAULT FUNCTIONS.
Note: To restore the default factory settings, select the HVAC

default application macro.

Start-up assistant mode

To start the Start-up assistant, follow these steps:

main menu.

press ENTER.
3 Scroll to Commission drive

with the UP/DOWN keys
and press SEL.
4 Change the values

suggested by the assistant
to your preferences and
then press SAVE after
every change.
5 After selecting the macro,

specify whether you want to
use the mechanical HAND-
OFF-AUTO switch.
6 After completing a task, the

Start-up assistant asks if
you want to continue with
the next one. Press OK
(when Continue is
highlighted) to continue
with the next task, select
Skip with the UP/DOWN
keys and press OK to move
to the next task without
doing this one or press
EXIT to stop the Start-up
assistant.
The Start-up assistant will guide you through the start-up.

The Start-up assistant guides you through the basic

programming of a new drive. (You should familiarize yourself
with basic control panel operation and follow the steps outlined
above.) At the first start, the drive automatically suggests
entering the first task, Language Select. The assistant also
checks the values entered to prevent entries that are out of
range.
The Start-up assistant is divided into tasks. You may activate the
tasks one after the other, as the Start-up assistant suggests, or
independently.
Note: If you want to set the parameters independently, use the

Parameters mode.
The order of tasks presented by the Start-up assistant depends

on your entries. The following task list is typical.
Task name Description

Spin the motor • Prompts for the control panel display
language selection
• Prompts for motor data
• Guides user through the rotation check
Commission drive • Prompts for motor data
Application • Prompts for the application macro selection
References 1 & 2 • Prompts for the source of speed references 1
and 2
• Prompts for reference limits
• Prompts for frequency (or speed) limits
Start/Stop Control • Prompts for the source of the start and stop
commands
• Prompts for the start and stop mode
definition
• Prompts for acceleration and deceleration
times
Protections • Prompts for current and torque limits
• Prompts for the use of Run enable and Start
enable signals
• Prompts for the use of the emergency stop
• Prompts for the Fault function selection
• Prompts for the Auto reset functions
selection

Task name Description

Constant Speeds • Prompts for the use of constant speeds
• Prompts for constant speed values
PID control • Prompts for PID settings
• Prompts for the source of the process
reference
• Prompts for reference limits
• Prompts for the source, limits and units of the
process actual value
• Defines the use of Sleep function
Low Noise Set-up • Prompts for the switching frequency
• Prompts for the definition of Flux optimization
• Prompts for the use of Critical speeds
Panel Display • Prompts for display variable and unit settings
Timed Functions • Prompts for the use of Timed functions
Outputs • Prompts for the signals indicated through the
relay outputs
• Prompts for the signals indicated through the
analog outputs AO1 and AO2. Sets the
minimum, maximum, scaling and inversion
values.

Changed parameters mode

The Changed parameters mode is used for viewing changed
parameters. The mode shows those parameters whose values
differ from the default values of the application macro currently
in use.
To access the Changed parameters mode, follow these steps:

main menu.
2 Select CHANGED PAR

and press ENTER.
3 A list of the changed

parameters is displayed.
Press EXIT to exit the
Changed parameters
mode, and again to return
to the main menu.

Drive parameter backup mode

Parameter backup mode is used to export parameters from one
drive to another or to make a backup of the drive parameters.
Uploading to panel stores all parameters, including two user sets
and an override set, to the drive control panel (operator keypad).
The full set, partial parameter set (application), user sets and
override set can then be downloaded from the control panel to
another drive or the same drive.
The control panel memory is non-volatile and does not depend
on the panel battery.
Depending on the motor and application, the following options
are available in the Drive parameter backup mode:
• UPLOAD TO PANEL – Copies all parameters from the drive
to the control panel. This includes all defined user parameter
sets, override parameter set and internal (not adjustable by
the user) parameters such as those created by the ID Run).
• BACKUP INFO – Shows the following information about the
drive whose parameters have been uploaded to the panel:
drive type, drive rating and FW (firmware) version.
• DOWNLOAD FULL SET – Restores the full parameter set
from the control panel to the drive. This writes all parameters,
including the internal non-user-adjustable motor parameters,
to the drive. It does not include the user parameter sets or the
override parameter set.
Note: Use the Download full set function only to restore a drive
from a backup if something has gone wrong or to transfer
parameters to systems that are identical to the original system.
• DOWNLOAD APPLICATION – Copies a partial parameter

set (part of the full set) from the control panel to the drive.
The partial set does not include user sets, override set,
internal motor parameters, parameters 9905…9909, 1605,
1607, 5201, nor any Group 51: EXT COMM MODULE and
Group 53: EFB PROTOCOL parameters.
This is recommended when using the same application for
drives of different sizes.
• DOWNLOAD USER SET 1 – Copies the parameters in user
set 1 from the control panel to the drive. A user set includes
Group 99: START-UP DATA parameters and the internal
motor parameters.

User set 1 must be first saved using parameter 9902 APPLIC

MACRO and then uploaded to the control panel before
downloading is possible.
• DOWNLOAD USER SET 2 – Copies the parameters in user
set 2 from the control panel to the drive. As DOWNLOAD
USER SET 1 above.
• DOWNLOAD OVERRIDE SET – Copies the parameters in
the override set from the control panel to the drive.
The override must be first saved (automatically, as defined by
Group 17: OVERRIDE) and then uploaded to the control
panel before downloading is possible.
Upload to Control Download

control panel full set
panel
Downloading the full set of parameters from one drive to similar

drives using the same application running identical motors

control panel application
panel
Downloading the same application to different drive sizes us-

ing the same application
Save user set 1/2

(par. 9902) to drive

control panel user set 1/2
panel
Downloading the parameters in a user set from one drive to simi-

lar drives using the same application running identical motors

To upload parameters to the control panel, follow these steps:

main menu.
2 Select PAR BACKUP with

press ENTER.
3 Scroll to UPLOAD TO
PANEL and press SEL.
4 Text “Copying parameters”

and a progress diagram are
displayed. Press ABORT if
you want to stop the
process.
5 Text “Parameter upload

successful” is displayed.
Press OK to return to the
PAR BACKUP menu.
Press EXIT twice to go to
the main menu. Now you
can disconnect the control
panel.

To download the full set of parameters to a drive, follow these

steps:

main menu.

the UP/DOWN keys.
3 Scroll to DOWNLOAD
FULL SET and press SEL.
4 Text “Downloading
parameters (full set)” is
process.
5 After the download stops,

the message “Parameter
download successfully
completed.” is displayed.
PAR BACKUP menu.
the main menu.

To download the application (partial parameter set) to a drive,

follow these steps:

main menu.

the UP/DOWN keys.
APPLICATION and press
SEL.
parameters (application)” is
process.
5 Text “Parameter download

successfully completed.”
Press OK to return to PAR
BACKUP menu.
the main menu.
Note: If upload or download of parameters is aborted, the partial

parameter set is not implemented.

To download the user set 1, user set 2 or override set to a drive,

follow these steps:

main menu.

the UP/DOWN keys.
USER SET1 / USER SET2
/ OVERR SET and press
SEL.
parameters (user set 1 /
user set 2 / override set)” is
process.
5 After the download stops,
the message “Parameter
download successfully
completed.” is displayed.
PAR BACKUP menu.
the main menu.

Clock set mode

The clock set mode is used for setting the time and date for the
internal clock of the ACH550. In order to use the timed functions
of the ACH550, the internal clock has to be set first. Date is used
to determine weekdays. It is shown in Fault logs.
To set the clock, follow these steps:

main menu.
2 Scroll to CLOCK SET with

press ENTER to go to the
Clock set mode.
3 Scroll to CLOCK
VISIBILITY with the UP/
DOWN keys and press SEL
to change the visibility of
the clock.
4 Scroll to SHOW CLOCK

and press SEL to make the
clock visible.
5 Scroll to TIME FORMAT

and press SEL.
6 The time formats are

displayed. Select a format
and press SEL to confirm
the selection.

7 Scroll to DATE FORMAT

and press SEL.
8 The date formats are

displayed. Select a format
and press OK to confirm
the selection.
9 Scroll to SET TIME with the

SEL.
10 Change the hours and

minutes with the UP/
DOWN keys and press OK
to save the values. The
active value is highlighted
in inverted color.
11 Scroll to SET DATE with
press SEL.
12 Change the days, months

and year with the UP/
DOWN keys and press OK
to save the values. The
active value is highlighted
in inverted color.
13 Scroll to DAYLIGHT
SAVING with the UP/
DOWN keys and press
SEL.

14 To disable automatic clock

transitions according to the
daylight saving changes,
select Off with the UP/
DOWN keys and press OK.
To enable automatic clock
transitions, select the
country or area whose
daylight saving changes
are followed and press OK.
(If you press HELP, you can
view the begin and end
dates of the period during
which daylight saving time
is used in each country or
area.)
15 Press EXIT twice to return
to the main menu.

I/O settings mode

The I/O settings mode is used for viewing and editing the I/O
settings.
To view and edit the I/O settings, follow these steps:

main menu.
2 Scroll to I/O SETTINGS

and press ENTER.
3 Scroll to the I/O setting you

want to view with the UP/
DOWN keys and press
SEL.
4 Select the setting you want

to view with the UP/DOWN
keys and press OK.
5 You can change the value

and save it by pressing
SAVE.
If you do not want to
change the setting, press
CANCEL.
6 Press EXIT three times to
return to the main menu.

Fault logger mode

The Fault logger mode is used for viewing faults. You can:
• view the drive fault history of maximum ten faults (after a
power off, only the three latest faults are kept in the memory)
• see the details of the three latest faults (after a power off, the
details of only the most recent fault is kept in the memory)
• read the help text for the fault.
To view the faults, follow the steps below. For more information
on faults, see section Correcting faults on page 349.

main menu.
2 Scroll to FAULT LOGGER

and press ENTER to go to
the Fault logger mode.
3 The display shows the fault

log starting with the latest
fault. The number on the
row is the fault code (see
the listing on page 350).
To see the details of a fault,
select it with the UP/DOWN
keys and press DETAIL.
4 Scroll the details with the
UP/DOWN keys.
To show the help text,
press DIAG. Scroll the help
text with the UP/DOWN
keys. After reading the
help, press OK to go back
to the previous display.
Press EXIT three times to
return to the main menu.

Application macros and wiring

This chapter contains the application macros used for defining a
group of parameters. Macros change a group of parameters to
new, predefined values. Use macros to minimize the need for
manual editing of parameters.
Applications
The following applications are included in this chapter:
1. HVAC default [for typical BMS (Building Management
System) applications]
2. Supply fan
3. Return fan
4. Cooling tower fan
5. Condenser
6. Booster pump
7. Pump alternation
8. Internal timer
9. Internal timer with constant speeds
10. Floating point
11. Dual setpoint PID
12. Dual setpoint PID with constant speeds
13. E-bypass (USA only)
14. Hand control.
Application macros and wiring 85

Selecting an application macro

To select an application macro, follow these steps:

main menu.

press ENTER.
3 Scroll to Application and

press SEL.
4 Select a macro with the UP/

DOWN keys and press
SAVE.
5 If you want to use the

mechanical HAND-OFF-
AUTO switch, press OK. If
you do not want to use it,
select No with the DOWN
key and then press OK.
To be able to use the
switch, EXT1 (HAND) Start
command must be
connected to DI1 and EXT2
(AUTO) Start command to
DI6.
86 Application macros and wiring

Restoring defaults
To restore the default factory settings, select the application
macro HVAC default.

1. HVAC default
The HVAC default application macro is used e.g. for typical BMS
applications.
The factory set configuration of inputs and outputs of the drive is
as shown in the figure on page 89.
When using a direct speed reference in the AUTO mode, the
speed reference must be connected to analog input 1 (AI1) and
the START command is given with digital input 1 (DI1). In the
HAND/OFF mode, the speed reference and START command
are given through the control panel (operator keypad).
If process PI(D) is used, the feedback signal must be connected
to analog input 2 (AI2). By default, the setpoint is set from the
control panel, but it can also be changed to analog input 1.
Process PI(D) must be commissioned and adjusted with
parameters (Group 40: PROCESS PID SET 1) or using the PID
control assistant (recommended).

HVAC default
for typical BMS applications
1 SCR Signal cable shield (screen)

1…10 kohm 2 AI1 External reference 1: 0(2)…10 V or 0(4)…20 mA
3 AGND Analog input circuit common
4 10V Reference voltage +10 VDC
3
5 AI2 Actual signal 1: 0(2)…10 V or 0(4)…20 mA
7 AO1 Output frequency: 0(4)…20 mA
8 AO2 Output current: 0(4)…20 mA
9 AGND Analog output circuit common
10 24V Auxiliary voltage output +24 VDC
11 GND Common for DI return signals
12 DCOM Digital input common for all
13 DI1 Start/Stop: Activation starts the drive
14 DI2 Not used
15 DI3 Constant speed 1 (par. 1202) 1
16 DI4 Start enable 1: Deactivation stops the drive 2
17 DI5 Not used
18 DI6 Not used
19 RO1C Relay output 1 (par. 1401)

20 RO1A Default operation
21 RO1B Ready => 19 connected to 21
24 RO2B Running => 22 connected to 24
27 RO3B Fault (-1) => 25 connected to 27
1
Not available if PID is activated
2 Disable/enable with parameter 1608
3
The sensor needs to be powered. See the manufacturer’s instructions. A connection
example of a two-wire 24 VDC / 4…20 mA sensor is shown on page 116.
Note: The drive starts only if possible protection functions (Run enable or Start enable 1 and
2) are activated from I/O or disabled with parameters.

2. Supply fan
This application macro is for supply fan applications where the
supply fan brings fresh air into the room according to the signals
received from the transducer. See the figure below.

Supply fan

3
14 DI2 Run enable: Deactivation stops the drive 2
18 DI6 Not used

1
2 Disable with parameters 1601, 1608 and 1609
3

3. Return fan
This application macro is for return fan applications where the
return fan takes air out of the room according to the signals

Return fan

3
18 DI6 Not used

1
2 Disable/enable with parameters 1601, 1608 and 1609
3

4. Cooling tower fan

This application macro is for cooling tower fan applications
where the fan speed is controlled according to the signals

Cooling tower fan

3
18 DI6 Not used

1
3

5. Condenser
This application macro is for condenser and liquid cooler
applications where the fan speed is controlled according to the
signals received from the transducer. See the figure below.

Condenser

3
18 DI6 Not used

1
3

6. Booster pump
This application macro is for booster pump applications where
the pump speed is controlled according to the signal received
from the transducer. See the figure below.

Booster pump

3
18 DI6 Not used

1
3

7. Pump alternation
This application macro is intended for pump alternation
applications, usually used in booster stations in buildings. The
pressure in the network is adjusted by changing the speed of the
pump according to the signal received from the pressure
transducer and adding auxiliary pumps directly on-line when
needed. By default, this macro can use one auxiliary pump. To
use more auxiliary pumps, refer to parameter Group 81: PFA
CONTROL. See the figure below.
When process PI(D) is used in the AUTO mode, the feedback
signal must be connected to analog input 2 (AI2) and the START
command is given with digital input 1 (DI1). By default, the
setpoint is set from the control panel (operator keypad), but it
can also be given through the analog input 1. Process PI(D)
must be commissioned and adjusted with parameters (Group
40: PROCESS PID SET 1) or using the PID control assistant
(recommended).

Pump alternation

2
15 DI3 Not used
16 DI4 Interlock: Deactivation stops the drive
17 DI5 Interlock: Deactivation stops the motor
18 DI6 Not used

1
Disable/enable with parameter 1601
2 The sensor needs to be powered. See the manufacturer’s instructions. A connection

8. Internal timer
This application macro is for applications where the motor is
started and stopped with a built-in timer. This macro has also a
boost function which operates the motor after digital input 3
(DI3) has been momentarily activated. An example of the timer
usage is shown below. For further information see chapter Real-
time clock and timed functions.
24:00
22:00
20:00
18:00
16:00
14:00 Time Time period 2 Time
period period
12:00 1 3
10:00
Time
08:00 period
06:00 4
04:00
02:00
00:00
Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun

Internal timer

2
13 DI1 Start/Stop: Activation starts the drive in the timer mode
15 DI3 Boost: Momentary activation starts the boost function
18 DI6 Not used

1
Disable/enable with parameters 1601, 1608 and 1609

9. Internal timer with constant speeds / Powered roof

ventilator
This application macro is intended e.g. for timed powered roof
ventilator applications which alternate between two constant
speeds (constant speed 1 and 2) with a built-in timer. This macro
also has a boost function, which activates constant speed 2 after
digital input 3 (DI3) has been momentarily activated. See the
figure below.
For further information, see chapter Real-time clock and timed
functions.

Internal timer with constant speeds

2 AI1 Not used
5 AI2 Not used
13 DI1 Start/Stop: Activation starts the drive in the timer mode
15 DI3 Boost: Momentary activation starts the boost function
18 DI6 Not used

1

10. Floating point

This application macro is for applications where speed reference
needs to be controlled through digital inputs (DI5 and DI6). By
activating digital input 5, the speed reference increases. By
activating digital input 6, the speed reference decreases. If both
digital inputs are active or inactive, the reference does not
change.
Note: When constant speed 1 is activated using digital input 3

(DI3), the reference speed is the value of parameter 1202. The
value remains as the reference speed when digital input 3 is
deactivated.

Floating point

2 AI1 Not used
5 AI2 Not used
17 DI5 Reference up: Activation increases the reference
18 DI6 Reference down: Activation decreases the reference

1
2 Disable/enable with parameters 1601 and 1608

11. Dual setpoint PID

This application macro is intended for dual setpoint PI(D)
applications where process PI(D) controllers setpoint can be
changed to another value by activating digital input 3 (DI3).
Process PI(D) setpoints are set to the drive internally with
parameters 4011 (set 1) and 4111 (set 2).

Dual setpoint PID

2
15 DI3 Setpoint selection: Set 1 / Set 2
18 DI6 Not used

1

12. Dual setpoint PID with constant speeds

This application macro can be used for applications with two
constant speeds, active PID and alternating PID between two
setpoints using digital inputs. When using a transmitter, the
signal can be used as the process actual value for the PID
controller (AI2) or as a direct speed reference (AI1).
PID setpoints are set to the drive internally with parameters 4011
(set 1) and 4111 (set 2) and they can be changed with DI3. PID
can be commissioned and adjusted with parameters or with the
PID assistant (recommended).
Digital input (DI2) has a factory set control location EXT1/EXT2
selection function. When digital input is active, the control
location is EXT2 and PID is activated.
Digital inputs 4 (DI4) and 5 (DI5) have factory set constant
speed 1 and 2 functions. Constant speed 1 (par. 1202) is
selected by activating digital input 4 (DI4) and constant speed 2
(par. 1203) by activating digital input 5 (DI5).

Dual setpoint PID with constant speeds

2
14 DI2 EXT1/EXT2 selection: Activation takes PID in use
15 DI3 Setpoint selection: Set 1 / Set 2
18 DI6 Not used

1

13. E-bypass (USA only)

This application macro is intended to be used with an electronic
bypass device, which can be employed to bypass the drive and
connect the motor directly on-line.

E-bypass

2
15 DI3 Not used
16 DI4 Not used
17 DI5 Not used
18 DI6 Not used

1
Disable/enable with parameter 1601

14. Hand control

This application macro is intended to be used when
commissioning with Spin the Motor assistant where all analog
and digital inputs are disabled by default.
The drive is started with the HAND key and giving the speed
reference with the arrow keys.
Note: Starting in the AUTO mode requires configuring the I/O

with parameters or the assistant or selecting another macro
(recommended).

Hand control

2 AI1 Not used
5 AI2 Not used
13 DI1 Not used
14 DI2 Not used
15 DI3 Not used
16 DI4 Not used
17 DI5 Not used
18 DI6 Not used


Connection example of a two-wire sensor

Many ACH550 applications use process PI(D) and need a
feedback signal from the process. The feedback signal is
typically connected to analog input 2 (AI2). The macro wiring
diagrams in this chapter show the connection when a separately
powered sensor is used. The figure below gives an example of a
connection using a two-wire sensor.
X1 / control board
4…20 mA 5 AI2 Process actual value measurement,
P
I 6 AGND 0(4) … 20 mA, Rin = 100 ohm
…
X1 / control board
10 +24 V Auxiliary voltage output, non-isolated,
11 GND 24 VDC, 250 mA
Note: The sensor is supplied through its current output. Thus

the output signal must be 4…20 mA, not 0…20 mA.

Real-time clock and timed functions

This chapter contains the information for real-time clock and
timed functions.
Real-time clock and timed functions

The real-time clock has the following features:
• four daily times
• four weekly times
• timed boost function, e.g. a set constant speed which is on
for a certain pre-programmed time. Activated with a digital
input.
• timer enable with digital inputs
• timed constant speed selection
• timed relay activation.
For more information, see Group 36: TIMED FUNCTIONS.
Note: To be able to use the timed functions, the internal clock

has to be set first. For information on the Clock set mode, see
chapter Start-up and control panel.
Note: The timed functions work only when the control panel is
connected to the drive.
Note: Removing the control panel for upload/download

purposes does not affect the clock.
Note: Daylight saving changeover is automatic.
Real-time clock and timed functions 117

Using the timer

The timer is configured in four stages. They are:
1. Enabling the timer. Configure how the timer is activated.
See page 120.
2. Setting the time period. Define the time and day when the
timer operates. See page 121.
3. Creating the timer. Assign the selected time period to
certain timer(s). See page 122.
4. Connecting the parameters. Connect selected parameters
to the timer. See page 124.
TIME PERIOD 1
2
3602 START TIME 1
3603 STOP TIME 1
3604 START DAY 1
3605 STOP DAY 1
TIME PERIOD 2
3606 START TIME 2 TIMER 1
3607 STOP TIME 2 3
3626 TIMER 1 SRC
3608 START DAY 2
3609 STOP DAY 2
TIMER 2
TIME PERIOD 3 3627 TIMER 2 SRC
3610 START TIME 3
3611 STOP TIME 3 TIMER 3
3612 START DAY 3
3628 TIMER 3 SRC
3613 STOP DAY 3
TIME PERIOD 4 TIMER 4
3614 START TIME 4 3629 TIMER 4 SRC
3615 STOP TIME 4
3616 START DAY 4
3617 STOP DAY 4 Start/Stop, opens dampers
according to period 1
BOOSTER
Activates PID during
3622 BOOST SEL set periods 2 and 3
3623 BOOST TIME
Changes PID setpoint according
to period 4 and boost
Activates boost
DI1…DI6
DI1(INV)…DI6(INV)
118 Real-time clock and timed functions

TIMER 1 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS

1002 EXT2 COMMANDS 4
3626 TIMER 1 SRC 1102 EXT1/EXT2 SEL
1201 CONST SPEED SEL
TIMER 2 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1…1403 RELAY OUTPUT 3
1410 RELAY OUTPUT 4…1412 RELAY OUTPUT 6
3627 TIMER 2 SRC 4027 PID 1 PARAM SET
8126 TIMED AUTOCHANGE
TIMER 3
3628 TIMER 3 SRC
Parameters connected to a timer

The following parameters can be connected to a timer:
• 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS – External start and stop command.
Starts the drive when the timer is activated and stops drive
when the timer is deactivated.
• 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS – External start and stop command.
Starts the drive when the timer is activated and stops the
drive when the timer is deactivated.
• 1102 EXT1/EXT2 SEL – Defines the source for start/stop
commands and reference signals. Depending on the
selection, either EXT 1 or EXT 2 is used as the source for the
commands.
• 1201 CONST SPEED SEL – Selects a constant speed when
timer 1 is active.
• 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 – Timer energizes a relay output.
• 4027 PID 1 PARAM SET – Timer selects between two Process
PID sets.
• 8126 TIMED AUTOCHANGE – Timer enables the autochange in
PFA operation.

1. Enabling the timer

The timer can be enabled from one of the digital inputs or
inverted digital inputs.
To enable the timer, follow these steps:

main menu.

keys. Then press ENTER
to go to the Parameters
mode.
3 Scroll to group 36 TIMED

FUNCTIONS with the UP/
DOWN keys and press
SEL.
4 Scroll to TIMERS ENABLE

and press EDIT.
5 The current value is

displayed. Use the UP/
DOWN keys to change the
value.
6 After selecting the new

value, press SAVE to save
the value.
7 The new value is displayed

below the TIMERS
ENABLE text. Press EXIT
twice to return to the main
menu.

Note: Start and Run enable can be assigned to the same digital
input.
2. Setting the time period

The example shows how to set a start time. In addition, the stop
time and the start and stop days have to be set in the same
manner. These constitute a time period.

main menu.

mode.

DOWN keys and press
SEL.
4 Scroll to START TIME 1

and press EDIT.
5 Change the highlighted part

of the time with the UP/
DOWN keys. Pressing
NEXT moves to the next
part. Press SAVE to save
the time.


below the START TIME 1
text. Press EXIT to return to
the main menu. Continue
with STOP TIME 1, START
DAY 1 and STOP DAY 1.
3. Creating a timer
Different time periods can be collected in a timer and connected
to parameters. The timer can act as the source of start/stop and
change direction commands, constant speed selection and relay
activation signals. Time periods can be in multiple timed
functions, but a parameter can only be connected to a single
timer. It is possible to create up to four timers.
To create a timer, follow these steps:

main menu.

mode.

DOWN keys and press
SEL.
4 Scroll to TIMER 1 SRC with

press EDIT.
5 The current value is

displayed. Change the
value with the UP/DOWN
keys.

6 Press SAVE to save the

new value.

below the TIMER 1 SRC
text. Press EXIT to return to
the main menu.

4. Connecting parameters
The parameter example 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS has to be
connected to the timer so that the timer acts as the source of
start/stop commands. A parameter can only be connected to
one timer.
To connect the parameter, follow these steps:

main menu.

mode.
3 Scroll to group 12
CONSTANT SPEEDS and
press SEL.
4 Scroll to parameter 1201

CONSTANT SPEED SEL
and press EDIT.
5 Select the created timer

and press SAVE.

under CONST SPEED
SEL. Press EXIT to return
to the main menu.

Example of timer use

The following example shows how a timer is used and
connected to different parameters. The example uses the same
settings as application macro 9 Internal timer with constant
speeds. In this example, the timer will be set to function every
weekday from 6 AM to 8 AM and 4 PM to 6 PM. On weekends,
the timer is activated between 10 AM and 12 AM and 8 PM and
10 PM.
22:00
Time period 4
20:00
18:00
Time period 2
16:00
12:00
Time period 3
10:00
08:00
Time period 1
06:00
00:00
1. Go to parameter Group 36: TIMED FUNCTIONS and

enable the timer. The timer can be enabled directly or
through any free digital input.
2. Go to parameters 3602…3605 and set the start time to
6 AM and stop time to 8 AM. Then set the start and stop
days to Monday and Friday. Now time period 1 is set.
4 PM and stop time to 6 PM. Then set the start and stop
days to Monday and Friday. Now time period 2 is set.
10 AM and stop time to 12 AM. Then set the start and stop
days to Saturday and Sunday. Now time period 3 is set.


8 PM and stop time to 10 PM. Then set the start and stop
days to Saturday and Sunday. Now time period 4 is set.
6. Create the timer by going to parameter 3626 TIMER 1 SRC
and select all the created time periods (P1+P2+P3+P4).
7. Go to Group 12: CONSTANT SPEEDS and select Timer 1
in parameter 1201 CONSTANT SPEED. Now timer 1 acts as
the source of constant speed selection.
8. Set the drive to AUTO mode for the timer to function.
Note: For more information about the Timed functions, see

Group 36: TIMED FUNCTIONS on page 258.
Boost
The boost function operates the drive for a certain
predetermined time. The time is defined with parameters and
activated with a selected digital input. The boost time starts
running after the digital input has been activated momentarily.
Boost must be connected to the timers and selected when a
timer is created. Boost is typically used for amplified air
ventilation.
Input activated Input deactivated
DI active
Boost active Boost time

To configure the boost, follow these steps:

main menu.

mode.

DOWN keys and press
SEL.
4 Scroll to BOOST SEL with

press EDIT.
5 Select a digital input as the

source of the boost signal
with the UP/DOWN keys.
Then press SAVE.
6 Scroll to BOOST TIME with

press EDIT.

7 Change the highlighted part

of the time with the UP/
DOWN keys. Pressing
NEXT moves to the next
part. Press SAVE to save
the time.
8 Scroll to TIMER 1 SRC and

press EDIT.
9 Select BOOST with the UP/

DOWN keys and press
SAVE.

under TIMER 1 SRC. Press
EXIT to return to the main
menu.

Serial communications

This chapter contains the information for the serial
communications of the ACH550.
Serial communications 129

System overview
The drive can be connected to an external control system,
usually a fieldbus controller, either:
• via a plug-in fieldbus adapter (EXT FBA) module mounted in
expansion slot 2 of the drive. EXT FBAs must be ordered
separately. EXT FBAs include:
- PROFIBUS DP
- INTERBUS
- LonWorks
- CANopen
- DeviceNet
- Modbus Plus
- ControlNet
- Ethernet
or
• via the standard RS485 interface at terminals X1:28…32 on
the control board of the drive. The standard RS485 interface
provides the following embedded fieldbus (EFB) protocols:
- Modbus
- Metasys N2
- FLN
- BACnet.
For more information, refer to the Embedded Fieldbus (EFB)
Control Manual [3AFE68320658 (English)].
Both the plug-in fieldbus adapter (EXT FBA) module and the
embedded fieldbus (EFB) protocol are activated by means of
parameter 9802 COMM PROT SEL.
130 Serial communications

The figure below shows the ACH550 fieldbus control.
Fieldbus controller
Other
devices
Fieldbus
adapter
Slot 2
Standard serial
link RS485 Either a plug-in fieldbus adapter
X1:28…32 module or the standard serial RS485
interface can be used at a time.
Data flow
Process
Control word I/O
reference (cyclic)
Status word
Actual values
Service
messages
(Acyclic)
Parameter R/W requests/responses
When using serial communication, the ACH550 can either:

• receive all of its control information from the fieldbus, or
• be controlled from some combination of fieldbus control and
other available control locations, such as digital or analog
inputs, and the control panel (operator keypad).

Note: Descriptions of the embedded fieldbus (EFB) protocols

are not included in this manual. Please refer to the separate
Embedded Fieldbus (EFB) Control Manual [3AFE68320658
(English)], available on the Internet (go to http://www.abb.com
and enter words “EFB protocols for ACH550-01/02/U1/U2” in the
Search field) for the embedded protocols. The following sections
describe plug-in fieldbus adapter (EXT FBA) modules.
Mechanical and electrical installation of the plug-in

fieldbus
The plug-in fieldbus adapter (EXT FBA) module is inserted into
expansion slot 2 of the drive.
The module is held in place with plastic retaining clips and two
screws. The screws also provide the earthing of the cable shield
connected to the module and interconnect the GND signals of
the module and the control board of the drive.
On installation of the module, the signal and power connection
to the drive is automatically established through the 34-pin
connector.
Mounting procedure:
1. Insert the module carefully into expansion slot 2 of the drive
until the retaining clips lock the module into position.
2. Fasten the two screws (included) to the stand-offs.
3. Open the appropriate knockout in the conduit/gland box and
install the cable clamp/gland for the network cable.
4. Route the network cable through the cable clamp/gland.
5. Connect the network cable to the network connector of the
module. Detailed configuration is available in the
appropriate EXT FBA manual.
6. Tighten the cable clamp/gland.
7. Install the conduit/gland box cover (1 screw).

The figure below shows the mounting of the fieldbus module.
1
2
The figure below shows the connecting of the network cable.
6
3
4

Note: Correct installation of the screws is essential for fulfilling

the EMC requirements and for proper operation of the module.
Note: Install the input power and motor cables first.
Setting up communication through a plug-in fieldbus

adapter (EXT FBA) module
Before configuring the drive for fieldbus control, the fieldbus
adapter (EXT FBA) module must be mechanically and
electrically installed according to the instructions given in this
manual and the fieldbus adapter module manual.
The communication between the drive and the fieldbus adapter
module is then activated by setting parameter 9802 COMM PROT
SEL to EXT FBA. After the communication is initialized, the
configuration parameters of the module become available in the
drive in parameter Group 51: EXT COMM MODULE.
Code Description Range

9802 COMM PROT SEL 0…5
Selects the communication protocol.
0 = NOT SEL – No communication protocol selected.
1 = STD MODBUS – The drive communicates via a Modbus controller via
the RS485 serial link (X1 communications, terminal).
2 = N2 – The drive communicates via an N2 controller via the RS485
serial link (X1 communications, terminal).
• See also parameter Group 53: EFB PROTOCOL.
3 = FLN – The drive communicates via an FLN controller via the RS485
4 = EXT FBA – The drive communicates via a fieldbus adapter module in
option slot 2 of the drive.
• See also parameter Group 51: EXT COMM MODULE.
5 = BACNET – The drive communicates via a BACNET controller via the
RS485 serial link (X1 communications, terminal).


5101 FBA TYPE
Displays the type of the connected fieldbus adapter module.
0 = NOT DEFINED – Module not found or not connected. Check chapter
Mechanical installation in the fieldbus user’s manual and check that
parameter 9802 is set to 4 = EXT FBA.
1 = PROFIBUS-DP
16 = INTERBUS
21 = LONWORKS
32 = CANopen
37 = DEVICENET
64 = MODBUS PLUS
101 = CONTROLNET
128 = ETHERNET
5102 FB PAR 2…FB PAR 26 0…65535
… Refer to the communication module documentation for more
5126 information on these parameters.
5127 FBA PAR REFRESH 0=DONE, 1=REFRESH
Validates any changed fieldbus parameter settings.
• After refreshing, the value reverts automatically to DONE.
5128 FILE CPI FW REV 0…0xFFFF
Displays the CPI firmware revision of the drive’s fieldbus adapter
configuration file. Format is xyz, where:
• x = major revision number
• y = minor revision number
• z = correction number.
Example: 107 = revision 1.07
5129 FILE CONFIG ID 0…0xFFFF
Displays the revision of the drive’s fieldbus adapter module’s
configuration file identification.
• File configuration information depends on the drive application
program.
5130 FILE CONFIG REV 0…0xFFFF
Contains the revision of the drive’s fieldbus adapter module
configuration file.
Example: 1 = revision 1


5131 FBA STATUS 0…6
Contains the status of the adapter module.
0 = IDLE – Adapter not configured.
1 = EXEC. INIT – Adapter is initializing.
2 = TIME OUT – A time-out has occurred in the communication between
the adapter and the drive.
3 = CONFIG ERROR – Adapter configuration error.
• The major or minor revision code of the adapter’s CPI firmware
revision differs from that stated in the drive’s configuration file.
4 = OFF-LINE – Adapter is off-line.
5 = ON-LINE – Adapter is on-line.
6 = RESET – Adapter is performing a hardware reset.
5132 FBA CPI FW REV 0…0xFFFF
Contains the revision of the module’s CPI program. Format is xyz,
where:
5133 FBA APPL FW REV 0…0xFFFF
Contains the revision of the module’s application program. Format is
xyz, where:
The new settings will take effect when the drive is next powered
up, or when parameter 5127 is activated.
Drive control parameters

After the fieldbus communication has been set up, the drive
control parameters listed in the tables below should be checked
and adjusted where necessary.
The “Setting for fieldbus control & description” column gives the
value to use when the fieldbus interface is the desired source or
destination for that particular signal as well as a description of
the parameter.
The fieldbus signal routes and message composition are
explained later in section Fieldbus control interface.

Control command source selection

Code Setting for fieldbus control & description Range
1001 EXT1 COMMANDS 0…14
Defines external control location 1 (EXT1) – the configuration of start,
stop and direction commands.
10 = COMM – Assigns the fieldbus Command Word as the source for the
start/stop and direction commands.
• Bits 0,1, 2 of Command Word 1 (parameter 0301) activates the start/
• See the fieldbus user’s manual for detailed instructions.
1003 DIRECTION 1…3
Defines the control of the motor rotation direction.
1 = FORWARD – Rotation is fixed in the forward direction.
2 = REVERSE – Rotation is fixed in the reverse direction.
3 = REQUEST – Rotation direction can be changed on command.
Reference signal source selection

1102 EXT1/EXT2 SE -6…12
Defines the source for selecting between the two external control
locations EXT1 or EXT2. Thus, defines the source for Start/Stop/Direction
commands and reference signals.
8 = COMM – Assigns control of the drive via external control location
EXT1 or EXT2 based on the fieldbus control word.
• Bit 5 of Command Word 1 (parameter 0301) defines the active
external control location (EXT1 or EXT2).
1103 REF1 SELECT 0…17
Selects the signal source for external reference REF1.
8 = COMM – Defines the fieldbus as the reference source.
9 = COMM+AI1 – Defines a fieldbus and analog input 1 (AI1) combination
as the reference source. See Analog input reference correction on
page 188.
10 = COMM*AI1 – Defines a fieldbus and analog input 1 (AI1)
combination as the reference source. See Analog input reference
correction on page 188.


page 188.

Digital output signal source selection

1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 0…45
Defines the event or condition that activates relay 1 – what relay output
1 means.
35 = COMM – Energize the relay based on the input from the fieldbus
communication.
• Fieldbus writes a binary code in parameter 0134 that energizes
relay 1…relay 6 according to the table below.
• 0 = De-energize the relay, 1 = Energize the relay.
Par. 0134 Binary RO6 RO5 RO4 RO3 RO2 RO1

0 000000 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 000001 0 0 0 0 0 1
2 000010 0 0 0 0 1 0
3 000011 0 0 0 0 1 1
4 000100 0 0 0 1 0 0
5…62 … … … … … … …
63 111111 1 1 1 1 1 1
36 = COMM(-1) – Energize the relay based on the input from the fieldbus
communication.
0 000000 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 000001 1 1 1 1 1 0
2 000010 1 1 1 1 0 1
3 000011 1 1 1 1 0 0
4 000100 1 1 1 0 1 1
5…62 … … … … … … …
63 111111 0 0 0 0 0 0

2 means.
• See 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1.
3 means.


1410 RELAY OUTPUT 4…6 0…45
… Defines the event or condition that activates relay 4…6 – what relay
1412 outputs 4…6 means.

Analog output signal source selection

1501 AO1 CONTENT 99…199
Defines the content for analog output AO1.
135 = cOMM VALUE 1 – Energize output based on the input from fieldbus
communication.
136 = cOMM VALUE 2 – Energize output based on the input from fieldbus
communication.
1502 AO1 CONTENT MIN -
Sets the minimum AO (mA)
content value. P 1505 /
• Content is the P 1511
parameter
selected by
parameter 1501.
• Minimum value
refers to the P 1504 /
minimum content P 1510 AO CONTENT
value that will be
converted to an P 1502/1508
P 1503/1509
analog output. AO (mA)
• These P 1505 /
parameters P 1511
(content and
current min. and
max. settings)
provide scale
and offset
adjustment for P 1504 /
the output. See P 1510
the figure. AO CONTENT
P 1502/1508
P 1503/1509
1503 AO1 CONTENT MAX -
Sets the maximum content value
• Content is the parameter selected by parameter 1501.
• Maximum value refers to the maximum content value that will be
converted to an analog output.
1504 MINIMUM AO1 0.0…20.0 mA
Sets the minimum output current.
1505 MAXIMUM AO1 0.0…20.0 mA
Sets the maximum output current.


1506 FILTER AO1 0.0…10.0 s
Defines the filter time constant for AO1.
• The filtered signal reaches 63% of a step change within the time
specified.
• See the figure for parameter 1303 in chapter Parameter listing and
descriptions.
1507 AO2 CONTENT 99…199
Defines the content for analog output AO2. See AO1 CONTENT above.
Sets the minimum content value. See AO1CONTENT MIN above.
Sets the maximum content value. See AO1 CONTENT MAX above.
1510 MINIMUM AO2 0…20.0 mA
Sets the minimum output current. See MINIMUM AO1 above.
1511 MAXIMUM AO2 0…20.0 mA
Sets the maximum output current. See MAXIMUM AO1 above.
1512 FILTER AO2 0…10.0 s
Defines the filter time constant for AO2. See FILTER AO1 above.

System control inputs

1601 RUN ENABLE -6…7
Selects the source of the Run enable signal. See the figure on page
210.
Run enable signal.
• Bit 6 of Command Word 1 (parameter 0301) activates the Run
disable signal.
Note: Hardware is bypassed if a command is the source of the Run
enable signal.
1604 FAULT RESET SEL -6…8
Selects the source for the fault reset signal. The signal resets the drive
after a fault trip if the cause of the fault no longer exists.
8 = COMM – Defines the fieldbus as a fault reset source.
• The Command Word is supplied through fieldbus communication.
• The bit 4 of Command Word 1 (parameter 0301) resets the drive.
1607 PARAM. SAVE 0=DONE, 1=SAVE
Saves all altered parameters to the permanent memory.
• Parameters altered through a fieldbus are not automatically saved to
the permanent memory. To save, you must use this parameter.
• If 1602 PARAMETER LOCK = 2 (NOT SAVED), parameters altered from
the control panel (operator keypad) are not saved. To save, you must
use this parameter.
• If 1602 PARAMETER LOCK = 1 (OPEN), parameters altered from the
control panel are stored immediately to permanent memory.
0 = DONE – The value changes automatically when all parameters are
saved.
1 = SAVE – Saves altered parameters to the permanent memory.

Communication fault functions

3018 COMM FAULT FUNC 0…3
Defines the drive response if the fieldbus communication is lost.
0 = NOT SEL – No response
1 = FAULT – Displays a fault (28, SERIAL 1 ERR) and the drive coasts to
stop.
2 = CONST SP7 – Displays an alarm (2005, IO COMM) and sets the speed
using 1208 CONST SPEED 7. This “alarm speed” remains active until
the fieldbus writes a new reference value.
3 = LAST SPEED – Displays an alarm (2005, IO COMM) and sets the speed
using the last operating level. This value is the average speed over
the last 10 seconds. This “alarm speed” remains active until the
fieldbus writes a new reference value.
WARNING! If you select CONST SP7, or LAST SPEED, make sure that
continued operation is safe when the fieldbus communication is lost.
3019 COMM FAULT TIME 0…60.0 s
Sets the communication fault time used with 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC.
• Brief interruptions in the fieldbus communication are not treated as
faults if they are less than the COMM FAULT TIME value.
PID control setpoint source selection

4010 SET POINT SEL 0…19
Defines the reference signal source for the PID controller.
• Parameter has no significance when the PID regulator is by-passed
(see 8121 REG BYPASS CTRL).
8 = COMM – Fieldbus provides reference.
9 = COMM + AI1 – Defines a fieldbus and analog input 1 (AI1)
10 = COMM * AI1 – Defines a fieldbus and analog input 1 (AI1)


Analog input reference correction
Parameter values 9, 10, and 14…17 use the formula in the following
table.
Value setting Calculation of the AI reference
C+B C value + (B value - 50% of reference value)
C*B C value * (B value / 50% of reference value)
C-B (C value + 50% of reference value) - B value
C/B (C value * 50% of reference value) / B value
Where:
• C = Main Reference value
(= COMM for values 9, 10 and = AI1 for values 14…17)
• B = Correcting reference
(= AI1 for values 9, 10 and = AI2 for values 14…17).
Example: The figure 120
shows the reference 17 (/)
source curves for 100
value settings 9, 10,
and 14…17, where: 80
• C = 25%. 9, 14 (+)
60
• P 4012 SETPOINT
MIN = 0. 40 10, 15 (*)
• P 4013 SETPOINT
MAX = 0. 20
• B varies along the 16 (-)
horizontal axis. 0
0 100% B

Fieldbus control interface

The basic control interface between the fieldbus system and the
drive consists of the control word, speed reference, status word
and actual speed or frequency. Depending on the type of the
plug-in fieldbus adapter, additional process data can be defined
by means of the parameters in Group 51: EXT COMM MODULE
or by means of fieldbus-specific parameters accessible via the
network (refer to the fieldbus user's manual). The maximum
amount of process data is limited to 15 words. The actual
amount of process data supported by the plug-in fieldbus
adapter module depends on the fieldbus adapter type.
Process data from fieldbus Process data from drive to

controller to drive fieldbus controller
Output word Contents Input word Contents
1 Process data 1 1 Process data 1
Note that the word 'output' is used to describe data flow from the
fieldbus controller to the drive and the word 'input' is used to
describe data flow from the drive to the fieldbus controller. In
other words, the direction of flow (input or output) is seen from
the fieldbus controller point of view.

Typically, input word 1 and 2 contain the control word and speed
reference. The meaning of the remaining input words can be
freely selected by means of the parameters in Group 51: EXT
COMM MODULE. Refer to the fieldbus user's manual for
detailed instructions on the mapping of input words. The input
words are 16-bit integers that can be used to set a reference or
parameter value, or to activate digital and analog outputs.
Typically, output word 1 and 2 contain the status word and actual
speed or frequency. The meaning of the remaining output words
can be freely selected by means of the parameters in Group 51:
EXT COMM MODULE. Refer to the fieldbus user's manual for
detailed instructions on the mapping of output words. The output
words are 16-bit integers indicating actual signals and
parameter values. The scaling of the output words sent to the
fieldbus controller depends on the selected actual signal or drive
parameter; please refer to chapter Parameter listing and
descriptions.

Communication profiles
When communicating via the plug-in fieldbus adapter, the
ACH550 supports multiple profiles for control and status
information. The ACH550 detects automatically which
communication profile is used by the plug-in fieldbus adapter.
• ABB DRIVES (Vendor Specific) - The ABB Drives Profile
standardizes the control interface among ABB drives. This
profile is based on the PROFIBUS interface. It is discussed in
detail in section ABB Drives Profile below.
• GENERIC DRIVE (Drive Profile) - The Generic Drive Profile
provides the means to fulfil the drive profile for each fieldbus
type according to its international standard. Examples of
such drive profiles are:
- PROFIdrive for PROFIBUS,
- AC/DC Drive for DeviceNet,
- DRIVECOM for InterBus etc.
The Generic Drive Profile interface is discussed in detail in
section Generic Drive Profile below.
ABB Drives Profile

The ACH550 supports a virtual data set interface supporting two
data sets, one in each direction. Each data set consists of three
16-bit words called data words. The meaning and scaling of the
data words are fixed.
The mapping of the data words to the process data is realized
with the parameters in Group 51: EXT COMM MODULE using
the values 1 to 6 as shown in the table below. However, certain
fieldbus protocols (like PROFIBUS) have a fixed allocation for
data words 1, 2, 4 and 5. Refer to the fieldbus user's manual for
a detailed description of the mapping of process data.
Process data from fieldbus controller to drive (Data set 1)

Data word Contents
1 Control word
2 Reference 1
3 Reference 2

Process data from drive to fieldbus controller (Data set 2)

Data word Contents
4 Status word
5 Actual speed
6 Actual torque
Control Word. The Control Word is the principal means for

controlling the drive from a fieldbus system. The fieldbus
controller sends the Control Word to the drive. The drive
switches between states according to the bit-coded instructions
in the Control Word. Using the Control Word requires the
following:
• The drive is in remote (AUTO) control.
• The serial communication channel is defined as the source
for controlling commands (set using parameters 1001 EXT1
COMMANDS, 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS and 1102 EXT1/EXT2 SEL).
• The plug-in fieldbus adapter module is activated by setting
parameter 9802 COMM PROT SEL to 4 (EXT FBA).
• The plug-in fieldbus adapter module is configured to use the
vendor specific mode or vendor specific objects.
The following table and the state diagram on page 154 describe
the Control Word content.
Control Word
Bit Name Value Comments
0 OFF1 CONTROL 1 Enter READY TO OPERATE.
0 Stop along currently active deceleration
ramp (2203/2205). Enter OFF1 ACTIVE;
proceed to READY TO SWITCH ON unless
other interlocks (OFF1, OFF3) are active.
1 OFF2 CONTROL 1 Continue operation (OFF2 inactive).
0 Emergency OFF, coast to stop.
Enter OFF2 ACTIVE; proceed to
sWITCH-ON INHIBITED.

Control Word
2 OFF3 CONTROL 1 Continue operation (OFF3 inactive).
0 Emergency stop, stop within time
defined by parameter 2208. Enter OFF3
ACTIVE, proceed to sWITCH-ON INHIBITED.
WARNING! Ensure that the motor and
driven machine can be stopped using
this stop mode.
3 INHIBIT_ 1 Enter OPERATION ENABLED (Note that
OPERATION also the Run enable signal must be
active. See parameter 1601 RUN ENABLE.
If parameter 1601 is set to COMM, this bit
also activates the Run enable signal.)
0 Inhibit operation. Enter OPERATION
INHIBITED.
4 RAMP_OUT_ZERO 1 Normal operation.

Enter RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR:
OUTPUT ENABLED.
0 Force Ramp Function Generator output

to zero.
Drive ramps to stop (current and DC
voltage limits in force).
5 RAMP_HOLD 1 Normal operation.
Enter RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR:
OUTPUT ENABLED.
0 Halt ramping (Ramp Function Generator

output held).
6 RAMP_IN_ 1 Normal operation. Enter OPERATING.
ZERO
0 Force Ramp Function Generator input to
zero.
7 RESET 0=>1 Fault reset if an active fault exists. Enter
SWITCH-ON INHIBITED. Effective if
parameter 1604 is set to COMM.
0 Continue normal operation.
8…9 Unused

Control Word
10 REMOTE_CMD 1 Fieldbus control enabled.
0 Control Word < > 0 or Reference <> 0:
Retain last Control Word and Reference.
Control Word = 0 and Reference = 0.
Fieldbus control enabled.
Reference and deceleration/acceleration
ramp are locked.
11 EXT CTRL LOC 1 Select External Control Location EXT2.
Effective if parameter 1102 is set to
COMM.
0 Select External Control Location EXT1.

Effective if parameter 1102 is set to
COMM.
12… Unused
15

Status Word. The Status Word is a 16-bit word containing status

information, sent by the drive to the fieldbus controller. The
following table and the state diagram on page 154 describe the
Status Word content.
Status Word
Description (corresponds to states/boxes
Bit Name Value
in the state diagram)
0 RDY_ON 1 READY TO SWITCH ON
0 NOT READY TO SWITCH ON
1 RDY_RUN 1 READY TO OPERATE
0 OFF1 ACTIVE
2 RDY_REF 1 OPERATION ENABLED
0 NOT READY (OPERATION INHIBITED)
3 TRIPPED 0…1 FAULT
0 No fault
4 OFF_2_STA 1 OFF2 INACTIVE
0 OFF2 ACTIVE
5 OFF_3_STA 1 OFF3 inactive

0 OFF3 ACTIVE
6 SWO_ON_INHIB 1 SWITCH-ON INHIBITED
0
7 ALARM 1 Alarm is active.
0 No alarm
8 AT_SETPOINT 1 OPERATING. Actual value equals reference
value (= is within tolerance limits).
0 Actual value differs from reference value (= is
outside tolerance limits).
9 REMOTE 1 Drive control location: REMOTE (AUTO)
0 Drive control location: LOCAL (REM)

Status Word
Description (corresponds to states/boxes
Bit Name Value
in the state diagram)
10 ABOVE_LIMIT 1 The value of the supervised parameter
equals to or is greater than supervision high
limit. This bit remains '1' until the value of the
supervised parameter has dropped below the
supervision low limit. Refer to Group 32:
SUPERVISION.
0 The value of the first supervised parameter is
below supervision low limit. This bit remains
'0' until the value of the supervised parameter
exceeds the supervision high limit. Refer to
Group 32: SUPERVISION.
11 EXT CTRL LOC 1 External control location 2 (EXT2) selected
0 External control location 1 (EXT1) selected
12 EXT RUN 1 Run enable signal received
ENABLE
0 No Run enable signal received
13 Reserved
…
15

State Diagram. The state diagram below describes the start-

stop function of Control Word (CW) and Status Word (SW) bits.
Emergency Stop Emergency Off Fault
OFF3 (CW Bit2=0) OFF2 (CW Bit1=0)
OFF3 OFF2
(SW Bit5=0) (SW Bit4=0) FAULT (SW Bit3=1)
ACTIVE ACTIVE
f=0 / I=0 (CW Bit7=1)*
From any state

SWITCH-ON
OFF1 (CW Bit0=0) MAINS OFF INHIBITED (SW Bit6=1)
f=0 / I=0 Power ON (CW Bit0=0)
A C D NOT READY
(SW Bit0=0)
TO SWITCH ON
(CW Bit3=0) (CW xxxx xxxx xxxx x110)
OPERATION READY TO (SW Bit0=1)

(SW Bit2=0)
INHIBITED SWITCH ON
(CW xxxx xxxx xxxx x111)
C D READY TO
(SW Bit1=1)
OPERATE
(CW Bit5=0) (CW Bit3=1 and

SW Bit12=1)
OPERATION
D (SW Bit2=1)
ENABLED
A
(CW Bit6=0) (CW Bit5=1)
RFG: ACCELERATOR
KEY ENABLED
State
CW = CONTROL WORD C
SW = STATUS WORD (CW Bit6=1)
Path described in the example
I = Param. 0104 CURRENT OPERATING (SW Bit8=1)
f = Param. 0103 OUTPUT FREQ
n = Speed D
RFG = Ramp Function Generator
*This state transition also occurs if the fault is reset from any other source (e.g. digital input).

Reference 1. Reference 1 is a 16-bit word comprising of a sign

bit and a 15-bit integer. It can be used as the primary reference
(speed or frequency), REF1. A negative reference (indicating
reversed rotation direction) is indicated by the two's complement
of the corresponding positive reference value.
The required parameter settings are:
• Use 1102 EXT1/EXT2 SEL to identify the control input that
selects between EXT1 and EXT2. Then that control input must
select EXT1.
• 1103 REF1 SELECT = 8 (COMM), 9 (COMM+AI1), or
10 (COMM*AI1).
Reference 2. Reference 2 is a 16-bit word comprising of a sign

bit and a 15-bit integer. It can be used as the secondary
reference (speed, frequency, torque, PID), REF2. A negative
reference (indicating reversed rotation direction) is indicated by
the two's complement of the corresponding positive reference
value.
The required parameter settings are:
• Use 1102 EXT1/EXT2 SEL to identify the control input that
selects between EXT1 and EXT2. Then that control input must
select EXT2.
• 1106 REF2 SELECT = 8 (COMM), 9 (COMM+AI1), or
10 (COMM*AI1).

Reference scaling. The scaling of the fieldbus references REF1

and REF2 is shown in the table below.
Reference Range Reference Scaling Remarks

type
REF1 -32767… Speed or -20000 = Final reference
+32767 frequency -[par. 1105] limited by
0=0 1104/1105.
+20000 = Actual motor
[par. 1105] speed limited by
2001/2002
[speed] or 2007/
2008
[frequency].
REF2 -32767… Speed or -10000 = Final reference
+32767 frequency -[par. 1108] limited by
0=0 1107/1108.
+10000 = Actual motor
[par. 1108] speed limited by
2001/2002
[speed] or 2007/
2008
[frequency].
Torque -10000 = Final reference
-[par. 1108] limited by
0=0 2015/2017
+10000 = [torque 1] or
[par. 1108] 2016/2018
[torque 2].
PID -10000 = Final reference
Reference -[par. 1108] limited by
0=0 4012/4013 [PID
+10000 = set 1] or 4112/
[par. 1108] 4113 [PID set
2].
Note: The setting of parameter 1104 REF1 MIN and 1107 REF2
MIN has no effect on the scaling of the references.
The value 20000 in case of REF1 and the value 10000 in case
of REF2 correspond to a reference value of 100% (see
Reference handling on page 158).

When parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT or 1106 REF2 SELECT is set

to COMM+AI1 or COMM*AI1, the reference is scaled as follows:
Refer- Value AI reference scaling

ence setting
REF1 COMM COMM [%] + (AI [%] - 0,5 * REF1 MAX [%])
+AI1 Fieldbus reference
correction coefficient
(100 + 0.5 × [par. 1105])%
100%
(100 – 0.5 × [par. 1105])%

0 50% 100% AI1 Input
signal
COMM* COMM [%] * (AI [%] / 0,5 * REF1 MAX [%])

AI1 Fieldbus reference
200%
100%
0%
AI1 Input
0 50% 100% signal
REF2 COMM COMM [%] + (AI [%] - 0,5 * REF2 MAX [%])
+AI1 Fieldbus reference
(100 + 0.5 × [par. 1108])%
100%
(100 – 0.5 × [par. 1108])%

0 50% 100% AI1 Input
signal

Refer- Value AI reference scaling

ence setting
COMM* COMM [%] * (AI [%] / 0,5 * REF2 MAX [%])

AI1 Fieldbus reference
200%
100%
0%
0 50% 100% AI1 Input
signal
Reference handling. The control of the rotation direction is

configured for each control location (EXT1 and EXT2) using the
parameters in Group 10: START/STOP/DIR. Fieldbus
references are bipolar, i.e. they can be negative or positive. The
following diagrams illustrate how Group 10: START/STOP/DIR
parameters and the sign of the fieldbus reference interact to
produce the reference REF1/REF2.
*Direction determined by the sign of

COM.REF
Par. 1003 Resultant

DIRECTION = REF1/2
FORWARD
Max. ref.
Fieldbus
ref. 1/2
-100% 100%
-163% 163%
–[Max. ref.]

Par. 1003 Resultant

DIRECTION = REF1/2
REVERSE
Max. ref.
-163% 163%
Fieldbus -100% 100%
ref. 1/2
–[Max. ref.]
Par. 1003 Resultant

DIRECTION = REF1/2
REQUEST
Max. ref.
-163%
Fieldbus -100%
Ref. 1/2
100%
163%
–[Max. ref.]
Actual Values. Actual Values are 16-bit words containing

information on selected operations of the drive. The mapping of
the actual values is realized with the parameters in Group 51:
EXT COMM MODULE. The scaling of the integers sent to the
fieldbus controller as Actual Values depends on the selected
drive parameter; refer to chapter Parameter listing and
descriptions.
Data words 5 and 6 are scaled as follows:
Data word Contents Scaling

5 Actual speed -20000 … +20000 =
-[par. 1105] … +[par. 1105]
6 Torque -10000 … +10000 =
-100% … +100%

Generic Drive Profile

The Generic Drive Profile provides the means to fulfil the drive
profile for each fieldbus type according to its international
standard. The Generic Drive Profile comprises as a minimum of
the Control Word, Status Word, Speed Reference and Actual
Speed. The mapping of these and other process data depends
on the type of the fieldbus adapter. Refer to the fieldbus user's
manual for a detailed description of the mapping of process
data.
Control Word. The Control Word is the principal means for

controlling the drive from a fieldbus system. The fieldbus
controller sends the Control Word to the drive. The drive
switches between states according to the bit-coded instructions
in the Control Word. Using the Control Word requires the
following:
• The drive is in remote control (AUTO mode).
• The serial communication channel is defined as the source
for controlling commands from EXT1 (set using parameters
1001 EXT1 COMMANDS and 1102 EXT1/EXT2 SEL).
• The external plug-in fieldbus adapter is activated by setting
parameter 9802 COMM PROT SEL to 4 (EXT FBA).
• The external plug-in fieldbus adapter is configured to use the
drive profile mode or drive profile objects.
The content of the Control Word depends on the type of the

fieldbus adapter used. Refer to the fieldbus user's manual for a
detailed description of the meaning of the Control Word bits.
Status Word. The Status Word is a 16-bit word containing status

information, sent by the drive to the fieldbus controller. The
content of the Status Word depends on the type of the fieldbus
adapter used. Refer to the fieldbus user's manual for a detailed
description of the meaning of the Status Word bits.

Speed Reference.The Speed Reference is a 16-bit word

comprising of a sign bit and a 15-bit integer. A negative
reference (indicating reversed rotation direction) is indicated by
the two's complement of the corresponding positive reference
value. The scaling of the Speed Reference is fieldbus type
specific. Refer to the fieldbus user's manual for a detailed
description of the scaling of the Speed Reference.
The use of REF2 is not supported by the Generic Drive Profile.
Reference scaling. The scaling of the Speed Reference is

fieldbus type specific. However, the relation of 100% reference
towards the drive is fixed as described in the table below. Refer
to the fieldbus user's manual for a detailed description of the
range and scaling of the Speed Reference.
Reference
Reference Range Scaling Remarks
type
REF Fieldbus Speed -100% = -[par. 9908] Final reference
specific 0=0 limited by
+100 = [par. 9908] 1104/1105. Actual
motor speed
limited by 2001/
2002 [speed].
Frequency -100% = -[par. 9907] Final reference
0=0 limited by
+100 = [par. 9907] 1104/1105. Actual
motor speed
limited by 2007/
2008 [frequency].
Actual Values. Actual Values are 16-bit words containing

information on selected operations of the drive. The mapping of
the actual values is realized with the parameters in Group 51:
EXT COMM MODULE. The scaling of the integers sent to the
fieldbus controller as Actual Values depends on the selected
drive parameter. Refer to chapter Parameter listing and
descriptions.

The Actual Speed is scaled as follows:
Actual
Range Reference type Scaling
value
SPEED Fieldbus Speed -100% = -[par. 9908]
specific 0=0
+100 = [par. 9908]
Frequency -100% = -[par. 9907]
0=0
+100 = [par. 9907]
Fault handling
The ACH550 indicates all faults in clear text and fault number in
the control panel display. Refer to chapter Diagnostics and
maintenance. Additionally, a fault code is allocated to each fault
name shown in parameters 401, 412 and 413. The fieldbus-
specific fault code is indicated as a hexadecimal value coded
according to the DRIVECOM specification. Note that not all
fieldbuses support the fault code indication. The table below
defines the fault codes for each fault name.
Fault name in control panel Drive Fieldbus fault code
fault code
OVERCURRENT 1 2310h
DC OVERVOLT 2 3210h
DEV OVERTEMP 3 4210h
SHORT CIRC 4 2340h
DC UNDERVOLT 6 3220h
AI1 LOSS 7 8110h
AI2 LOSS 8 8110h
MOT OVERTEMP 9 4310h
PANEL LOSS 10 5300h
ID RUN FAIL 11 FF84h
MOTOR STALL 12 7121h
EXT FAULT 1 14 9000h
EXT FAULT 2 15 9001h
EARTH FAULT 16 2330h
UNDERLOAD 17 FF6Ah
THERM FAIL 18 5210h

OPEX LINK 19 7500h

OPEX PWR 20 5414h
CURR MEAS 21 2211h
SUPPLY PHASE 22 3130h
OVERSPEED 24 7310h
DRIVE ID 26 5400h
CONFIG FILE 27 630Fh
SERIAL 1 ERR 28 7510h
EFB CON FILE 29 6306h
FORCE TRIP 30 FF90h
EFB 1 31 FF92h
EFB 2 32 FF93h
EFB 3 33 FF94h
MOTOR PHASE 34 FF56h
OUTP WIRING 35 FF95h
INCOMPATIBLE SW 36 630Fh
CB OVERTEMP 37 4110h
SERF CORRUPT 101 FF55h
SERF MACRO 103 FF55h
DSP T1 OVERLOAD 201 6100h
DSP STACK ERROR 204 6100h
CB ID ERROR 206 5000h
EFB LOAD ERROR 207 6100h
PAR HZRPM 1000 6320h
PAR PFA REF NEG 1001 6320h
PAR AI SCALE 1003 6320h
PAR AO SCALE 1004 6320h
PAR PCU 2 1005 6320h
PAR EXT RO 1006 6320h
PAR FBUS 1007 6320h
PAR PFA MODE 1008 6320h
PAR PCU 1 1009 6320h
PAR PFA & OVERRIDE 1010 6320h

PAR OVERRIDE 1011 6320h

PAR PFA IO 1 1012 6320h
PAR PFA IO 2 1013 6320h
PAR PFA IO 3 1014 6320h

Parameter listing and descriptions

This chapter contains the parameter listing of predefined
application macros and descriptions of individual parameters for
the ACH550.
Parameter groups
The parameters are grouped as follows:
• Group 99: START-UP DATA – Defines the data required to
set up the drive and enter motor information.
• Group 01: OPERATING DATA – Contains the operating data
including actual signals.
• Group 03: FB ACTUAL SIGNALS – Monitors fieldbus
communications.
• Group 04: FAULT HISTORY – Stores a recent fault history
reported by the drive.
• Group 10: START/STOP/DIR – Defines external sources for
commands that enable start, stop and direction changes.
Locks direction or enables direction control.
• Group 11: REFERENCE SELECT – Defines how the drive
selects between command sources.
• Group 12: CONSTANT SPEEDS – Defines a set of constant
speeds.
• Group 13: ANALOGUE INPUTS – Defines the limits and
filtering for analog inputs.
• Group 14: RELAY OUTPUTS – Defines the conditions which
activate relay outputs.
• Group 15: ANALOGUE OUTPUTS – Defines the drive’s
analog outputs.
• Group 16: SYSTEM CONTROLS – Defines system level
locks, Group 17: OVERRIDE – Defines override enabling/
disabling, override activation signal, override speed/
frequency and pass code.
• Group 20: LIMITS – Defines minimum and maximum limits
for driving the motor.
Parameter listing and descriptions 165

• Group 21: START/STOP – Defines how the motor starts and

stops.
• Group 22: ACCEL/DECEL – Defines ramps which control the
rate of acceleration and deceleration.
• Group 23: SPEED CONTROL – Defines variables for speed
control.
• Group 25: CRITICAL SPEEDS – Defines critical speeds or
speed ranges.
• Group 26: MOTOR CONTROL – Defines motor control
variables.
• Group 29: MAINTENANCE TRIG – Defines usage levels and
trigger points.
• Group 30: FAULT FUNCTIONS – Defines faults and
responses.
• Group 31: AUTOMATIC RESET – Defines conditions for
automatic resets.
• Group 32: SUPERVISION – Defines supervision for signals.
• Group 33: INFORMATION – Contains software information.
• Group 34: PANEL DISPLAY – Defines the content for control
panel display.
• Group 35: MOTOR TEMP MEAS – Defines motor
overheating detection and reporting.
• Group 36: TIMED FUNCTIONS – Defines timed functions.
• Group 40: PROCESS PID SET 1 – Defines a process PID
control operation mode for the drive.
• Group 41: PROCESS PID SET 2 – Defines a process PID
control operation mode for the drive.
• Group 42: EXT/TRIM PID – Defines parameters for External
PID.
• Group 51: EXT COMM MODULE – Defines set-up variables
for fieldbus communication module.
• Group 52: PANEL COMM – Defines settings for Modbus
fieldbus system.
• Group 53: EFB PROTOCOL – Defines set-up variables for
EFB communication.
• Group 81: PFA CONTROL – Defines pump and fan
alternation mode of operation.
• Group 98: OPTIONS – Configures options for drive.
166 Parameter listing and descriptions

Group 99: START-UP DATA

This group defines special start-up data required to:
• set up the drive
• enter motor information.

9901 LANGUAGE 0…16
Selects the display language.
0 = ENGLISH 1 = ENGLISH (AM) 2 = DEUTSCH 3 = ITALIANO

4 = ESPAÑOL 5 = PORTUGUES 6 = NEDERLANDS 7 = FRANCAIS
8 = DANSK 9 = SUOMI 10 = SVENSKA 11 = RUSSKI
12 = POLSKI 13 = TÜRKÇE 14 = CZECH
9902 APPLIC MACRO 1…14, 0…-4
Selects an application macro. Application macros automatically edit
parameters to configure the ACH550 for a particular application.
1 = HVAC DEFAULT 2 = SUPPLY FAN 3 = RETURN FAN 4 = COOLING TOWER
FAN 5 = CONDENSER 6 = BOOSTER PUMP 7 = PUMP ALTERNATION
8 = INTERNAL TIMER 9 = INTERNAL TIMER WITH CONSTANT SPEEDS
10 = FLOATING POINT 11 = DUAL SETPOINT PID 12 = DUAL SETPOINT PID
WITH CONSTANT SPEEDS 13 = E-BYPASS 14 = HAND CONTROL 0 = USER S1
LOAD -1 = USER S1 SAVE -2 = USER S2 LOAD -3 = USER S2 SAVE -4 = OR
SET LOAD
With USER S1 SAVE and USER S2 SAVE, it is possible to save two different
parameter sets into the drive permanent memory for later use. Each set
contains parameter settings, including Group 99: START-UP DATA, and
the results of the motor identification run. With USER S1 LOAD and USER
S2 LOAD the sets can be taken back in use.
The automatic saving and loading of the override parameter set is
defined by Group 17: OVERRIDE. With OR SET LOAD, it can be loaded
manually.
9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 1=SPEED,
3=SCALAR
Selects the motor control mode.
1 = VECTOR: SPEED – sensorless vector control mode
• Reference 1 is speed reference in rpm.
• Reference 2 is speed reference in % (100% is absolute maximum
speed, equal to the value of parameter 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED, or
2001 MINIMUM SPEED if the absolute value of the minimum speed is
greater than the maximum speed).
3 = SCALAR: FREQ – scalar control mode
• Reference 1 is frequency reference in Hz.
• Reference 2 is frequency reference in % (100% is absolute
maximum frequency, equal to the value of parameter 2008 MAXIMUM
FREQUENCY, or 2007 MINIMUM FREQUENCY if the absolute value of the
minimum speed is greater than the maximum speed).


9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT 200…600 V,
US: 230…690 V
Defines the nominal motor voltage.
• Must equal the value on the motor rating plate.
• Sets the maximum drive output voltage supplied to the motor.
• The ACH550 cannot supply the motor with a voltage greater than the
mains voltage.
Output voltage
P 9905
Output
frequency
P 9907
9906 MOTOR NOM CURR type dependent

Defines the nominal motor current.
• Range allowed: (0.2…2.0) · IN (where IN is drive current).
9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ 10.0…500 Hz
Defines the nominal motor frequency.
• Range: 10…500 Hz (typically 50 or 60 Hz)
• Sets the frequency at which output voltage equals the MOTOR NOM
VOLT.
• Field weakening point = Nom freq * Supply Volt / Mot Nom Volt
9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED 50…30000 rpm
Defines the nominal motor speed.
9909 MOTOR NOM POWER type dependent
Defines the nominal motor power.


9910 MOTOR ID RUN 0=NO ID RUN,
1=STANDARD
This parameter controls a self-calibration process called the Motor Id
Run. During this process, the drive operates the motor in order to
identify its characteristics, and then optimizes control by creating a
motor model. This motor model is especially effective when:
• Operation point is near zero speed.
• Operation requires a torque range above the motor nominal torque,
over a wide speed range, and without any measured speed feedback
(i.e. without a pulse encoder).
If no Motor Id Run is performed, the drive uses a less detailed motor
model created when the drive is first run. This “First Start” model is
updated automatically* after any motor parameter is changed. To
update the model, the drive magnetizes the motor for 10 to 15 seconds
at zero speed.
*Creating the “First Start” model does require that either 9904 =
1 (VECTOR: SPEED), or 9904 = 3 (SCALAR: FREQ) and 2101 = 3 (SCALAR
FLYST) or 5 (FLY + BOOST).
Note: Motor models work with internal parameters and user-defined
motor parameters. In creating a model the drive does not change any
user-defined parameters.
0 = OFF – Disables the Motor Id Run creation process. (Does not disable
the operation of a motor model.)
1 = ON – Enables a Motor Id Run at the next start command. After run
completion, this value automatically changes to 0.
To perform a Motor Id Run:
1. De-couple load from motor (or otherwise reduce load to near zero).
2. Verify that motor operation is safe:
• The run automatically operates the motor in the forward direction –
confirm that forward rotation is safe.
• The run automatically operates the motor at 50…80% of nominal
speed – confirm that operation at these speeds is safe.
3. Check following parameters (if changed from factory settings):
• 2001 MINIMUM SPEED < 0
• 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED > 80% of motor rated speed.
• 2003 MAX CURRENT > 100% of I2N value
• The maximum torque (parameters 2014, 2017 and/or 2018) > 50%.
4. On the control panel, select:
• Select PARAMETERS.
• Select group 99.
• Select parameter 9910.

Group 01: OPERATING DATA

This group contains drive operating data, including actual
signals. The drive sets the values for actual signals, based on
measurements or calculations. You cannot set these values.

0102 SPEED 0…30000 rpm
Calculated speed of the motor (rpm)
0103 OUTPUT FREQ 0.0…500.0 Hz
Frequency (Hz) applied to the motor. (Also shown by default in the
OUTPUT display.)
0104 CURRENT type dependent
Motor current, as measured by the ACH550. (Also shown by default in
the OUTPUT display.)
0105 TORQUE -200…200%
Output torque. Calculated value of torque on motor shaft in % of the
motor nominal torque.
0106 POWER type dependent
Measured motor power in kW
0107 DC BUS VOLTAGE 0…2.5*VdN
DC bus voltage in VDC, as measured by the ACH550
0109 OUTPUT VOLTAGE 0…2.0*VdN
Voltage applied to the motor
0110 DRIVE TEMP 0…150ºC
Temperature of the drive heatsink in centigrade
0111 EXTERNAL REF 1 0…300000 rpm/
0…500 Hz
External reference, REF1, in rpm or Hz – units determined by parameter
9904


0112 EXTERNAL REF 2 0…100%
(0…600% for torque)
External reference, REF2, in %
0113 CTRL LOCATION 0=HAND, 1=EXT1,
2=EXT2
Active control location. Alternatives are:
0 = HAND
1 = EXT1
2 = EXT2
0114 RUN TIME (R) 0…9999 h
Drive’s accumulated running time in hours (h)
• Can be reset by pressing the UP and DOWN keys simultaneously
when in parameter set mode.
0115 KWH COUNTER (R) 0…9999 kWh
Drive’s accumulated power consumption in kilowatt hours
0116 APPL BLK OUTPUT 0…100%
Application block output signal. Value is from either:
• PFA control, if PFA Control is active, or
• parameter 0112 EXTERNAL REF 2.
0118 DI1-3 STATUS 000…111 (0…7 decimal)
Status of the three digital inputs
• Status is displayed as a binary number.
• 1 indicates that the input is activated.
• 0 indicates that the input is deactivated.
DI1 DI2 DI3
0119 DI4-6 STATUS 000…111 (0…7 decimal)

Status of the three digital inputs
• See parameter 0118 DI1-3 STATUS.
0120 AI1 0…100%
Relative value of analog input 1 in %
0121 AI2 0…100%
Relative value of analog input 2 in %


0122 RO1-3 STATUS 0…111 (0…7 decimal)
Status of the three relay outputs
• 1 indicates that the relay is energized.
• 0 indicates that the relay is de-energized.
RELAY 1 STATUS
RELAY 2 STATUS
RELAY 3 STATUS
0123 RO4-6 STATUS 0…111 (0…7 decimal)

Status of the three relay outputs. See parameter 0122.
0124 AO1 0…20 mA
Analog output 1 value in milliamperes
0125 AO2 0…20 mA
Analog output 2 value in milliamperes
0126 PID 1 OUTPUT -1000…1000%
Process PID (PID1) controller output value in %
0127 PID 2 OUTPUT -100…100%
External PID (PID2) controller output value in %
0128 PID 1 SETPNT unit and scale defined
by par. 4006/4106 and
PID1 controller setpoint signal 4007/4107
• Units and scale defined by PID parameters
0129 PID 2 SETPNT unit and scale defined
by par. 4206 and 4207
PID2 controller setpoint signal
0130 PID 1 FBK unit and scale defined
by par. 4006/4106 and
PID1 controller feedback signal 4007/4107
0131 PID 2 FBK unit and scale defined
par. 4206 and 4207
PID2 controller feedback signal


0132 PID 1 DEVIATION unit and scale defined
by par. 4006/4106 and
Difference between the PID1 controller 4007/4107
reference value and actual value
0133 PID 2 DEVIATION unit and scale defined
by par. 4206 and 4207
Difference between the PID2 controller reference value and actual
value
0134 COMM RO WORD 0…65535
Free data location that can be written from the serial link
• Used for relay output control
• See parameter 1401.
0135 COMM VALUE 1 -32768…+32767
0136 COMM VALUE 2 -32768…+32767
0137 PROCESS VAR 1 -
Process variable 1
• Defined by parameters in Group 34: PANEL DISPLAY
Process variable 2
Process variable 3
0140 RUN TIME 0…499.99 kh
Drive’s accumulated running time in thousands of hours (kh).
• Cannot be reset.
0141 MWH COUNTER 0…9999 MWh
Drive’s accumulated power consumption in megawatt hours.
0142 REVOLUTION CNTR 0…9999
Motor’s accumulated revolutions in millions of revolutions.
0143 DRIVE ON TIME (HI) 0…65535
Drive’s accumulated power on-time in days.


0144 DRIVE ON TIME (LO) 0…43200
Drive’s accumulated power on-time in 2 second ticks (30 ticks = 60
seconds).
0145 MOTOR TEMP 10…200ºC /
0…5000 ohm
Motor temperature in degrees centigrade / PTC resistance in ohms.
• Applies only if motor temperature sensor is set up. See parameter
3501.
0150 CB TEMP -20.0…150.0ºC
Temperature of the drive control board in degrees centigrade.
Note: Some drives have a control board (OMIO) that does not support
this feature. These drives always show the constant value of 25.0ºC.

Group 03: FB ACTUAL SIGNALS

This group monitors fieldbus communications. See also chapter
Serial communications.

0301 FB CMD WORD 1 -
Read-only copy of the Fieldbus Command Word 1
• The fieldbus command is the principal means for controlling the drive
from a fieldbus controller. The command consists of two Command
Words. Bit-coded instructions in the Command Words switch the
drive between states.
• To control the drive using the Command Words, an external location
(EXT1 or EXT2) must be active and set to COMM. (See parameters
1001 and 1002.)
• The control panel displays the word in hex. For example, all zeros
and a 1 in Bit 0 display 0001. All zeros and a 1 in Bit 15 display 8000.
Bit # 0301, FB CMD WORD 1 0302, FB CMD WORD 2

0 STOP FBLOCAL_CTL
1 START FBLOCAL_REF
2 REVERSE START_DISABLE1
3 LOCAL START_DISABLE2
4 RESET Reserved
5 EXT2 Reserved
6 RUN_DISABLE Reserved
7 STPMODE_R Reserved
8 STPMODE_EM Reserved
9 STPMODE_C Reserved
10 RAMP_2 Reserved
11 RAMP_OUT_0 REF_CONST
12 RAMP_HOLD REF_AVE
13 RAMP_IN_0 LINK_ON
14 RREQ_LOCALLOC REQ_STARTINH
15 TORQLIM2 OFF_INTERLOCK


0302 FB CMD WORD 2 -
Read-only copy of the Fieldbus Command Word 2
0303 FB STS WORD 1 -
Read-only copy of the Status Word 1
• The drive sends status information to the fieldbus controller. The
status consists of two Status Words.
Bit # 0303, FB STS WORD 1 0304, FB STS WORD 2

0 READY ALARM
1 ENABLED REQ_MAINT
2 STARTED DIRLOCK
3 RUNNING LOCALLOCK
4 ZERO_SPEED CTL_MODE
5 ACCELERATE Reserved
6 DECELERATE Reserved
7 AT_SETPOINT Reserved
8 LIMIT Reserved
9 SUPERVISION Reserved
10 REV_REF REQ_CTL
11 REV_ACT REQ_REF1
12 PANEL_LOCAL REQ_REF2
13 FIELDBUS_LOCAL REQ_REF2EXT
14 EXT2_ACT ACK_STARTINH
15 FAULT ACK_OFF_ILCK
0304 FB STS WORD 2 -

Read-only copy of the Status Word 2


0305 FAULT WORD 1 -
Read-only copy of the Fault Word 1
• When a fault is active, the corresponding bit for the active fault is set
in the Fault Words.
• Each fault has a dedicated bit allocated within Fault Words.
• See Fault listing on page 350 for a description of the faults.
Bit # 0305, FAULT WORD 1 0306, FAULT WORD 2 0307, FAULT WORD 3
0 OVERCURRENT UNDERLOAD EFB 1
1 DC OVERVOLT THERM FAIL EFB 2
2 DEV OVERTEMP OPEX LINK EFB 3
3 SHORT CIRC OPEX PWR INCOMPATIBLE SW
4 Reserved CURR MEAS Reserved
5 DC UNDERVOLT SUPPLY PHASE Reserved
6 AI1 LOSS Reserved Reserved
7 AI2 LOSS OVERSPEED Reserved
8 MOT OVERTEMP Reserved Reserved
9 PANEL LOSS DRIVE ID Reserved
10 ID RUN FAIL CONFIG FILE System Error
11 MOTOR STALL SERIAL 1 ERR System Error
12 CB OVERTEMP EFB CON FILE System Error
13 EXT FAULT 1 FORCE TRIP System Error
14 EXT FAULT 2 MOTOR PHASE System Error
15 EARTH FAULT OUTP WIRING Param. Setting Fault
0306 FAULT WORD 2 -

0307 FAULT WORD 3 -


0308 ALARM WORD 1 -
Read-only copy of the ALARM WORD 1
• When an alarm is active, the corresponding bit for the active alarm is
set in the Alarm Words.
• Each alarm has a dedicated bit allocated within Alarm Words.
• Bits remain set until the whole alarm word is reset. (Reset by writing
zero to the word).
Bit # 0308, ALARM WORD 1 0309, ALARM WORD 2

0 OVERCURRENT OFFBUTTON 0*
1 OVERVOLTAGE PID SLEEP
2 UNDERVOLTAGE ID RUN
3 DIR LOCK OVERRIDE
4 IO COMM START ENABLE 1 MISSING
5 AI1 LOSS START ENABLE 2 MISSING
6 AI2 LOSS EMERGENCY STOP
7 PANEL LOSS Reserved
8 DEVICE OVERTEMP INPUT PHASE LOSS
9 MOTOR TEMP Reserved
10 UNDERLOAD
11 MOTOR STALL
12 AUTORESET
13 AUTOCHANGE
14 PFA INTERLOCK
15 Reserved
0309 ALARM WORD 2 -

Read-only copy of the ALARM WORD 2

Group 04: FAULT HISTORY

This group stores a recent history of the faults reported by the
drive.

0401 LAST FAULT fault codes (control
panel displays as text)
0 = Clear the fault history (on panel = NO RECORD).
n = Fault code of the last recorded fault
0402 FAULT TIME 1 date dd.mm.yy/
power-on time in days
Day on which the last fault occurred. Either as:
• Date if real time clock is operating.
• Number of days after power on if real time clock is not used, or was
not set.
0403 FAULT TIME 2 time hh.mm.ss
Time at which the last fault occurred. Either as:
• Real time, in format hh:mm:ss, if real time clock is operating.
• The time since power on (less the whole days reported in 0402), in
format hh:mm:ss, if real time clock is not used, or was not set.
0404 SPEED AT FLT -
Motor speed (rpm) at the time the last fault occurred
0405 FREQ AT FLT -
Frequency (Hz) at the time the last fault occurred
0406 VOLTAGE AT FLT -
DC bus voltage (V) at the time the last fault occurred
0407 CURRENT AT FLT -
Motor current (A) at the time the last fault occurred
0408 TORQUE AT FLT -
Motor torque (%) at the time the last fault occurred
0409 STATUS AT FLT -
Drive status (hex code word) at the time the last fault occurred
0410 DI1-3 AT FLT 000…111 (binary)
Status of digital inputs 1…3 at the time the last fault occurred
0411 DI4-6 AT FLT 000…111 (binary)
Status of digital inputs 4…6 at the time the last fault occurred
0412 PREVIOUS FAULT 1 as par. 0401
Fault code of the second last fault. Read-only.


0413 PREVIOUS FAULT 2 as par. 0401
Fault code of the third last fault. Read-only.

Group 10: START/STOP/DIR

This group:
• defines external sources (EXT1, and EXT2) for commands that
enable start, stop and direction changes
• locks direction or enables direction control. To select
between the two external locations, use parameter 1102 in
the next group.

0 = NOT SEL – No external start, stop and direction command source
1 = DI1 – Two-wire Start/Stop
• Start/Stop is through digital input DI1 (DI1 activated = Start; DI1 de-
activated = Stop).
• Parameter 1003 defines the direction. Selecting 1003 = 3 (REQUEST)
is the same as 1003 = 1 (FWD).
2 = DI1, 2 – Two-wire Start/Stop, Direction
activated = Stop).
• Direction control (requires parameter 1003 = 3 (REQUEST)) is
through digital input DI2 (DI2 activated = Reverse; DI2 de-activated =
Forward).
3 = DI1P, 2P – Three-wire Start/Stop
• Start/Stop commands are through momentary push-buttons (the P
stands for “pulse”).
• Start is through a normally open push-button connected to digital
input DI1. In order to start the drive, the digital input DI2 must be
activated prior the pulse in DI1.
• Connect multiple Start push-buttons in parallel.
• Stop is through a normally closed push-button connected to digital
input DI2.
• Connect multiple Stop push-buttons in series.
4 = DI1P, 2P, 3 – Three-wire Start/Stop, Direction
• Start/Stop commands are through momentary push-buttons, as
described for DI1P, 2P.
through digital input DI3.
(DI3 activated = Reverse; DI3 de-activated = Forward).


5 = DI1P, 2P, 3P – Start Forward, Start Reverse, and Stop
• Start and Direction commands are given simultaneously with two
separate momentary push-buttons (the P stands for “pulse”).
• Start Forward command is through a normally open push-button
connected to digital input DI1. In order to start the drive, the digital
input DI3 must be activated during the pulse in DI1.
• Start Reverse command is through a normally open push-button
connected to digital input DI2. In order to start the drive, the digital
input DI3 must be activated prior the pulse in DI2.
• Connect multiple Start push-buttons in parallel.
• Stop is through a normally closed push-button connected to digital
input DI3.
• Connect multiple Stop push-buttons in series.
• Requires parameter 1003 = 3 (REQUEST).
6 = DI6 – Two-wire Start/Stop
activated = Stop).
7 = DI6, 5 – Two-wire Start/Stop/Direction
activated = Stop).
through digital input DI5.
(DI5 activated = Reverse; DI5 de-activated = Forward).
8 = KEYPAD – control panel
• Start/Stop and Direction commands are through the control panel
when EXT1 is active.
• Direction control requires parameter 1003 = 3 (REQUEST).
9 = DI1F, 2R – Start/Stop/Direction commands through DI1 and DI2
combinations
• Start forward = DI1 activated and DI2 de-activated.
• Start reverse = DI1 de-activated and DI2 activated.
• Stop = both DI1 and DI2 activated, or both de-activated.
11 = TIMER 1 – Assigns Start/Stop control to timer 1 (Timer activated =
START; Timer de-activated = STOP).
• See Group 36: TIMED FUNCTIONS.
12…14 = TIMER 2…4 – Assigns Start/Stop control to timer 2…4.
• See TIMER 1 above.


• See parameter 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS above.
1003 DIRECTION 1…3
Defines the control of motor rotation direction.
1 = FORWARD – Rotation is fixed in the forward direction.
2 = REVERSE – Rotation is fixed in the reverse direction.
3 = REQUEST – Rotation direction can be changed on command.

Group 11: REFERENCE SELECT

This group defines:
• how the drive selects between command sources
• characteristics and sources for REF1 and REF2.
REF1
Panel
REF1 P1101
REF1
Panel REF 2 P1106
0…17 P1107 REF2
PID 1 OUT P1108
REF 2 19 PANEL
Hand/Auto
Selection
HAND
AUTO
Panel REF 1 P1103
G12 P1104 P1102
DI Const
Speed P1105 EXT 1
AI
EXT1 EXT 2
Panel Ref 2
P1106
G12 P1106
DI Const 0…17 P1107
Speed
AI P1108
19
EXT2

1101 KEYPAD REF SEL 1…2
Selects the reference controlled in local control mode.
1 = REF1 (Hz/rpm) – Reference type depends on parameter 9904
MOTOR CTRL MODE:
• Speed reference (rpm) if 9904 = 1 (VECTOR: SPEED).
• Frequency reference (Hz) if 9904 = 3 (SCALAR: FREQ).
2 = REF2 (%)


1102 EXT1/EXT2 SE -6…12
Defines the source for selecting between the two external control
locations EXT1 or EXT2. Thus, defines the source for Start/Stop/Direction
commands and reference signals.
0 = EXT1 – Selects external control location 1 (EXT1).
• See parameter 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS for EXT1’s Start/Stop/Dir
definitions.
• See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT for EXT1’s reference definitions.
1 = DI1 – Assigns control to EXT1 or EXT2 based on the state of DI1 (DI1
activated = EXT2; DI1 de-activated = EXT1).
2…6 = DI2…DI6 – Assigns control to EXT1 or EXT2 based on the state of
the selected digital input.
• See DI1 above.
7 = EXT2 – Selects external control location 2 (EXT2).
• See parameter 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS for EXT2’s Start/Stop/Dir
definitions.
• See parameter 1106 REF2 SELECT for EXT2’s reference definitions.
8 = COMM – Assigns control of the drive via external control location
EXT1 or EXT2 based on the fieldbus control word.
• Bit 5 of Command Word 1 (parameter 0301) defines the active
external control location (EXT1 or EXT2).
9 = TIMER 1 – Assigns control to EXT1 or EXT2 based on the state of the
timer (Timer activated = EXT2; Timer de-activated = EXT1).
10…12 = TIMER 2…4 – Assigns control to EXT1 or EXT2 based on the
state of the timer.
-1 = DI1(INV) – Assigns control to EXT1 or EXT2 based on the state of DI1
(DI1 activated = EXT1; DI1 de-activated = EXT2).
-2…-6 = DI2(INV)…DI6(INV) – Assigns control to EXT1 or EXT2 based on
the state of the selected digital input.
• See DI1(INV) above.


0 = KEYPAD – Defines the control panel as the reference source.
1 = AI1 – Defines analog input 1 (AI1) as the reference source.
2 = AI2 – Defines analog input 2 (AI2) as the reference source.
3 = AI1/JOYST – Defines analog input 1 (AI1), configured for joystick
operation, as the reference source.
• The minimum input signal runs the drive at the maximum reference
in the reverse direction. Define the minimum using parameter 1104.
• The maximum input signal runs the drive at maximum reference in
the forward direction. Define the maximum using parameter 1105.
WARNING! Because the low end of the reference range commands full
reverse operation, do not use 0 V as the lower end of the reference
range. Doing so means that if the control signal is lost (which is a 0 V
input), the result is full reverse operation. Instead, use the following set-
up so that loss of the analog input triggers a fault, stopping the drive:
• Set parameter 1301 MINIMUM AI1 (1304 MINIMUM AI2) at 20% (2 V or
4 mA).
• Set parameter 3021 AI1 FAULT LIMIT to a value 5% or higher.
• Set parameter 3001 AI<MIN FUNCTION to 1 (FAULT).
EXT REF 1 MAX
EXT REF 1 MIN
- EXT REF 1 MIN

10 V /
20 mA
- EXT REF 1 MAX
2 V / 4 mA
0 V / 0 mA
EXT REF 1 MIN
-2 % +2 %
- EXT REF 1 MIN
Hysteresis 4 % of full scale


4 = AI2/JOYST – Defines analog input 2 (AI2), configured for joystick
operation, as the reference source.
• See above (AI2/JOYST) description.
5 = DI3U,4D(R) – Defines digital inputs as the speed reference source
(motor potentiometer control).
• Digital input DI3 increases the speed (the U stands for “up”).
• Digital input DI4 decreases the speed (the D stands for “down”).
• A Stop command resets the reference to zero (the R stands for
“reset”).
• Parameter 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 controls the reference signal’s rate
of change.
6 = DI3U,4D – Same as above (DI3U,4D(R)), except:
• A Stop command does not reset the reference to zero. The
reference is stored.
• When the drive restarts, the motor ramps up (at the selected
acceleration rate) to the stored reference.
7 = DI5U,6D – Same as above (DI3U,4D), except that DI5 and DI6 are the
digital inputs used.
page 188.
11 = DI3U, 4D(RNC) – Same as DI3U,4D(R) above, except that:
• Changing the control source (EXT1 to EXT2, EXT2 to EXT1, LOC to
REM) does not copy the reference.
12 = DI3U,4D(NC) – Same as DI3U,4D above, except that:
13 = DI5U,6D(NC) – Same as DI3U,4D above, except that:
14 = AI1+AI2 – Defines an analog input 1 (AI1) and analog input 2 (AI2)
15 = AI1*AI2 – Defines an analog input 1 (AI1) and analog input 2 (AI2)
16 = AI1-AI2 – Defines an analog input 1 (AI1) and analog input 2 (AI2)
17 = AI1/AI2 – Defines an analog input 1 (AI1) and analog input 2 (AI2)


table.
Where:
• C = Main reference value
(= COMM for values 9, 10 and = AI1 for values 14…17).
• C = 25%. 9, 14 (+)
60
• P 4012 SETPOINT
MIN = 0. 40 10, 15 (*)
• P 4013 SETPOINT
MAX = 0. 20
horizontal axis. 0
0 100% B
1104 REF1 MIN 0…500 Hz /

0…30000 rpm
Sets the minimum for external reference 1.
• The minimum analog input signal (as a percentage of the full signal in
volts or amps) corresponds to REF1 MIN in Hz/rpm.
• Parameter 1301 MINIMUM AI1 or 1304 MINIMUM AI2 sets the minimum
analog input signal.
• These parameters (reference and analog min. and max. settings)
provide scale and offset adjustment for the reference.


1105 REF1 MAX 0…500 Hz /
0…30000 rpm
Sets the maximum for external reference 1.
• The maximum analog input signal (as a percentage of the full signal
in volts or amps) corresponds to REF1 MAX in Hz/rpm.
• Parameter 1302 MAXIMUM AI1 or 1305 MAXIMUM AI2 sets the maximum
Ext ref
P 1105
(MAX)
P 1104 Analog
(MIN) input signal
P 1301 or P 1302 or
P 1304 P 1305
Ext ref
P 1104
(MIN)
P 1105
(MAX)
Analog
P 1301 or P 1302 or input signal

P 1304 P 1305


1106 REF2 SELECT 0…17, 19
0…17 – Same as for parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT
19 = PID1OUT – The reference is taken from the PID1 output. See Group
40: PROCESS PID SET 1 and Group 41: PROCESS PID SET 2.
If PFA is used
19=PID1 REF2 LIMIT
SELECT MAX (1107, 1108) PFA
1…17 MIN (1107, 1108)
1107 REF2 MIN 0…100%

Sets the minimum for external reference 2.
• The minimum analog input signal (in volts or amps) corresponds to
REF2 MIN in %.
• Parameter 1301 MINIMUM AI1 or 1304 MINIMUM AI2 sets the minimum
• This parameter sets the minimum frequency reference.
• The value is a percentage of the:
– maximum frequency or speed
– maximum process reference
– nominal torque.
1108 REF2 MAX 0…100%
Sets the maximum for external reference 2.
• The maximum analog input signal (in volts or amps) corresponds to
REF2 MAX in %.
• Parameter 1302 MAXIMUM AI1 or 1305 MAXIMUM AI2 sets the maximum
• This parameter sets the maximum frequency reference.
• The value is a percentage of the:
– maximum frequency or speed
– maximum process reference
– nominal torque.

Group 12: CONSTANT SPEEDS

This group defines a set of constant speeds. In general:
• You can program up to 7 constant speeds, ranging from
0…500 Hz or 0…30000 rpm.
• Values must be positive (no negative speed values for
constant speeds).
• Constant speed selections are ignored if:
- the process PID reference is followed, or
- the drive is in local control mode, or
- PFA (Pump and Fan Alternation) is active.
Note: Parameter 1208 CONST SPEED 7 acts also as a so-called

fault speed, which may be activated if the control signal is lost.
Refer to parameter 3001 AI<MIN FUNCTION and parameter 3002
PANEL COMM ERROR.

1201 CONST SPEED SEL -14…14
Defines the digital inputs used to select constant speeds. See general
comments in the introduction.
0 = NOT SEL – Disables the constant speed function.
1 = DI1 – Selects constant speed 1 with digital input DI1.
• Digital input activated = constant Speed 1 activated.
2…6 = DI2…DI6 – Selects constant speed 1 with digital input DI2…DI6.
• See above.
7 = DI1,2 – Selects one of three constant speeds (1…3) using DI1 and
DI2.
• Uses two digital inputs, as defined below (0 = DI de-activated, 1 = DI
activated):
DI1 DI2 Function
0 0 No constant speed
1 0 Constant speed 1 (1202)
• Can be set up as a so-called fault speed, which is activated if the
control signal is lost. Refer to parameter 3001 AI<MIN function and
parameter 3002 PANEL COMM ERR.


DI3.
• See above (DI1,2) for code.
DI4.
DI5.
DI6.
12 = DI1,2,3 – Selects one of seven constant speeds (1…7) using DI1,
DI2 and DI3.
• Uses three digital inputs, as defined below (0 = DI de-activated, 1 =
DI activated):
DI1 DI2 DI3 Function

0 0 0 No constant speed
1 0 0 Constant speed 1 (1202)
DI4 and DI5.
• See above (DI1,2,3) for code.
DI5 and DI6.
• See above (DI1,2,3) for code.
15…18 = TIMER 1…4 – Selects constant speed 1 when timer is active.
19 = TIMER 1 & 2 – Selects a constant speed depending on the state of
timers 1 and 2.
-1 = DI1(INV) – Selects constant speed 1 with digital input DI1.
• Inverse operation: Digital input de-activated = constant speed 1
activated.
-2…- 6 = DI2(INV)…DI6(INV) – Selects constant speed 1 with digital input.
• See above.


-7 = DI1,2(INV) – Selects one of three constant speeds (1…3) using DI1
and DI2.
• Inverse operation uses two digital inputs, as defined below (0 = DI
de-activated, 1 = DI activated):
DI1 DI2 Function
1 1 No constant speed
and DI3.
• See above (DI1,2(INV)) for code.
and DI4.
and DI5.
and DI6.
-12 = DI1,2,3(INV) – Selects one of seven constant speeds (1…7) using
DI1, DI2 and DI3.
• Inverse operation uses three digital inputs, as defined below (0 = DI
de-activated, 1 = DI activated):
DI1 DI2 DI3 Function

1 1 1 No constant speed
DI3, DI4 and DI5.
• See above (DI1,2,3(INV)) for code.
DI4, DI5 and DI6.
• See above (DI1,2,3(INV)) for code.


1202 CONST SPEED 1 0…30000 rpm /
0…500 Hz
Sets value for constant speed 1.
• The range and units depend on parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE:
• Range: 0…30000 rpm when 9904 = 1 (VECTOR: SPEED).
• Range: 0…500 Hz when 9904 = 3 (SCALAR: FREQ).
1203 CONST SPEED 2…CONST SPEED 7 0…30000 rpm /
… 0…500 Hz
1208 Each sets a value for a constant speed.
• See CONST SPEED 1 above.
1209 TIMED MODE SEL 1…2
Defines timer-activated constant speed mode. Timer can be used to
change between the external reference and a maximum of three
constant speeds or to change between a maximum of 4 selectable
speeds, i.e. constant speeds 1, 2, 3 and 4.
1 = EXT/CS1/2/3 – Selects an external speed when no timer is active,
selects constant speed 1 when only timer 1 is active, selects constant
speed 2 when only timer 2 is active and selects constant speed 3
when both timers 1 and 2 are active.
TIMER1 TIMER2 Function
0 0 External reference
2 = CS1/2/3/4 – Selects constant speed 1 when no timer is active,
selects constant speed 2 when only timer 1 is active, selects constant
speed 3 when only timer 2 is active, selects constant speed 4 when
both timers are active.
TIMER1 TIMER2 Function

Group 13: ANALOGUE INPUTS

This group defines the limits and the filtering for analog inputs.

1301 MINIMUM AI1 0…100%
Defines the minimum value of the analog input.
• Define value as a percentage of the full analog signal range. See
example below.
• The minimum analog input signal corresponds to 1104 REF1 MIN or
1107 REF2 MIN.
• MINIMUM AI cannot be greater than MAXIMUM AI.
• These parameters (reference and analog min. and max. settings)
provide scale and offset adjustment for the reference.
• See the figure for parameter 1105.
Example. To set the minimum analog input value to 4 mA:
• Configure the analog input for 0…20 mA current signal.
• Calculate the minimum (4 mA) as a percentage of the full range
(20 mA) = 4 mA / 20 mA * 100% = 20%
1302 MAXIMUM AI1 0…100%
Defines the maximum value of the analog input.
• Define value as a percentage of the full analog signal range.
• The maximum analog input signal corresponds to 1105 REF1 MAX or
1108 REF2 MAX.
1303 FILTER AI1 0…10 s
Defines the filter time constant for analog input 1 (AI1).
specified.
[%] Unfiltered signal
100
63
Filtered signal
t
Time constant
1304 MINIMUM AI2 0…100%
Defines the minimum value of the analog input.
• See MINIMUM AI1 above.


1305 MAXIMUM AI2 0…100%
Defines the maximum value of the analog input.
• See MAXIMUM AI1 above.
1306 FILTER AI2 0…10 s
Defines the filter time constant for analog input 2 (AI2).
• See FILTER AI1 above.

Group 14: RELAY OUTPUTS

This group defines the condition that activates each of the relay
outputs.

1 means.
0 = NOT SEL – Relay is not used and is de-energized.
1 = READY – Energize the relay when the drive is ready to function.
Requires:
• Run enable signal is present.
• No faults exist.
• Supply voltage is within range.
• Emergency Stop command is not on.
2 = RUN – Energize the relay when the drive is running.
3 = FAULT (-1) – Energize the relay when power is applied. De-energize
when a fault occurs.
4 = FAULT – Energize the relay when a fault is active.
5 = ALARM – Energize the relay when an alarm is active.
6 = REVERSED – Energize the relay when the motor rotates in reverse
direction.
7 = STARTED – Energize the relay when the drive receives a start
command (even if Run enable signal is not present). De-energize the
relay when the drive receives a stop command or a fault occurs.
8= SUPRV1 OVER – Energize the relay when the first supervised
parameter (3201) exceeds the limit (3203).
• See Group 32: SUPERVISION.
9 = SUPRV1 UNDER – Energize the relay when the first supervised
parameter (3201) drops below the limit (3202).
10 = SUPRV2 OVER – Energize the relay when the second supervised
11 = SUPRV2 UNDER – Energize the relay when the second supervised
12 = SUPRV3 OVER – Energize the relay when the third supervised
13 = SUPRV3 UNDER – Energize the relay when the third supervised


14 = AT SET POINT – Energize the relay when the output frequency is
equal to the reference frequency.
15 = FAULT (RST) – Energize the relay when the drive is in a fault
condition and will reset after the programmed auto-reset delay.
• See parameter 3103 DELAY TIME.
16 = FLT/ALARM – Energize the relay when a fault or alarm occurs.
17 = EXT CTRL – Energize the relay when external control is selected.
18 = REF 2 SEL – Energize the relay when EXT2 is selected.
19 = CONST FREQ – Energize the relay when a constant speed is
selected.
20 = REF LOSS – Energize the relay when the reference or active control
location is lost.
21 = OVERCURRENT – Energize the relay when an overcurrent alarm or
fault occurs.
22 = OVERVOLTAGE – Energize the relay when an overvoltage alarm or
fault occurs.
23 = DRIVE TEMP – Energize the relay when a drive or control board
overtemperature alarm or fault occurs.
24 = UNDERVOLTAGE – Energize the relay when an undervoltage alarm
or fault occurs.
25 = AI1 LOSS – Energize the relay when AI1 signal is lost.
26 = AI2 LOSS – Energize the relay when AI2 signal is lost.
27 = MOTOR TEMP – Energize the relay when a motor overtemperature
alarm or fault occurs.
28 = STALL – Energize the relay when a stall alarm or fault exists.
29 = UNDERLOAD – Energize the relay when an underload alarm or fault
occurs.
30 = PID SLEEP – Energize the relay when the PID sleep function is
active.
31 = PFA – Use the relay to start/stop motor in PFA control (See Group
81: PFA CONTROL).
• Use this option only when PFA control is used.
• Selection activated / deactivated when the drive is not running.
32 = AUTOCHANGE – Energize the relay when PFA autochange operation
is performed.
• Use this option only when PFA control is used.
33 = FLUX READY – Energize the relay when the motor is magnetized
and able to supply nominal torque (the motor has reached nominal
magnetizing).
34 = USER S2 – Energize the relay when User Parameter Set 2 is active.


35 = COMM – Energize the relay based on the input from the fieldbus
communication.

0 000000 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 000001 0 0 0 0 0 1
2 000010 0 0 0 0 1 0
3 000011 0 0 0 0 1 1
4 000100 0 0 0 1 0 0
5…62 … … … … … … …
63 111111 1 1 1 1 1 1
36 = COMM(-1) – Energize the relay based on the input from the fieldbus
communication.
0 000000 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 000001 1 1 1 1 1 0
2 000010 1 1 1 1 0 1
3 000011 1 1 1 1 0 0
4 000100 1 1 1 0 1 1
5…62 … … … … … … …
63 111111 0 0 0 0 0 0
37 = TIMER 1 – Energize the relay when timer 1 is activated.
38…40 = TIMER 2…4 – Energize the relay when timer 2…4 is active.
41 = M.TRIG FAN – Energize the relay when the cooling fan counter is
triggered.
42 = M.TRIG REV – Energize the relay when the revolutions counter is
triggered.
43 = M. TRIG RUN – Energize the relay when the run time counter is
triggered.
44 = M.TRIG MWH – Energize the relay when the power consumption
counter is triggered.
45 = OVERRIDE – Energize the relay when override is activated.


2 means.
3 means.
1404 RO 1 ON DELAY 0…36
Defines the switch-on
delay for relay 1. Control event
• On/off delays are
ignored when relay
output 1401 is set Relay status
to PFA.
1404 ON DELAY 1405 OFF DELAY
1405 RO 1 OFF DELAY 0…3600 s

Defines the switch-off delay for relay 1.
• On/off delays are ignored when relay output 1401 is set to PFA.
1406 RO 2 ON DELAY 0…3600 s
Defines the switch-on delay for relay 2.
• See RO 1 ON DELAY.
1407 RO 2 OFF DELAY 0…3600 s
• See RO 1 OFF DELAY.
1408 RO 3 ON DELAY 0…3600 s
1409 RO 3 OFF DELAY 0…3600 s
1410 RELAY OUTPUT 4…6 0…45
… Defines the event or condition that activates relay 4…6 – what relay
1412 outputs 4…6 means.
1413 RO 4 ON DELAY 0…3600 s


1414 RO 4 OFF DELAY 0…3600 s
1415 RO 5 ON DELAY 0…3600 s
1416 RO 5 OFF DELAY 0…3600 s
1417 RO 6 ON DELAY 0…3600 s
1418 RO 6 OFF DELAY 0…3600 s

Group 15: ANALOGUE OUTPUTS

This group defines the drive’s analog (current signal) outputs.
The drive’s analog outputs can be:
• any parameter of Group 01: OPERATING DATA
• limited to programmable minimum and maximum values of
output current
• scaled (and/or inverted) by defining the minimum and
maximum values of the source parameter (or content).
Defining a maximum value (parameter 1503 or 1509) that is
less than the content minimum value (parameter 1502 or
1508) results in an inverted output.
• filtered.

1501 AO1 CONTENT 99…199
Defines the content for analog output AO1.
99 = EXCITE PTC – Provides a current source for sensor type PTC.
Output = 1.6 mA. See Group 35: MOTOR TEMP MEAS.
100 = EXCITE PT100 – Provides a current source for sensor type PT100.
Output = 9.1 mA. See Group 35: MOTOR TEMP MEAS.
101…145 – Output corresponds to a parameter in Group 01:
OPERATING DATA.
• Parameter defined by value (e.g. value 102 = parameter 0102)


Sets the minimum AO (mA)
content value. P 1505 /
• Content is the P 1511
parameter
selected by
parameter 1501.
• Minimum value
refers to the P 1504 /
minimum content P 1510 AO CONTENT
value that will be
converted to an P 1502/1508
P 1503/1509
analog output. AO (mA)
• These P 1505 /
parameters P 1511
(content and
current min. and
max. settings)
provide scale
and offset
adjustment for P 1504 /
the output. See P 1510
the figure. AO CONTENT
P 1502/1508
P 1503/1509
Sets the maximum content value
• Content is the parameter selected by parameter 1501.
• Maximum value refers to the maximum content value that will be
converted to an analog output.
1504 MINIMUM AO1 0.0…20.0 mA
Sets the minimum output current.
1505 MAXIMUM AO1 0.0…20.0 mA
Sets the maximum output current.
1506 FILTER AO1 0.0…10.0 s
Defines the filter time constant for AO1.
specified.
1507 AO2 CONTENT 99…199
Defines the content for analog output AO2. See AO1 CONTENT above.
Sets the minimum content value. See AO1CONTENT MIN above.


Sets the maximum content value. See AO1 CONTENT MAX above.
1510 MINIMUM AO2 0…20.0 mA
Sets the minimum output current. See MINIMUM AO1 above.
1511 MAXIMUM AO2 0…20.0 mA
Sets the maximum output current. See MAXIMUM AO1 above.
1512 FILTER AO2 0…10.0 s
Defines the filter time constant for AO2. See FILTER AO1 above.

Group 16: SYSTEM CONTROLS

This group defines a variety of system level locks, resets and
enables.

1601 RUN ENABLE -6…7
Selects the source of the Run enable signal. See the figure on page
210.
0 = NOT SEL – Allows the drive to start without an external Run enable
signal.
1 = DI1 – Defines digital input DI1 as the Run enable signal.
• This digital input must be activated for Run enable.
• If the voltage drops and de-activates this digital input, the drive will
coast to stop and not start until the Run enable signal resumes.
2…6 = DI2…DI6 – Defines digital input DI2…DI6 as the Run enable
signal.
• See DI1 above.
Run enable signal.
• Bit 6 of Command Word 1 (parameter 0301) activates the Run
disable signal.
-1 = DI1(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the Run enable
signal.
• This digital input must be de-activated for Run enable.
• If this digital input activates, the drive will coast to stop and not start
until the Run enable signal resumes.
-2…-6 = DI2(INV)…DI6(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI2…DI6
as the Run enable signal.
1602 PARAMETER LOCK 0…2
Determines if the control panel (operator keypad) can change
parameter values.
• This lock does not limit parameter changes made by macros.
• This lock does not limit parameter changes written by fieldbus inputs.
0 = LOCKED – You cannot use the control panel to change parameter
values.
• The lock can be opened by entering the valid pass code to
parameter 1603.
1 = OPEN – You can use the control panel to change parameter values.
2 = NOT SAVED – You can use the control panel to change parameter
values, but they are not stored in permanent memory.
• Set parameter 1607 PARAM SAVE to 1 (SAVE) to store changed
parameter values to memory.


1603 PASS CODE 0…65535
Entering the correct pass code unlocks the parameter lock.
• See parameter 1602 above.
• Code 358 opens the lock.
• This entry reverts back to 0 automatically.
1604 FAULT RESET SEL -6…8
Selects the source for the fault reset signal. The signal resets the drive
after a fault trip if the cause of the fault no longer exists.
0 = KEYPAD – Defines the control panel as the only fault reset source.
• Fault reset is always possible with control panel.
1 = DI1 – Defines digital input DI1 as a fault reset source.
• Activating the digital input resets the drive.
2…6 = DI2…DI6 – Defines digital input DI2…DI6 as a fault reset source.
• See DI1 above.
7 = START/STOP – Defines the Stop command as a fault reset source.
• Do not use this option when fielbus communication provides the
start, stop and direction commands.
8 = COMM – Defines the fieldbus as a fault reset source.
• The bit 4 of Command Word 1 (parameter 0301) resets the drive.
-1 = DI1(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as a fault reset
source.
• De-activating the digital input resets the drive.
as a fault reset source.


1605 USER PAR SET CHG -6…6
Defines control for changing the User Parameter Set.
• See parameter 9902 (APPLIC MACRO).
• The drive must be stopped to change User Parameter Sets.
• During a change, the drive will not start.
Note: Always save the User Parameter Set after changing any
parameter settings or performing a motor identification.
• Whenever the power is cycled, or parameter 9902 (APPLIC MACRO) is
changed, the drive loads the last settings saved. Any unsaved
changes to a user parameter set are lost.
Note: The value of this parameter (1605) is not included in the User
Parameter Sets, and does not change if User Parameter Sets change.
Note: You can use a relay output to supervise the selection of User
Parameter Set 2.
0 = NOT SEL – Defines the control panel (operator keypad) as the only
control for changing User Parameter Sets (using parameter 9902).
1 = DI1 – Defines digital input DI1 as a control for changing User
Parameter Sets.
• The drive loads User Parameter Set 1 on the falling edge of the
digital input.
• The drive loads User Parameter Set 2 on the rising edge of the
digital input.
• The User Parameter Set changes only when the drive is stopped.
2…6 = DI2…DI6 – Defines digital input DI2…DI6 as the control for
changing User Parameter Sets.
• See DI1 above.
-1 = DI1(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as a control for
changing User Parameter Sets.
• The drive loads User Parameter Set 1 on the rising edge of the
digital input.
• The drive loads User Parameter Set 2 on the falling edge of the
digital input.
• The User Parameter Set changes only when the drive is stopped.
as a control for changing User Parameter Sets.


1606 LOCAL LOCK -6…8
Defines control for the use of the HAND mode. The HAND mode allows
drive control from the control panel (operator keypad).
• When LOCAL LOCK is active, the control panel cannot change to
HAND mode.
0 = NOT SEL – Disables the lock. The control panel can select HAND and
control the drive.
1 = DI1 – Defines digital input DI1 as the control for setting the local lock.
• Activating the digital input locks out local control.
• De-activating the digital input enables the HAND selection.
2…6 = DI2…DI6 – Defines digital input DI2…DI6 as the control for setting
the local lock.
• See DI1 above.
7 = ON – Sets the lock. The control panel cannot select HAND, and
cannot control the drive.
8 = COMM – Defines bit 14 of Command Word 1 (parameter 0301) as the
control for setting the local lock.
-1 = DI1(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the control for
setting the local lock.
• De-activating the digital input locks out local control.
• Activating the digital input enables the HAND selection.
as the control for setting the local lock.
1607 PARAM. SAVE 0=DONE, 1=SAVE
Saves all altered parameters to permanent memory.
• Parameters altered through a fieldbus are not automatically saved to
permanent memory. To save, you must use this parameter.
• If 1602 PARAMETER LOCK = 2 (NOT SAVED), parameters altered from
the control panel (operator keypad) are not saved. To save, you must
use this parameter.
• If 1602 PARAMETER LOCK = 1 (OPEN), parameters altered from the
control panel are stored immediately to permanent memory.
0 = DONE – Value changes automatically when all parameters are
saved.
1 = SAVE – Saves altered parameters to permanent memory.


1608 START ENABLE 1 -6…7
Selects the source of the Start enable 1 signal. See the figure on page
210.
Note: Start enable functionality differs from the Run enable functionality.
0 = NOT SEL – Allows the drive to start without an external Start enable
signal.
1 = DI1 – Defines digital input DI1 as the Start enable 1 signal.
• This digital input must be activated for Start enable 1 signal.
coast to stop and show alarm 2021 on the control panel display. The
drive will not start until Start enable 1 signal resumes.
2…6 = DI2…DI6 – Defines digital input DI2…DI6 as the Start enable 1
signal.
• See DI1 above.
Start enable 1 signal.
• Bit 2 of Command Word 2 (parameter 0302) activates the Start
disable 1 signal.
-1 = DI1(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the Start enable 1
signal.
-2…-6 = DI2 (INV)…DI6(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI2…DI6
as the Start enable 1 signal.
• See DI1 (INV) above.

Drive started
START/STOP
COMMAND
(Group 10:
START/STOP/
START ENABLE
SIGNAL
(parameters
1608 &1609)
Relay energized
Relay
de-energized STARTED
RELAY STATUS
(Group 14: RE-
LAY OUTPUTS)
Damper open
Damper Damper
closed closed
DAMPER
STATUS
Damper Damper
opening closing
time time
RUN ENABLE
SIGNAL from the
damper end
switch when the
damper is fully
opened.
(parameter 1601)
MOTOR STATUS
Acceleration Drive coasts
time to stop
(par. 2202)


1609 START ENABLE 2 -6…7
Selects the source of the Start enable 2 signal.
Note: Start enable functionality differs from the Run enable
functionality.
0 = NOT SEL – Allows the drive to start without an external Start enable
signal.
1 = DI1 – Defines digital input DI1 as the Start enable 2 signal.
• This digital input must be activated for Start enable 2 signal.
coast to stop and show alarm 2022 on the control panel display. The
drive will not start until the Start enable 2 signal resumes.
2…6 = DI2…DI6 – Defines digital input DI2…DI6 as the Start enable 2
signal.
• See DI1 above.
Start enable 2 signal.
• Bit 3 of Command Word 2 (parameter 0302) activates the Start
disable 2 signal.
-1 = DI1(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the Start enable 2
signal.
as the Start enable 2 signal.
1610 DISPLAY ALARMS 0…1
Controls the visibility of the following alarms:
• 2001 OVERCURRENT
• 2002 OVERVOLTAGE
• 2003 UNDERVOLTAGE
• 2009 DEVICE OVERTEMP
0 = NO
1 = YES

Group 17: OVERRIDE

This group defines the source for the override activation signal,
the override speed/frequency and pass code and how the
override is enabled and disabled.
The override feature can be used e.g. in fire situations.
When the override DI is activated, the drive stops and then
accelerates to the preset speed or frequency. When the DI is
deactivated, the drive stops and reboots. If the start command,
Run enable and Start enable are active in the AUTO mode, the
drive starts automatically and continues normally after override
mode. In the HAND mode, the drive returns to the OFF mode.
When override is active:
• Drive runs at preset speed.
• Drive ignores all keypad commands.
• Drive ignores all commands from communication links.
• Drive ignores all digital inputs except override activation/
deactivation, Run enable and Start enable.
• Drive displays alarm message “2020 OVERRIDE MODE”.
The following faults are ignored:

3 DEV OVERTEMP
6 DC UNDERVOLT
7 AI1 LOSS
8 AI2 LOSS
9 MOT OVERTEMP
10 PANEL LOSS
12 MOTOR STALL
14 EXT FAULT 1
15 EXT FAULT 2
17 UNDERLOAD
18 THERM FAIL
21 CURR MEAS
22 SUPPLY PHASE
24 OVERSPEED
28 SERIAL 1 ERR
29 EFB CON FILE
30 FORCE TRIP

31 EFB 1
32 EFB 2
33 EFB 3
34 MOTOR PHASE
1001 PAR PFA REF NEG
1003 PAR AI SCALE
1004 PAR AO SCALE
1006 PAR EXT RO
1007 PAR FBUS
1008 PAR PFA MODE
Commissioning the override mode:

1. Enter the parameters in all groups as needed, except group
17.
2. Select the digital input that will activate override mode
(P 1701).
3. Enter the frequency or speed reference for override mode
(P 1702 or P 1703) according to the motor control mode
(P 9904).
4. Enter the pass code [P 1704 (358)].
5. Enable the override mode (P 1705).
Changing the override parameters:

1. If override mode is already enabled, disable it:
• Enter the pass code (P 1704).
• Disable the override mode (P 1705).
2. If needed, load the override parameter set (P 9902).
3. Change the parameters as needed, except group 17.
4. Change the parameters in group 17 as needed:
• Digital input for override mode (P 1701).
• Frequency or speed reference (P 1702 or P 1703).
5. Enter the pass code (P 1704).
6. Enable the override mode (P 1705). The drive replaces the
override parameter set with new values of all parameters.


1701 OVERRIDE SEL -6…6
Selects the source of the override activation signal.
0 = NOT SEL – Override activation signal not selected.
1 = DI1 – Defines digital input DI1 as the override activation signal.
• This digital input must be activated for override activation signal.
2…6 = DI2…DI6 – Defines digital input DI2…DI6 as the override
activation signal.
• See DI1 above.
-1 = DI1(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the override
activation signal.
as the override activation signal.
1702 OVERRIDE FREQ 0…500 Hz
Defines a preset frequency for the override. The direction of rotation is
defined by parameter 1003.
Note: Set this value if motor control mode (parameter 9904) is
SCALAR: FREQ (3).
1703 OVERRIDE SPEED 0…30.000 rpm
Defines a preset speed for the override. The direction of rotation is
defined by parameter 1003.
Note: Set this value if motor control mode (parameter 9904) is
VECTOR: SPEED (1).
1704 OVERRIDE PASS CODE 0…65535
Entering the correct pass code unlocks parameter 1705 for one change.
• Enter the pass code always before changing the value of parameter
1705.
• See parameter 1705 below.
• The pass code is 358.
• The entry reverts back to zero automatically.
1705 OVERRIDE ENABLE 0…1
Selects whether the override is enabled or disabled.
0 = OFF – Override disabled.
1 = ON – Override enabled.
• When enabled, the drive stores the values of all parameters into an
override parameter set (see parameter 9902) and the parameters in
group 17 will be write protected (except parameter 1704). To change
the other parameters in group 17, override has to be disabled.

Group 20: LIMITS

This group defines minimum and maximum limits to be followed
in driving the motor – speed, frequency, current, torque, etc.

2001 MINIMUM SPEED -30000…30000 rpm
Defines the minimum speed (rpm) allowed.
• A positive (or zero) minimum speed value defines two ranges, one
positive and one negative.
• A negative minimum speed value defines one speed range.
• See the figure.
Speed 2001 value is < 0
P 2002
Speed range allowed

0 Time
P 2001
Speed 2001 value is > 0

P 2002
Speed range allowed
P 2001
0 Time
-(P 2001)
Speed range allowed
-(P 2002)
2002 MAXIMUM SPEED 0…30000 rpm

Defines the maximum speed (rpm) allowed.
2003 MAX CURRENT depends on drive type
Defines the maximum output current (A) supplied by the drive to the
motor.


2006 UNDERVOLT CTRL 0…2
Sets the DC undervoltage controller on or off. When on:
• If the DC bus voltage drops due to loss of input power, the
undervoltage controller decreases the motor speed in order to keep
the DC bus voltage above the lower limit.
• When the motor speed decreases, the inertia of the load causes
regeneration back into the drive, keeping the DC bus charged, and
preventing an undervoltage trip.
• The DC undervoltage controller increases power loss ride-through on
systems with a high inertia, such as a centrifuge or a fan.
0 = DISABLE – Disables controller.
1 = ENABLE (TIME) – Enables controller with a 500 ms time limit for the
operation.
2 = ENABLE – Enables controller without a maximum time limit for the
operation.
2007 MINIMUM FREQ -500…500 Hz
Defines the minimum limit for the drive output frequency.
• A positive or zero minimum speed value defines two ranges, one
positive and one negative.
• A negative minimum speed value defines one speed range.
• See the figure.
Note: Keep MINIMUM FREQ ≤ MAXIMUM FREQ.
Freq 2007 value is < 0
P 2008
Frequency range allowed

0 Time
P 2007
Freq 2007 value is > 0

P 2008
P 2007
0 Time
-(P 2007)
-(P 2008)
2008 MAXIMUM FREQ 0…500 Hz

Defines the maximum limit for the drive output frequency.


2013 MIN TORQUE SEL -6…7
Defines control of the selection between two minimum torque limits
(2015 MIN TORQUE 1 and 2016 MIN TORQUE 2).
0 = MIN TORQUE 1 – Selects 2015 MIN TORQUE 1 as the minimum limit
used.
1 = DI1 – Defines digital input DI1 as the control for selecting the
minimum limit used.
• Activating the digital input selects MIN TORQUE 2 value.
• De-activating the digital input selects MIN TORQUE 1 value.
selecting the minimum limit used.
• See DI1 above.
control for selecting the minimum limit used.
selecting the minimum limit used.
• Activating the digital input selects MIN TORQUE 1 value.
• De-activating the digital input selects MIN TORQUE 2 value.
as the control for selecting the minimum limit used.
2014 MAX TORQUE SEL -6…7
Defines control of the selection between two maximum torque limits
(2017 MAX TORQUE 1 and 2018 MAX TORQUE 2).
0 = MAX TORQUE 1 – Selects 2017 MAX TORQUE 1 as the maximum limit
used.
1 = DI1 – Defines digital input DI1 as the control for selecting the
maximum limit used.
• Activating the digital input selects MAX TORQUE 2 value.
• De-activating the digital input selects MAX TORQUE 1 value.
selecting the maximum limit used.
• See DI1 above.
control for selecting the maximum limit used.
-1 = DI1(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input di1 as the control for
selecting the maximum limit used.
• Activating the digital input selects MAX TORQUE 1 value.
• De-activating the digital input selects MAX TORQUE 2 value.
as the control for selecting the maximum limit used.


2015 MIN TORQUE 1 -600.0…0%
Sets the first minimum limit for torque (%). Value is a percentage of the
2016 MIN TORQUE 2 -600.0…0%
Sets the second minimum limit for torque (%). Value is a percentage of
the motor nominal torque.
2017 MAX TORQUE 1 0…600.0%
Sets the first maximum limit for torque (%). Value is a percentage of the
2018 MAX TORQUE 2 0…600.0%
Sets the second maximum limit for torque (%). Value is a percentage of
the motor nominal torque.

Group 21: START/STOP

This group defines how the motor starts and stops. The ACH550
supports several start and stop modes.

2101 START FUNCTION 1…5
Selects the motor start method.
1 = AUTO – Selects the automatic start mode.
• VECTOR: SPEED mode: Optimal start in most cases. Flying start
function to a rotating axis and start at zero speed.
• SCALAR: FREQ mode: Immediate start from zero frequency.
2 = DC MAGN – Selects the DC Magnetizing start mode.
Note: The DC Magnetizing start mode cannot start a rotating motor.
Note: The drive starts when the set pre-magnetizing time (parameter
2103) has passed, even if motor magnetization is not complete.
• VECTOR: SPEED mode: Magnetizes the motor within the time
determined by parameter 2103 DC MAGN TIME using DC current. The
normal control is released exactly after the magnetizing time. This
selection guarantees the highest possible break-away torque.
• SCALAR: FREQ mode: Magnetizes the motor within the time
determined by the parameter 2103 DC MAGN TIME using DC current.
The normal control is released exactly after the magnetizing time.
3 = SCALAR FLYST – Selects the flying start mode.
• VECTOR: SPEED mode: Not applicable.
• SCALAR: FREQ mode: The drive will automatically select the correct
output frequency to start a rotating motor. Useful if the motor is
already rotating and the drive will start smoothly at the current
frequency.
4 = TORQ BOOST – Selects the automatic torque boost mode
(SCALAR: FREQ mode only).
• May be necessary in drives with high starting torque.
• Torque boost is only applied at start, ending when the output
frequency exceeds 20 Hz or when output frequency is equal to
reference.
• In the beginning the motor magnetizes within the time determined
by the parameter 2103 DC MAGN TIME using DC current.
• See parameter 2110 TORQ BOOST CURR.
5 = FLY + BOOST – Selects both the flying start and the torque boost
mode (SCALAR: FREQ mode only).
• Flying start routine is performed first and the motor is magnetized. If
the speed is found to be zero, the torque boost is done.


2102 STOP FUNCTION 1=COAST, 2=RAMP
Selects the motor stop method.
1 = COAST – Selects cutting off the motor power as the stop method.
The motor coasts to stop.
2 = RAMP – Selects using a deceleration ramp.
• Deceleration ramp is defined by 2203 DECELER TIME 1 or 2206
DECELER TIME 2 (whichever is active).
2103 DC MAGN TIME 0…10 s
Defines the pre-magnetizing time for the DC Magnetizing start mode.
• Use parameter 2101 to select the start mode.
• After the start command, the drive pre-magnetizes the motor for the
time defined here, and then starts the motor.
• Set the pre-magnetizing time just long enough to allow full motor
magnetization. Too long a time heats the motor excessively.
2104 DC HOLD CTL 0…2
Selects whether DC current is used for braking.
0 = NOT SEL – Disables the DC current operation.
2 = DC BRAKING – Enables the DC injection braking.
• Enables DC injection braking after modulation has stopped.
• If parameter 2102 STOP FUNCTION is 1 (COAST), braking is applied
after start is removed.
• If parameter 2102 STOP FUNCTION IS 2 (RAMP), braking is applied
after ramp.
2106 DC CURR REF 0…100%
Defines the DC current control reference as a percentage of parameter
9906 (MOTOR NOM CURR).
2107 DC BRAKE TIME 0…250 s
Defines the DC brake time after modulation has stopped, if parameter
2104 is 2 (DC BRAKING).
2108 START INHIBIT 0=OFF, 1=ON
Sets the Start inhibit function on or off. The Start inhibit function ignores
a pending start command in the following situation (a new start
command is required):
• A fault is reset.
0 = OFF – Disables the Start inhibit function.
1 = ON – Enables the Start inhibit function.


2109 EM STOP SEL -6…6
Defines control of the Emergency stop command. When activated:
• Emergency stop decelerates the motor using the emergency stop
ramp (parameter 2208 EM DEC TIME).
• Requires an external stop command and removal of the Emergency
stop command before the drive can restart.
0 = NOT SEL – Disables the Emergency stop function through digital
inputs.
1 = DI1 – Defines digital input DI1 as the control for the Emergency stop
command.
• Activating the digital input issues an Emergency stop command.
• De-activating the digital input removes the Emergency stop
command.
2…6 = DI2…DI6 – Defines digital input DI2…DI6 as the control for the
Emergency stop command.
• See DI1 above.
-1 = DI1(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the control for the
Emergency stop command.
• De-activating the digital input issues an Emergency stop command.
• Activating the digital input removes the Emergency stop command.
as the control for the Emergency stop command.
2110 TORQ BOOST CURR 0…300%
Sets the maximum supplied current during the torque boost.
• See parameter 2101 START FUNCTION.

Group 22: ACCEL/DECEL

This group defines ramps that control the rate of acceleration
and deceleration. You define these ramps as a pair, one for
acceleration and one for deceleration. You can define two pairs
of ramps and use a digital input to select one these.

2201 ACC/DEC 1/2 SEL -6…6
Defines control for selection of acceleration/deceleration ramps.
• Ramps are defined in pairs, with one ramp for acceleration and one
ramp for deceleration.
• See below for the ramp definition parameters.
0 = NOT SEL – Disables selection, the first ramp pair is used.
1 = DI1 – Defines digital input DI1 as the control for ramp pair selection.
• Activating the digital input selects ramp pair 2.
• De-activating the digital input selects ramp pair 1.
2…6 = DI2…DI6 – Defines digital input DI2…DI6 as the control for ramp
pair selection.
• See DI1 above.
control for ramp pair selection.
•The command word is supplied through fieldbus communication.
ramp pair selection.
• De-activating the digital input selects ramp pair 2.
• Activating the digital input selects ramp pair 1.
as the control for ramp pair selection.
2202 ACCELER TIME 1 0.0…1800 s
Sets the acceleration time for zero to maximum frequency for ramp
pair 1. See A in the figure for parameter 2204.
• Actual acceleration time also depends on 2204 RAMP SHAPE.
• See 2008 MAXIMUM FREQUENCY.
2203 DECELER TIME 1 0.0…1800 s
Sets the deceleration time for maximum frequency to zero for ramp
pair 1.
• Actual deceleration time also depends on 2204 RAMP SHAPE.
• See 2008 MAXIMUM FREQUENCY.


2204 RAMP SHAPE 1 0=LINEAR, 0.1…1000.0 s
Selects the shape of the acceleration/
deceleration ramp for ramp pair 1. MAX Linear
See B in the figure. FREQ
• Shape is defined as a ramp, unless
additional time is specified here to
reach the maximum frequency. A
longer time provides a softer B (=0)
transition at each end of the slope.
The shape becomes an s-curve. T
• Rule of thumb: 1/5 is a suitable
relation between the ramp shape MAX S-curve
time and the acceleration ramp FREQ
time.
0.0 = LINEAR – Specifies linear
acceleration/deceleration ramps for
ramp pair 1.
0.1…1000.0 – Specifies s-curve
B
acceleration/deceleration ramps for T
ramp pair 1. A
A = 2202 ACCELERATION TIME
B = 2204 RAMP SHAPE
2205 ACCELER TIME 2 0.0…1800 s

Sets the acceleration time for zero to maximum frequency for ramp
pair 2.
• See 2202 ACCELER TIME 1.
2206 DECELER TIME 2 20.0…1800 s
Sets the deceleration time for maximum frequency to zero for ramp
pair 2.
• See 2203 DECELER TIME 1.
2207 RAMP SHAPE 2 0=LINEAR, 0.0…1000.0 s
Selects the shape of the acceleration/deceleration ramp for ramp pair 2.
• See 2204 RAMP SHAPE 1.
2208 EM DEC TIME 0.0…1800 s
Sets the deceleration time for maximum frequency to zero for an
emergency.
• See parameter 2109 EM STOP SEL.
• Ramp is linear.


2209 RAMP INPUT 0 -6…6
Defines control for forcing the ramp input to 0.
0 = NOT SEL
1 = DI1 – Defines digital input DI1 as the control for forcing the ramp
input to 0.
• Activating the digital input forces ramp input to 0. Ramp output will
ramp to 0 according to the currently used ramp time, after which it
will stay at 0.
• De-activating the digital input: ramp resumes normal operation.
2…6 = DI2…DI6 – Defines digital input DI2…DI6 as the control for forcing
the ramp input to 0.
• See DI1 above.
forcing the ramp input to 0.
• De-activating the digital input forces ramp input to 0.
• Activating the digital input: ramp resumes normal operation.
as the control for forcing the ramp input to 0.

Group 23: SPEED CONTROL

This group defines variables used for speed control operation.

2301 PROP GAIN 0.00…200.0
Sets the relative gain for the speed controller.
• Larger values may cause speed oscillation.
• The figure shows the speed controller output after an error step (error
remains constant).
Note: You can use parameter 2305 AUTOTUNE RUN to automatically set
proportional gain.
Kp = Gain =1
TI = Integration time = 0
TD = Derivation time = 0
%
Error value
Controller output
Controller
output = e = Error value
Kp * e
t


2302 INTEGRATION TIME 0…600.00 s
Sets the integration time for the speed controller.
• The integration time defines the rate at which the controller output
changes for a constant error value.
• Shorter integration times correct continuous errors faster.
• Control becomes unstable if the integration time is too short.
• The figure shows the speed controller output after an error step (error
remains constant).
Note: You can use parameter 2305 AUTOTUNE RUN to automatically set
proportional gain.
Kp = Gain =1
TI = Integration time > 0
TD = Derivation time = 0
Controller output
%
Kp * e
Kp * e e = Error value
TI


2303 DERIVATION TIME 0…10000 ms
Sets the derivation time for the speed controller.
• Derivative action makes the control more responsive to error value
changes.
• The longer the derivation time, the more the speed controller output is
boosted during the change.
• If the derivation time is set to zero, the controller works as a PI
controller, otherwise as a PID controller.
The figure below shows the speed controller output after an error step
when the error remains constant.
Kp = Gain =1
TI = Integration time > 0
TD = Derivation time > 0
Ts = Sample time period = 2 ms
Δe = Error value change between two samples
%
Δe Controller output
Kp * TD *
Ts Kp * e
Error value
Kp * e e = Error value
t
TI


2304 ACC COMPENSATION 0…600.00 s
Sets the derivation time for acceleration compensation.
• Adding a derivative of the reference to the output of the speed
controller compensates for inertia during acceleration.
• 2303 DERIVATION TIME describes the principle of the derivative action.
• Rule of thumb: Set this parameter between 50 and 100% of the sum
of the mechanical time constants for the motor and the driven
machine.
• The figure shows the speed responses when a high-inertia load is
accelerated along a ramp.
No acceleration compensation
Acceleration compensation
%
Speed reference
Actual speed


2305 AUTOTUNE RUN 0…1
Starts automatic tuning of the speed controller.
0 = OFF – Disables the Autotune creation process. (Does not disable the
operation of Autotune settings.)
1 = ON – Activates speed controller autotuning. Automatically reverts to
OFF.
Procedure:
Note: The motor load must be connected.
• Run the motor at a constant speed of 20 to 40% of the rated speed.
• Change the autotuning parameter 2305 to ON.
The drive:
• Accelerates the motor.
• Calculates values for proportional gain and integration time.
• Changes parameters 2301 and 2302 to these values.
• Resets 2305 to OFF.

Group 25: CRITICAL SPEEDS

This group defines up to three critical speeds or ranges of
speeds that are to be avoided due, for example, to mechanical
resonance problems at certain speeds.

2501 CRIT SPEED SEL 0=OFF, 1=ON
Sets the critical speeds function on or off. The critical speed function
avoids specific speed ranges.
0 = OFF – Disables the critical speeds function.
1 = ON – Enables the critical speeds function.
Example: To avoid speeds at which a fan system vibrates badly:
• Determine problem speed ranges. Assume they are found to be
18…23 Hz and 46…52 Hz.
• Set 2501 CRIT SPEED SEL = 1.
• Set 2502 CRIT SPEED 1 LO = 18 Hz.
• Set 2503 CRIT SPEED 1 HI = 23 Hz.
• Set 2504 CRIT SPEED 2 LO = 46 Hz.
• Set 2505 CRIT SPEED 2 HI = 52 Hz.
foutput
52
46
23
18
fREF (Hz)
f1L f1H f2L f2H
18 23 46 52
2502 CRIT SPEED 1 LO 0…30000 rpm /
0…500 Hz
Sets the minimum limit for critical speed range 1.
• The value must be less than or equal to 2503 CRIT SPEED 1 HI.
• Units are rpm, unless 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE = 3 (SCALAR: FREQ), in
which case units are Hz.
2503 CRIT SPEED 1 HI 0…30000 rpm /
0…500 Hz
Sets the maximum limit for critical speed range 1.
• The value must be greater than or equal to 2502 CRIT SPEED 1 LO.
• Units are rpm, unless 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE = 3 (SCALAR: FREQ), in
which case units are Hz.


0…500 Hz
0…500 Hz
0…500 Hz
0…500 Hz

Group 26: MOTOR CONTROL

2601 FLUX OPTIMIZATION 0=OFF, 1=ON
Changes the magnitude of the flux depending on the actual load. Flux
Optimization can reduce the total energy consumption and noise, and
should be enabled for drives that usually operate below nominal load.
0 = OFF – Disables the feature.
1 = ON – Enables the feature.
2602 FLUX BRAKING 0=OFF, 1=ON
Provides faster deceleration by raising the level of magnetization in the
motor when needed, instead of limiting the deceleration ramp. By
increasing the flux in the motor, the energy of the mechanical system is
changed to thermal energy in the motor. The flux braking works in
vector control mode only, i.e. when parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE =
1 (VECTOR: SPEED).
0 = OFF – Disables the feature.
1 = ON – Enables the feature.
Braking
torque (%) Rated motor power
120% 1 2.2 kW
Without flux braking
2 15 kW
3 37 kW
80 4 75 kW
1 5 250 kW
40 3
4
2 5
0
5 10 20 30 40 50
f (Hz)
120% With flux braking
80
1
40 2
4 3
5
0
5 10 20 30 40 50
f (Hz)


IR COMP VOLT 0…100 V
Sets the IR compensation voltage used for 0 Hz.
• Requires parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE = 3 (SCALAR: FREQ).
• Keep IR compensation as low as possible to prevent overheating.
• Typical IR compensation values are:
380…480 V Units
PN (kW) 3 7.5 15 37 132
IR comp (V) 21 18 15 10 4
• When enabled, IR compensation provides an extra voltage boost to

the motor at low speeds. Use IR compensation, for example, in
applications that require a high breakaway torque.
Motor
voltage
A
A = IR compensated
B = No compensation
P 2603
B f (Hz)
P 2604
2604 IR COMP FREQ 0…100%

Sets the frequency at which IR compensation is 0 V (in % of motor
frequency).
2605 U/f RATIO 1=LINEAR, 2=SQUARED
Selects the form for the U/f (voltage to frequency) ratio below field
weakening point.
1 = LINEAR – Preferred for constant torque applications.
2 = SQUARED – Preferred for centrifugal pump and fan applications.
(SQUARED is more silent for most operating frequencies.)
2606 SWITCHING FREQ 1, 4, 8, 12 kHz
Sets the switching frequency for the drive.
• Higher switching frequencies mean less noise.
Note: 12 kHz only for frame sizes R1…R4.


2607 SWITCH FREQ CTRL 0=OFF, 1=ON
Activates the switching frequency control. When active, the selection of
parameter 2606 SWITCHING FREQ is limited when the drive internal
temperature increases. See the figure below. This function allows the
highest possible switching frequency at a specific operating point.
Higher switching frequency results in lower acoustic noise.
0 = OFF – The function is disabled.
1 = ON – The switching frequency is limited according to the figure.
fsw
limit R1…R4 drives
12 kHz R5…R6 drives
8 kHz Drive
temperature
4 kHz
80 °C 90 °C 100 °C T
2608 SLIP COMP RATIO 0…200%

Sets gain for slip compensation (in %).
• A squirrel-cage motor slips under load. Increasing the frequency as
the motor torque increases compensates for the slip.
• Requires parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE = 3 (SCALAR: FREQ).
0 = No slip compensation.
1…200 = Increasing slip compensation. 100% means full slip
compensation.
2609 NOISE SMOOTHING 0…1
This parameter introduces a random component to the switching
frequency. Noise smoothing distributes the acoustic motor noise over a
range of frequencies instead of a single tonal frequency resulting in
lower peak noise intensity. The random component has an average of
0 Hz. It is added to the switching frequency set by parameter 2606
(SWITCHING FREQ). This parameter has no effect if parameter 2606 =
12 kHz.
0 = DISABLE
1 = ENABLE.

Group 29: MAINTENANCE TRIG

This group defines usage levels and trigger points. When usage
reaches the set trigger point, a notice displayed on the control
panel (operator keypad) signals that maintenance is due.

2901 COOLING FAN TRIG 0.0…6553.5 kh
Sets the trigger point for the drive’s cooling fan counter.
0.0 – Disables the trigger.
2902 COOLING FAN ACT 0.0…6553.5 kh
Defines the actual value of the drive’s cooling fan counter.
0.0 – Resets the parameter.
2903 REVOLUTION TRIG 0…6553 Mrev
Sets the trigger point for the motor’s accumulated revolutions counter.
2904 REVOLUTION ACT 0…6553 Mrev
Defines the actual value of the motor’s accumulated revolutions
counter.
0 – Resets the parameter.
2905 RUN TIME TRIG 0.0…6553.5 kh
Sets the trigger point for the drive’s run time counter.
0 – Disables the trigger.
2906 RUN TIME ACT 0.0…6553.5 kh
Defines the actual value of the drive’s run time counter.
2907 USER MWh TRIG 0.0…6553.5 MWh
Sets the trigger point for the drive’s accumulated power consumption (in
megawatt hours) counter.
2908 USER MWh ACT 0.0…6553.5 MWh
Defines the actual value of the drive’s accumulated power consumption
(in megawatt hours) counter.

Group 30: FAULT FUNCTIONS

This group defines situations that the drive should recognize as
potential faults and how the drive should respond if the fault is
detected.

3001 AI<MIN FUNCTION 0…3
Defines the drive response if the analog input (AI) signal drops below
the fault limits and AI is used in the reference chain.
• 3021 AI1 FAULT LIMIT and 3022 AI2 FAULT LIMIT set the minimum limits
0 = NOT SEL – No response.
1 = FAULT – Displays a fault (7, AI1 LOSS or 8, AI2 LOSS) and the drive
coasts to stop.
2 = CONST SP 7 – Displays an alarm (2006, AI1 LOSS or 2007, AI2 LOSS)
and sets the speed using 1208 CONST SPEED 7.
3 = LAST SPEED – Displays an alarm (2006, AI1 LOSS or 2007, AI2 LOSS)
and sets the speed using the last operating level. This value is the
average speed over the last 10 seconds.
WARNING! If you select CONST SP 7 or LAST SPEED, make sure that
continued operation is safe when the analog input signal is lost.
3002 PANEL COMM ERR 1…3
Defines the drive response to a control panel (operator keypad)
communication error.
1 = FAULT – Displays a fault (10, PANEL LOSS) and the drive coasts to
stop.
2 = CONST SP 7 – Displays an alarm (2008, PANEL LOSS) and sets the
speed using 1208 CONST SPEED 7.
3 = LAST SPEED – Displays an alarm (2008, PANEL LOSS) and sets the
speed using the last operating level. This value is the average speed
over the last 10 seconds.
WARNING! If you select CONST SP 7 or LAST SPEED, make sure that
continued operation is safe when the control panel communication is
lost.


3003 EXTERNAL FAULT 1 -6…6
Defines the External Fault 1 signal input and the drive response to an
external fault.
0 = NOT SEL – External fault signal is not used.
1 = DI1 – Defines digital input DI1 as the external fault input.
• Activating the digital input indicates a fault. The drive displays a fault
(14, EXT FAULT 1) and the drive coasts to stop.
2…6 = DI2…DI6 – Defines digital input DI2…DI6 as the external fault
input.
• See DI1 above.
-1 = DI1(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the external fault
input.
• De-activating the digital input indicates a fault. The drive displays a
fault (14, EXT FAULT 1) and the drive coasts to stop.
as the external fault input.
3004 EXTERNAL FAULT 2 -6…6
Defines the External Fault 2 signal input and the drive response to an
external fault.
• See parameter 3003 above.
3005 MOT THERM PROT 0…2
Defines the drive response to motor overheating.
0 = NOT SEL – No response and/or motor thermal protection not set up.
1 = FAULT – Displays an alarm (2010, MOT OVERTEMP) when the
calculated motor temperature exceeds 90°C. Displays a fault (9, MOT
OVERTEMP) and the drive coasts to stop when the calculated motor
temperature exceeds 110°C.
2 = ALARM – Displays an alarm (2010, MOT OVERTEMP) when the
calculated motor temperature exceeds 90°C.


3006 MOT THERM TIME 256…9999 s
Sets the motor thermal time constant for the motor temperature model.
• This is the time required for the motor to reach 63% of the final
temperature with steady load.
• For thermal protection according to UL requirements for NEMA class
motors, use the rule of thumb: MOTOR THERM TIME equals 35 times t6,
where t6 (in seconds) is specified by the motor manufacturer as the
time that the motor can safely operate at six times its rated current.
• The thermal time for a Class 10 trip curve is 350 s, for a Class 20 trip
curve 700 s, and for a Class 30 trip curve 1050 s.
Motor load
Temp. rise
100%
63%
t
}
P 3006
3007 MOT LOAD CURVE 50…150%
Sets the maximum allowable operating load of the motor.
• When set to 100%, the maximum allowable load is equal to the value
of Start-up Data parameter 9906 MOTOR NOM CURRENT.
• Adjust the load curve level if the ambient temperature differs from
nominal.
Output current (%) relative
to 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR
150
P 3007 100
P 3008 50
Frequency
P 3009
3008 ZERO SPEED LOAD 25…150%
Sets the maximum allowable current at zero speed.
• Value is relative to 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR.


3009 BREAK POINT FREQ 1…250 Hz
Sets the break point frequency for the motor load curve.
Example: Thermal protection trip times when parameters 3006 MOT
THERM TIME, 3007 MOT LOAD CURVE and 3008 ZERO SPEED LOAD have
default values.
IO/IN A
3.5
3.0 60 s IO = Output current

IN = Nominal motor current
2.5 90 s
fO = Output frequency
2.0 fBRK = Break point frequency
180 s
A = Trip time
1.5 300 s
600 s
1.0 ∞
0.5
fO/fBRK
0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2


3010 STALL FUNCTION 0…2
This parameter defines the operation of the Stall function. This
protection is active if the drive operates in the stall region (see the
figure) for the time defined by 3012 STALL TIME. The “User limit” is
defined in scalar mode by 2003 MAX CURRENT in group 20, and in vector
mode by 2017 MAX TORQUE 1 and 2018 MAX TORQUE 2, or the limit on
the COMM input.
0 = NOT SEL – Stall protection is not used.
1 = FAULT – When the drive operates in the stall region for the time set
by 3012 STALL TIME:
• The drive coasts to stop.
• A fault indication is displayed.
2 = ALARM – When the drive operates in the stall region for the time set
by 3012 STALL TIME:
• An alarm indication is displayed.
• The alarm disappears when the drive is out of the stall region for half
the time set by parameter 3012 STALL TIME.
Torque/
Current
Stall region
95%
User
limit
f
3011
STALL FREQ HI
3011 STALL FREQUENCY 0.5…50 Hz

This parameter sets the frequency value for the Stall function. See the
figure for parameter 3010.
3012 STALL TIME 10…400 s
This parameter sets the time value for the Stall function.


3013 UNDERLOAD FUNCTION 0…2
Removal of motor load may indicate a process malfunction. The
protection is activated if:
• The motor torque drops below the load curve selected by parameter
3015 UNDERLOAD CURVE.
• This condition has lasted longer than the time set by parameter 3014
UNDERLOAD TIME.
• Output frequency is higher than 10% of the nominal frequency.
0 = NOT SEL – Underload protection is not used.
1 = FAULT – When the protection is activated the drive coasts to stop. A
fault indication is displayed.
2 = ALARM – An alarm indication is displayed.
3014 UNDERLOAD TIME 10…400 s
Time limit for underload protection.
3015 UNDERLOAD CURVE 1…5
This parameter provides five selectable curves shown in the figure.
• If the load drops below the set curve for longer than the time set by
parameter 3014, the underload protection is activated.
• Curves 1…3 reach maximum at the motor rated frequency set by
parameter 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ.
• TM = nominal torque of the motor.
• ƒN = nominal frequency of the motor.
TM
(%)
Underload curve types
80 3
70%
60 2
50%
40 1 5
30%
20
4
f
0
ƒN 2.4 * ƒN


3017 EARTH FAULT 0…1
Defines the drive response if the drive detects a ground fault in the
motor or motor cables.
0 = NO – No response
1 = FAULT – Displays a fault (16, EARTH FAULT) and the drive coasts to
stop.
3018 COMM FAULT FUNC 0…3
Defines the drive response if the fieldbus communication is lost.
0 = NOT SEL – No response
1 = FAULT – Displays a fault (28, SERIAL 1 ERR) and the drive coasts to
stop.
2 = CONST SP7 – Displays an alarm (2005, IO COMM) and sets the speed
using 1208 CONST SPEED 7. This “alarm speed” remains active until
the fieldbus writes a new reference value.
3 = LAST SPEED – Displays an alarm (2005, IO COMM) and sets the speed
using the last operating level. This value is the average speed over
the last 10 seconds. This “alarm speed” remains active until the
fieldbus writes a new reference value.
WARNING! If you select CONST SP7, or LAST SPEED, make sure that
continued operation is safe when the fieldbus communication is lost.
3019 COMM FAULT TIME 0…60.0 s
Sets the communication fault time used with 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC.
• Brief interruptions in the fieldbus communication are not treated as
faults if they are less than the COMM FAULT TIME value.
3021 AI1 FAULT LIMIT 0…100%
Sets a fault level for analog input 1. See 3001 AI<MIN FUNCTION.
3022 AI2 FAULT LIMIT 0…100%
Sets a fault level for analog input 2. See 3001 AI<MIN FUNCTION.
3023 WIRING FAULT 0…1
Defines the drive response to cross wiring faults and to ground faults
detected when the drive is NOT running. When the drive is not running,
it monitors for:
• Improper connections of input power to the drive output (the drive can
display fault 35, OUTPUT WIRING if improper connections are detected).
• Ground faults (the drive can display fault 16, EARTH FAULT if a ground
fault is detected). Also, see parameter 3017 EARTH FAULT.
0 = DISABLE – No response to either of the above monitoring results.
1 = ENABLE – Displays a fault when this monitoring detects problems.
3024 CB TEMP FAULT 0…1
Defines the drive response to control board overheating.
0 = DISABLE – No response
1 = ENABLE – Displays a fault (37, CB OVERTEMP) and the drive coasts to
stop.

Group 31: AUTOMATIC RESET

This group defines conditions for automatic resets. An automatic
reset occurs after a particular fault is detected. The drive holds
for a set delay time and then restarts automatically. You can limit
the number of resets in a specified time period, and you can set
up automatic resets for a variety of faults.

3101 NR OF TRIALS 0…5
Sets the number of allowed automatic resets within a trial period defined
by 3102 TRIAL TIME.
• If the number of automatic resets exceeds this limit (within the trial
time), the drive prevents additional automatic resets and remains
stopped.
• Starting then requires a successful reset performed from the control
panel (operator keypad) or from a source selected by 1604 FAULT
RESET SEL.
Example: Three faults have occurred in the trial time. The last is reset
only if the value for 3101 NR OF TRIALS is 3 or more.
Trial time
Time
X X X
x = Automatic reset
3102 TRIAL TIME 1.0…600.0 s

Sets the time period used for counting and limiting the number of resets.
• See 3101 NR OF TRIALS.
3103 DELAY TIME 0.0…120.0 s
Sets the delay time between a fault detection and attempted drive
restart.
• If DELAY TIME = zero, the drive resets immediately.
3104 AR OVERCURRENT 0=DISABLE, 1=ENABLE
Sets the automatic reset for the overcurrent function on or off.
0 = DISABLE – Disables automatic reset.
1 = ENABLE – Enables automatic reset.
• Automatically resets the fault (OVERCURRENT) after the delay set by
3103 DELAY TIME, and the drive resumes normal operation.


3105 AR OVERVOLTAGE 0=DISABLE, 1=ENABLE
Sets the automatic reset for the overvoltage function on or off.
• Automatically resets the fault (DC OVERVOLT) after the delay set by
3106 AR UNDERVOLTAGE 0=DISABLE, 1=ENABLE
Sets the automatic reset for the undervoltage function on or off.
• Automatically resets the fault (DC UNDERVOLT) after the delay set by
3107 AR AI<MIN 0=DISABLE, 1=ENABLE
Sets the automatic reset for the analog input less than the minimum
value function on or off.
• Automatically resets the fault (AI<MIN) after the delay set by 3103
DELAY TIME, and the drive resumes normal operation.
WARNING! When the analog input signal is restored, the drive may
restart, even after a long stop. Make sure that automatic, long delayed
starts will not cause physical injury and/or damage equipment.
3108 AR EXTERNAL FAULT 0=DISABLE, 1=ENABLE
Sets the automatic reset for external faults function on or off.
• Automatically resets the fault (EXT FAULT 1 or EXT FAULT 2) after the
delay set by 3103 DELAY TIME, and the drive resumes normal
operation.

Group 32: SUPERVISION

This group defines supervision for up to three signals from
Group 01: OPERATING DATA. Supervision monitors a specified
parameter and energizes a relay output if the parameter passes
a defined limit. Use Group 14: RELAY OUTPUTS to define the
relay and whether the relay activates when the signal is too low
or too high.

3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM 101…199
Selects the first supervised parameter.
• Must be a parameter number from Group 01: OPERATING DATA.
• If the supervised parameter passes a limit, a relay output is
energized.
• The supervision limits are defined in this group.
• The relay outputs are defined in Group 14: RELAY OUTPUTS
(definition also specifies which supervision limit is monitored).
LO ≤ HI
Operating data supervision using relay outputs, when LO ≤ HI. See the
figure on page 246.
• Case A = Parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 (or 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2,
etc.) value is SUPRV1 OVER or SUPRV2 OVER. Use for monitoring when/
if the supervised signal exceeds a given limit. The relay remains
active until the supervised value drops below the low limit.
• Case B = Parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 (or 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2,
etc.) value is SUPRV1 UNDER or SUPRV2 UNDER. Use for monitoring
when/if the supervised signal falls below a given limit. The relay
remains active until the supervised value rises above the high limit.
LO > HI
Operating data supervision using relay outputs, when LO>HI. See the
figure on page 246.
The lowest limit (HI 3203) is active initially, and remains active until the
supervised parameter goes above the highest limit (LO 3202), making
that limit the active limit. That limit remains active until the supervised
parameter goes below the lowest limit (HI 3203), making that limit
active.
• Case A = Parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 (or 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2,
etc.) value is SUPRV1 OVER or SUPRV2 OVER. Initially the relay is de-
energized. It is energized whenever the supervised parameter goes
above the active limit.
• Case B = Parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 (or 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2,
etc.) value is SUPRV1 UNDER or SUPRV2 UNDER. Initially the relay is
energized. It is de-energized whenever the supervised parameter
goes below the active limit.


LO ≤ HI
Note: Case LO ≤ HI represents a normal hysteresis.
Value of supervised parameter
HI (3203)
LO (3202)
t
Case A
Energized (1)
t
0
Case B
Energized (1)
t
0
LO > HI
Note: Case LO>HI represents a special hysteresis with two separate
supervision limits.
Value of supervised parameter Active limit
LO (3202)
HI (3203)
t
Case A
Energized (1)
t
0
Case B
Energized (1)
t
0
3202 SUPERV 1 LIM LO -

Sets the low limit for the first supervised parameter. See 3201 SUPERV 1
PARAM above.
3203 SUPERV 1 LIM HI -
Sets the high limit for the first supervised parameter. See 3201
SUPERV 1 PARAM above.


Selects the second supervised parameter. See 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM
above.
Sets the low limit for the second supervised parameter. See 3204
Sets the high limit for the second supervised parameter. See 3204
Selects the third supervised parameter. See 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM
above.
Sets the low limit for the second supervised parameter. See 3207
Sets the high limit for the third supervised parameter. See 3207

Group 33: INFORMATION

This group provides access to information about the drive’s
current programs: versions and test date.

3301 FW VERSION 0000…FFFF hex
Contains the version of the drive’s firmware.
3302 LP VERSION 0000…FFFF hex
Contains the version of the loading package.
3303 TEST DATE yy.ww
Contains the test date (yy.ww).
3304 DRIVE RATING XXXY
Indicates the drive’s current and voltage rating. The format is XXXY,
where:
• XXX = The nominal current rating of the drive in amps. If present, an
“A” indicates a decimal point in the rating for the current. For example
XXX = 8A8 indicates a nominal current rating of 8.8 A.
• Y = The voltage rating of the drive, where Y = 2 indicates a
208…240 Volt rating, and Y = 4 indicates a 380…480 Volt rating.

Group 34: PANEL DISPLAY

This group defines the content for control panel (operator
keypad) display (center area) when the control panel is in the
standard display mode.

3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM 100…199
Selects the first parameter (by number) displayed on the control panel.
• Definitions in this group define the display content when the control
panel is in the control mode.
• Any group 01 parameter number can be selected.
• Using the following parameters, the display value can be scaled,
converted to convenient units, and/or displayed as a bar graph.
• The figure identifies selections made by parameters in this group.
100 = NOT SELECTED – First parameter not displayed.
101…199 = Displays parameter 0101…0199. If parameter does not
exist, the display shows “n.a.”.
P 3404 P 3405
P 0137
P 0138
P 0139


3402 SIGNAL1 MIN -
Defines the minimum expected value for the first display parameter.
• Use parameters 3402, 3403, 3406, and 3407, for example to convert
a group 01 parameter, such as 0102 SPEED (in rpm) to the speed of a
conveyor driven by the motor (in ft/min). For such a conversion, the
source values in the figure are the min. and max. motor speed, and
the display values are the corresponding min. and max. conveyor
speed.
• Use parameter 3405 to select the proper units for the display.
Note: Selecting units does not convert values. Parameter is not
effective if parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM = 9 (DIRECT).
Display
value
P 3407
P 3406
Source
P3402 P 3403 value
3403 SIGNAL1 MAX -

Defines the maximum expected value for the first display parameter.
Note: Parameter is not effective if parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM =
9 (DIRECT).


3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM 0…9
Defines the decimal point location for the first display parameter.
• Enter the number of digits desired to the right of the decimal point.
• See the table for an example using pi (3.14159).
3404 Value Display Range
0 +3 -32768…+32767 (Signed)
1 + 3.1
2 + 3.14
3 + 3.142
4 3 0…65535 (Unsigned)
5 3.1
6 3.14
7 3.142
8 Bar meter displayed.
9 Direct value. Decimal point location and units of
measure are identical to the source signal.
Note: Parameters 3402, 3403 and 3405…3407 are
not effective.
3405 OUTPUT1 UNIT 0…127

Selects the units used for the first display parameter.
9 (DIRECT).
0 = NO UNIT 9 = °C 18 = MWh 27 = ft 36 = l/s 45 = Pa 54 = lb/m 63 = Mrev
1=A 10 = lb ft 19 = m/s 28 = MGD 37 = l/min 46 = GPS 55 = lb/h 64 = d
2=V 11 = mA 20 = m3/h 29 = inHg 38 = l/h 47 = gal/s 56 = FPS 65 = inWC
3 = Hz 12 = mV 21 = dm3/s 30 = FPM 39 = m3/s 48 = gal/m 57 = ft/s 66 = m/min
4=% 13 = kW 22 = bar 31 = kb/s 40 = m3/m 49 = gal/h 58 = inH2O 67 = Nm
5=s 14 = W 23 = kPa 32 = kHz 41 = kg/s 50 = ft3/s 59 = in wg
6=h 15 = kWh 24 = GPM 33 = Ohm 42 = kg/m 51 = ft3/m 60 = ft wg
7 = rpm 16 = °F 25 = PSI 34 = ppm 43 = kg/h 52 = ft3/h 61 = lbsi
8 = kh 17 = hp 26 = CFM 35 = pps 44 = mbar 53 = lb/s 62 = ms
The following units are useful for the bar display

117 = %ref 118 = %act 119 = %dev 120 = % LD 121 =% SP 122 = %FBK 123 = Iout 124 = Vout
125 = Fout 126 = Tout 127 = Vdc
3406 OUTPUT1 MIN -

Sets the maximum value displayed for the first display parameter.
9 (DIRECT).


3407 OUTPUT1 MAX -
Sets the maximum value displayed for the first display parameter.
9 (DIRECT).
Selects the second parameter (by number) displayed on the control
panel.
3409 SIGNAL2 MIN -
Defines the minimum expected value for the second display parameter.
3410 SIGNAL2 MAX -
Defines the maximum expected value for the second display parameter.
Defines the decimal point location for the second display parameter.
Selects the units used for the second display parameter.
3413 OUTPUT2 MIN -
Sets the minimum value displayed for the second display parameter.
3414 OUTPUT2 MAX -
Sets the maximum value displayed for the second display parameter.
Selects the third parameter (by number) displayed on the control panel.
3416 SSIGNAL3 MIN -
• Defines the minimum expected value for the third display parameter.
See parameter 3402.
3417 SIGNAL3 MAX -
Defines the maximum expected value for the third display parameter.
Defines the decimal point location for the third display parameter.


Selects the units used for the third display parameter.
3420 OUTPUT3 MIN -
Sets the minimum value displayed for the third display parameter.
3421 OUTPUT3 MAX -
Sets the maximum value displayed for the third display parameter.

Group 35: MOTOR TEMP MEAS

This group defines the detection and reporting for a particular
potential fault – motor overheating, as detected by a
temperature sensor. Typical connections are defined below.
One sensor
AI1
Motor
AGND
AO1
AGND
10 nF
Three sensors
AI1
Motor AGND
T T T
AO1
AGND
10 nF

WARNING! IEC 60664 requires double or reinforced insulation

between live parts and the surface of accessible parts of
electrical equipment which are either non-conductive or
conductive but not connected to the protective earth.
To fulfil this requirement, connect a thermistor (and other similar

components) to the drive’s control terminals using any of these
alternatives:
• Separate the thermistor from live parts of the motor with
double reinforced insulation.
• Protect all circuits connected to the drive’s digital and analog
inputs. Protect against contact, and insulate from other low
voltage circuits with basic insulation (rated for the same
voltage level as the drive’s main circuit).
• Use an external thermistor relay. The relay insulation must be
rated for the same voltage level as the drive’s main circuit.
The figure below shows the thermistor relay connection. At the
motor end the cable shield should be earthed through a 10 nF
capacitor. If this is not possible, leave the shield unconnected.
Thermistor
relay
I/O board
DI
+24 VDC
T
Motor
For other faults, or for anticipating motor overheating using a

model, see Group 30: FAULT FUNCTIONS.


3501 SENSOR TYPE 0…6
Identifies the type of the motor temperature sensor used, PT100 (°C) or
PTC (ohms).
See parameters 1501 and 1507.
0 = NONE
1 = 1 x PT100 – Sensor configuration uses one PT100 sensor.
• Analog output AO1 or AO2 feeds constant current through the
sensor.
• The sensor resistance increases as the motor temperature rises, as
does the voltage over the sensor.
• The temperature measurement function reads the voltage through
analog input AI1 or AI2 and converts it to degrees centigrade.
2 = 2 x PT100 – Sensor configuration uses two PT100 sensors.
• Operation is the same as for above 1 x PT100.
3 = 3 x PT100 – Sensor configuration uses three PT100
sensors.Operation is the same as for above 1 x PT100.
4 = PTC – Sensor configuration
uses one PTC. ohm
• The analog output feeds a 4000
constant current through the
sensor. 1330
• The resistance of the sensor
increases sharply as the
motor temperature rises 550
over the PTC reference
temperature (Tref), as does
the voltage over the resistor. 100
The temperature
measurement function
reads the voltage through
T
analog input AI1 and
converts it into ohms.
• The figure shows typical PTC sensor resistance values as a function
of the motor operating temperature.
Temperature Resistance
Normal 0 … 1.5 kohm
Excessive > 4 kohm


5 = THERMISTOR (0) – Sensor configuration uses a thermistor.
• Motor thermal protection is activated through a digital input. Connect
a normally closed thermistor relay to a digital input. The drive reads
the digital input states as shown in the above table.
• When the digital input is ‘0’ the motor is overheated.
• See the figure in the introduction to this group.
6 = THERMISTOR (1) – Sensor configuration uses a thermistor.
• Motor thermal protection is activated through a digital input. Connect
a normally open thermistor relay to a digital input. The drive reads
the digital input states as shown in the above table.
• When the digital input is ‘1’ the motor is overheated.
• See the figure in the introduction to this group.
3502 INPUT SELECTION 1…8
Defines the input used for the temperature sensor.
1 = AI1 – PT100 and PTC
2 = AI2 – PT100 and PTC
3…8 = DI1…DI6 – Thermistor.
3503 ALARM LIMIT -10…200ºC /
Defines the alarm limit for 0…5000 ohm
the motor temperature measurement.
• At motor temperatures above this limit, the drive displays an alarm
(2010, MOTOR OVERTEMP)
For thermistors:
0 = De-activated.
1 = Activated.
3504 FAULT LIMIT 0…1
Defines the fault limit for the motor temperature measurement.
• At motor temperatures above this limit, the drive displays a fault (9,
MOT OVERTEMP) and stops the drive.
For thermistors:
0 = De-activated.
1 = Activated.

Group 36: TIMED FUNCTIONS

This group defines the timed functions. The timed functions
include:
• Four daily starts/stops
• Four weekly starts/stops, overrides
• Four timers for collecting selected periods together.
A timer can be connected to multiple time periods and a time
period can be in multiple timers.
TIME PERIOD 1
3602 START TIME 1
3603 STOP TIME 1
3604 START DAY 1
3605 STOP DAY 1
TIME PERIOD 2
3606 START TIME 2 TIMER 1
3607 STOP TIME 2 3626 TIMER 1 SRC
3608 START DAY 2
3609 STOP DAY 2
TIMER 2
TIME PERIOD 3 3627 TIMER 2 SRC
3610 START TIME 3
3611 STOP TIME 3 TIMER 3
3612 START DAY 3
3628 TIMER 3 SRC
3613 STOP DAY 3
TIME PERIOD 4 TIMER 4
3614 START TIME 4 3629 TIMER 4 SRC
3615 STOP TIME 4
3616 START DAY 4
3617 STOP DAY 4
BOOSTER
3622 BOOST SEL
3623 BOOST TIME
Activates boost
DI1…DI6
DI1(INV)…DI6(INV)

A parameter can be connected to only one timer.

1001 EXT1 COMMANDS
TIMER 1 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS
3626 TIMER 1 SRC 1102 EXT1/EXT2 SEL
1201 CONST SPEED SEL
1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1…1403 RELAY OUTPUT 3
TIMER 2 1410 RELAY OUTPUT 4…1412 RELAY OUTPUT 6
3627 TIMER 2 SRC 4027 PID 1 PARAM SET
8126 TIMED AUTOCHANGE

3601 TIMERS ENABLE -6…7
Selects the source for the timer enable signal.
0 = NOT SEL – Timed functions are disabled.
1 = DI1 – Defines digital input DI1 as the timed function enable signal.
• The digital input must be activated for timed functions enable.
2…6 = DI2…DI6 – Defines digital input DI2…DI6 as the timed function
enable signal.
7 = ACTIVE – Timed functions are enabled.
-1 = DI1(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the timed function
enable signal.
• This digital input must be de-activated for timed function enable.
as the timed function enable signal.


3602 START TIME 1 00:00:00…23:59:58
Defines the daily start time.
• The time can be changed in steps of 2 seconds.
• If parameter value is 07:00:00, the timer will be activated at 7 a.m.
• The figure shows multiple periods on different weekdays.
20:30:00
17:00:00
15:00:00
13:00:00
12:00:00
10:30:00
09:00:00
3603 STOP TIME 1 00:00:00…23:59:58

Defines the daily stop time.
• The time can be in steps of 2 seconds.
• If the parameter value is 09:00:00, the timer will be deactivated at 9
a.m.
3604 START DAY 1 1…7
Defines the weekly start day.
1 = MONDAY…7 = SUNDAY.
• If parameter value is 1, timer 1 weekly is active from Monday midnight
(00:00:00).
3605 STOP DAY 1 1…7
Defines weekly stop day.
1 = MONDAY…7 = SUNDAY.
• If parameter value is 5, timer 1 weekly will be deactivated on Friday
midnight (23:59:58).
3606 START TIME 2
Defines timer 2 daily start time.
3607 STOP TIME 2
Defines timer 2 daily stop time.


3608 START DAY 2
Defines timer 2 weekly start day.
3609 STOP DAY 2
Defines timer 2 weekly stop day.
3610 START TIME 3
3611 STOP TIME 3
Defines timer 3 daily stop time.
3612 START DAY 3
3613 STOP DAY 3
3614 START TIME 4
3615 STOP TIME 4
3616 START DAY 4
3617 STOP DAY 4
3622 BOOST SEL -6…6
Selects the source for the boost signal.
0 = NOT SEL – Boost signal is disabled.
1 = DI1 – Defines DI1 as the boost signal.
2…6 = DI2…DI6 – Defines DI2…DI6 as the boost signal.
-1 = DI1(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the boost signal.
-2…-6 = Defines an inverted digital input DI2…DI6 as the boost signal.


3623 BOOST TIME 00:00:00…23:59:58
Defines the boost ON time. Time is started when BOOST SEL signal is
released. If parameter range is 01:30:00, boost is active for 1 hour and
30 minutes after activation DI is released.
Boost active
Activation DI
Boost time
3626 TIMER 1 SRC 0…31

Collects all wanted timers to a timed function.
0 = NOT SEL – No timers have been selected.
1 = P1 – Time Period 1 selected in the timer.
3 = P1+P2 – Time Periods 1 and 2 selected in the timer.
7 = P1+P2+P3 – Time Periods 1, 2 and 3 selected in the timer.
15 = P1+P2+P3+P4 – Time Periods 1, 2, 3 and 4 selected in the timer.
16 = BOOST (B) – Boost selected in the timer.
17 = P1+B – Time Period 1 and Boost selected in the timer.
18 =P2+B – Time Period 2 and Boost selected in the timer.


19 = P1+P2+B – Time Periods 1 and 2 and Boost selected in the timer.
23 = P1+P2+P3+B – Time Periods 1, 2 and 3 and Boost selected in the
timer.
timer.
timer.
timer.
31 = P1+2+3+4+B – Time Periods 1, 2, 3 and 4 and Boost selected in
the timer.
3627 TIMER 2 SRC
3628 TIMER 3 SRC
3629 TIMER 4 SRC

Overview of PID controllers
PID controller – Basic set-up

In PID control mode, the drive compares a reference signal
(setpoint) to an actual signal (feedback), and automatically
adjusts the speed of the drive to match the two signals. The
difference between the two signals is the error value.
Typically PID control mode is used when the speed of a fan or
pump needs to be controlled based on pressure, flow or
temperature. In most cases – when there is only 1 transducer
signal wired to the ACH550 – only parameter Group 40:
PROCESS PID SET 1 is needed.
A schematic of setpoint/feedback signal flow using parameter
group 40 is presented on page 265.

P1101
P1106 Panel REF1 REF1
0…17
Panel REF2
PID Setpoint REF2
AI 500% G40
P4016 Panel REF2 19
Current -500% PID1
Torque Hand/Auto
P4014 PID Act value Selection
Power
P4015 HAND
AI
P4017 AUTO
Current
Torque
Power
Panel REF 1 P1103
G12 P1102
DI P1104
Const P1105 EXT1
AI Speed
Comm REF 1 EXT2
Panel REF 2 P1106 P1106

DI G12 0…17 P1107
Const P1108
AI Speed
Comm REF 2 19
Panel REF2 P4010
AI1 P4012 PID Setpoint G40
P4013 PID1 Out
AI2
Comm PID1
Internal
PID Act
Value
AI P4016
Current P4015
Torque
P4014
Power
AI P4017
Current
Torque
Power
Note: In order to activate and use the PID controller, parameter

1106 REF2 SELECT must be set to value 19.

PID controller – Advanced

The ACH550 has two separate PID controllers:
1. Process PID (PID1) and
2. External PID (PID2).
Process PID controller (PID1)
Process PID (PID1) has two separate sets of parameters:
• Process PID (PID1) set 1, defined in Group 40: PROCESS
PID SET 1, and
• Process PID (PID1) set 2, defined in Group 41: PROCESS
PID SET 2.
The user can select between the two different sets by using
parameter 4027 PID 1 PARAM SET.
Typically two different PID controller sets are being used when
the load of the motor changes considerably from one situation to
another.
External PID controller (PID2)
External PID (PID2), which is defined in Group 42: EXT/TRIM
PID, can be used in two different ways:
• Instead of using additional PID controller hardware, External
PID can be set to control a field instrument like a damper or a
valve through outputs of the ACH550. In this case, parameter
4230 TRIM MODE has to be set to value 0 (default value).
• External PID (PID2) can be used as an additional PID
controller to Process PID (PID1) to trim or fine-tune the
speed of the ACH550.
An example of the trimming is a return fan that follows the speed
of the supply fan. As the return fan needs to run faster or slower
than the supply fan in order to create under- or overpressure,
correction factors to the supply fan speed are needed. External
PID (PID2) can be used in the return fan for ACH550 to provide
these corrections.

Group 40: PROCESS PID SET 1

This group defines a set of parameters used with the Process
PID (PID1) controller.
Typically only parameters in this group are needed.

4001 GAIN 0.1…100
Defines the gain of the PID controller.
• The setting range is 0.1…100.
• At 0.1, the PID controller output changes one-tenth as much as the
error value.
• At 100, the PID controller output changes one hundred times as much
as the error value.
Use the proportional gain and integration time values to adjust the
responsiveness of the system.
• A low value for proportional gain and a high value for integral time
ensures stable operation, but provides sluggish response.
• If the proportional gain value is too large or the integral time too short,
the system can become unstable.
Procedure:
• Initially, set:
• 4001 GAIN = 0.0.
• 4002 INTEGRATION TIME = 20 seconds.
• Start the system and see if it reaches the setpoint quickly while
maintaining stable operation. If not, increase GAIN (4001) until the
actual signal (or drive speed) oscillates constantly. It may be
necessary to start and stop the drive to induce this oscillation.
• Reduce GAIN (4001) until the oscillation stops.
• Set GAIN (4001) to 0.4 to 0.6 times the above value.
• Decrease the INTEGRATION TIME (4002) until the feedback signal (or
drive speed) oscillates constantly. It may be necessary to start and
stop the drive to induce this oscillation.
• Increase INTEGRATION TIME (4002) until the oscillation stops.
• Set INTEGRATION TIME (4002) to 1.15 to 1.5 times the above value.
• If the feedback signal contains high frequency noise, increase the
value of parameter 1303 FILTER AI1 or 1306 FILTER AI2 until the noise
is filtered from the signal.


4002 INTEGRATION TIME 0.0 s=NOT SEL,
0.1…600 s
Defines the integration time of the PID controller.
Integration time is, by definition, the time required to increase the output
by the error value:
• Error value is constant and 100%.
• Gain = 1.
• Integration time of 1 second denotes that a 100% change is achieved
in 1 second.
0.0 = NOT SEL – Disables integration (I-part of the controller).
0.1…600.0 = Integration time (seconds).
See 4001 for the adjustment procedure.
A
B
D (P 4001 = 10)
C (P 4001 = 1)
P 4002
A = Error
B = Error value step
C = Controller output with Gain = 1
D = Controller output with Gain = 10


4003 DERIVATION TIME 0…10 s
Defines the derivation time of the PID controller.
• You can add the derivative of the error to the PID controller output.
The derivative is the error value’s rate of change. For example, if the
process error value changes linearly, the derivative is a constant
added to the PID controller output.
• The error-derivative is filtered with a 1-pole filter. The time constant of
the filter is defined by parameter 4004 PID DERIV FILTER.
0.0 = NOT SEL – Disables the error-derivative part of the PID controller
output.
0.1…10.0 = Derivation time (seconds).
Error Process error value
100%
0%
t
PID output
D-part of the controller output
Gain
P 4001
t
P 4003
4004 PID DERIV FILTER 0…10 s

Defines the filter time constant for the error-derivative part of the PID
controller output.
• Before being added to the PID controller output, the error-derivative is
filtered with a 1-pole filter.
• Increasing the filter time smooths the error-derivative, reducing noise.
0.0 = NOT SEL – Disables the error-derivative filter.
0.1…10.0 = Filter time constant (seconds).


4005 ERROR VALUE INV 0=NO, 1=YES
Selects either a normal or inverted relationship between the feedback
signal and the drive speed.
0 = NO – Normal, a decrease in feedback signal increases drive speed.
Error = Ref - Fbk.
1 = YES – Inverted, a decrease in feedback signal decreases drive
speed. Error = Fbk - Ref.
4006 UNIT 0…31
Selects the unit for the PID controller actual values. (PID1 parameters
0128, 0130 and 0132).
• See parameter 3405 for list of available units.
4007 UNIT SCALE 0…4
Defines the decimal point location in PID controller actual values.
• Enter the decimal point location counting from the right end of the
entry.
• See the table for an example using pi (3.14159).
4007 Value Entry Display
0 0003 3
1 0031 3.1
2 0314 3.14
3 3142 3.142
4008 0% VALUE unit and scale defined

by par. 4006 and 4007
Defines (together with the next parameter) the scaling applied to the
actual values of the PID controller (PID1 parameters 0128, 0130 and
0132).
• Units and scale are defined by parameters 4006 and 4007.
Units (P4006)
Scale (P4007) +3276.7%
P 4009
P 4008
Internal scale (%)
0% 100%
-3276.8%


4009 100% VALUE unit and scale defined
by par. 4006 and 4007
Defines (together with the previous parameter) the scaling applied to
the actual values of the PID controller.
4010 SET POINT SEL 0…19
Defines the reference signal source for the PID controller.
• Parameter has no significance when the PID regulator is by-passed
(see 8121 REG BYPASS CTRL).
0 = KEYPAD – Control panel provides reference.
1 = AI1 – Analog input 1 provides reference.
2 = AI2 – Analog input 2 provides reference.
8 = COMM – Fieldbus provides reference.
9 = COMM + AI1 – Defines a fieldbus and analog input 1 (AI1)
10 = COMM * AI1 – Defines a fieldbus and analog input 1 (AI1)
11 = DI3U, 4D(RNC) – Digital inputs, acting as a motor potentiometer
control, provide reference.
• DI3 increases the speed (the U stands for “up”)
• DI4 decreases the reference (the D stands for “down”).
• Parameter 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 controls the reference signal’s rate
of change.
• R = Stop command resets the reference to zero.
• NC = Reference value is not copied.
12 = DI3U, 4D(NC) – Same as DI3U, 4D(RNC) above, except:
• Stop command does not reset reference to zero. At restart the motor
ramps up, at the selected acceleration rate, to the stored reference.
13 = DI5U, 6D(NC) – Same as DI3U, 4D(NC) above, except:
• Uses digital inputs DI5 and DI6.
14 = AI1 + AI2 – Defines an analog input 1 (AI1) and analog input 2 (AI2)
15 = AI1 * AI2 – Defines an analog input 1 (AI1) and analog input 2 (AI2)
16 = AI1 - AI2 – Defines an analog input 1 (AI1) and analog input 2 (AI2)
17 = AI1/AI2 – Defines an analog input 1 (AI1) and analog input 2 (AI2)
19 = INTERNAL – A constant value set using parameter 4011 provides
reference.


table.
Where:
• C = Main Reference value
(= COMM for values 9, 10 and = AI1 for values 14…17)
• C = 25%. 9, 14 (+)
60
• P 4012 SETPOINT
MIN = 0. 40 10, 15 (*)
• P 4013 SETPOINT
MAX = 0. 20
horizontal axis. 0
0 100% B
4011 INTERNAL SETPNT unit and scale defined

by par 4006 and 4007
Sets a constant value used for the process reference.
4012 SETPOINT MIN -500.0…500.0%
Sets the minimum value for the reference signal source. See parameter
4010.
4013 SETPOINT MAX -500.0…500.0%
Sets the maximum value for the reference signal source. See
parameter 4010.


4014 FBK SEL 1…10
Defines the PID controller feedback (actual signal).
• You can define a combination of two actual values (ACT1 and ACT2) as
the feedback signal.
• Use parameter 4016 to define the source for actual value 1 (ACT1).
• Use parameter 4017 to define the source for actual value 2 (ACT2).
1 = ACT1 – Actual value 1 (ACT1) provides the feedback signal.
2 = ACT1-ACT2 – ACT1 minus ACT2 provides the feedback signal.
3 = ACT1+ACT2 – ACT1 plus ACT2 provides the feedback signal.
4 = ACT1*ACT2 – ACT1 times ACT2 provides the feedback signal.
5 = ACT1/ACT2 – ACT1 divided by ACT2 provides the feedback signal.
6 = MIN(ACT1,2) – The smaller of ACT1 or ACT2 provides the feedback
signal.
7 = MAX(ACT1,2) – The greater of ACT1 or ACT2 provides the feedback
signal.
8 = sqrt(ACT1-2) – Square root of the value for ACT1 minus ACT2
provides the feedback signal.
9 = sqA1+sqA2 – Square root of ACT1 plus the square root of ACT2
provides the feedback signal.
10 = sqrt(ACT1) – Square root of the value for ACT1 provides the
feedback signal.
4015 FBK MULTIPLIER -32.768…32.767,
0.000=NOT SEL
Defines an extra multiplier for the PID feedback value FBK defined by
parameter 4014.
• Used mainly in applications where the flow is calculated from the
pressure difference.
0.000 = NOT SEL – The parameter has no effect (1.000 used as the
multiplier).
-32.768…32.767 = Multiplier applied to the signal defined by parameter
4014 FBK SEL.
Example: FBK = Multiplier × ACT1 – ACT2


4016 ACT1 INPUT 1…5
Defines the source for actual value 1 (ACT1).
1 = AI1 – Uses analog input 1 for ACT1.
3 = CURRENT – Uses current for ACT1, scaled so:
• Min ACT1 = 0 current
• Max ACT1 = 2 x nominal current
4 = TORQUE – Uses torque for ACT1, scaled so:
• Min ACT1 = -2 x nominal torque
• Max ACT1 = 2 x nominal torque
5 = POWER – Uses power for ACT1, scaled so:
• Min ACT1 = -2 x nominal power
• Max ACT1 = 2 x nominal power
4017 ACT2 INPUT 1…5
Defines the source for actual value 2 (ACT2).
3 = CURRENT – Uses current for ACT2, scaled so:
• Min ACT2 = 0 current
• Max ACT2 = 2 x nominal current
4 = TORQUE – Uses torque for ACT2, scaled so:
• Min ACT2 = -2 x nominal torque
• Max ACT2 = 2 x nominal torque
5 = POWER – Uses power for ACT2, scaled so:
• Min ACT2 = -2 x nominal power
• Max ACT2 = 2 x nominal power


4018 ACT1 MINIMUM -1000…1000%
Sets the minimum value for ACT1.
• Used with analog input min/max settings (e.g. 1301 MINIMUM AI1,
1302 MAXIMUM AI1).
• Scales analog inputs used as actual values.
• See the figure: A = Normal; B = Inversion (ACT1 MINIMUM > ACT1
MAXIMUM).
ACT1 (%) A
P 4019
P 4018
P 1301 P 1302
Analog input signal
ACT1 (%) B
P 4018
P 4019
P 1301 P 1302
Analog input signal
4019 ACT1 MAXIMUM -1000…1000%

Sets the maximum value for ACT1.
• See 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM.
4020 ACT2 MINIMUM -1000…1000%
Sets the minimum value for ACT2.
4021 ACT2 MAXIMUM -1000…1000%
Sets the maximum value for ACT2.


4022 SLEEP SELECTION -6…7
Defines the control for the PID sleep function.
0 = NOT SEL– Disables the PID sleep control function.
1 = DI1 – Defines digital input DI1 as the control for the PID sleep
function.
• Activating the digital input activates the sleep function.
• De-activating the digital input restores PID control.
2…6 = DI2…DI6 – Defines digital input DI2…DI6 as the control for the
PID sleep function.
• See DI1 above.
7 = INTERNAL – Defines the output rpm/frequency, process reference,
and process actual value as the control for the PID sleep function.
• Refer to parameters 4025 WAKE-UP DEV and 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL.
-1 = DI1(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the control for the
PID sleep function.
• De-activating the digital input activates the sleep function.
• Activating the digital input restores PID control.
as the control for the PID sleep function.


4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL 0…7200 rpm/
0.0…120 Hz
Sets the motor speed/frequency that enables the PID sleep function –
a motor speed/frequency below this level, for at least the time period
4024 PID SLEEP DELAY, enables the PID sleep function (stopping the
drive).
• Requires 4022 = 7 INTERNAL.
• See the figure: A = PID output level; B = PID process feedback.
•
t < P 4024 A
t > P 4024
P 4023
t
B
P 4026
Setpoint
P 4025
t
Stop
Start
C
Setpoint
P 4025 }
4005 = 1
P 4025 }4005
D
=0
t


4024 PID SLEEP DELAY 0.0…3600 s
Sets the time delay for the PID sleep function – a motor speed/
frequency below 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL for at least this time period
enables the PID sleep function (stopping the drive).
• See 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL above.
4025 WAKE-UP DEVIATION unit and scale defined
by par. 4106 and 4107
Defines the wake-up deviation – a deviation from the setpoint greater
than this value, for at least the time period 4026 WAKE-UP DELAY, restarts
the PID controller.
• Parameters 4006 and 4007 define the units and scale.
• Parameter 4005 = 0,
Wake-up level = Setpoint - Wake-up deviation.
• Parameter 4005 = 1,
Wake-up level = Setpoint + Wake-up deviation.
• Wake-up level can be above or below setpoint.
See the figure:

• C = Wake-up level when parameter 4005 = 1
• D = Wake-up level when parameter 4005 = 0
• E = Feedback is above wake-up level and lasts longer than 4026
WAKE-UP DELAY – PID function wakes up.
• F = Feedback is below wake-up level and lasts longer than 4026
WAKE-UP DELAY – PID function wakes up.
C
P 4025 P 4026
Setpoint
P 4025
D
t
P 4026
F
4026 WAKE-UP DELAY 0…60 s
Defines the wake-up delay – a deviation from the setpoint greater than
4025 WAKE-UP DEVIATION, for at least this time period, restarts the PID
controller.
• See 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL above.


4027 PID 1 PARAM SET -6…11
Process PID (PID1) has two separate sets of parameters, PID set 1 and
PID set 2. PID 1 PARAM SET defines which set is selected.
• PID set 1 uses parameters 4001…4026.
• PID set 2 uses parameters 4101…4126.
0 = SET 1 – PID set 1 (parameters 4001…4026) is active.
1 = DI1 – Defines digital input DI1 as the control for PID set selection.
• Activating the digital input selects PID set 2.
• De-activating the digital input selects PID set 1.
2…6 = DI2…DI6 – Defines digital input DI2…DI6 as the control for PID
set selection.
• See DI1 above.
7 = SET 2 – PID set 2 (parameters 4101…4126) is active.
8…11 = TIMER 1…4 – Defines the timer as the control for the PID set
selection (Timer de-activated = PID set 1; Timer activated = PID set
2)
• See parameter Group 36: TIMED FUNCTIONS.
-1 = DI1(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the control for PID
set selection.
• Activating the digital input selects PID set 1.
• De-activating the digital input selects PID set 2.
as the control for PID set selection.
Group 41: PROCESS PID SET 2

This group defines a second set of parameters used with the
Process PID (PID1) controller.
The operation of parameters 4101…4126 is analogous with
Process PID set 1 (PID1) parameters 4001…4026.
PID parameter set 2 can be selected by parameter 4027 PID 1
PARAM SET.

Group 42: EXT/TRIM PID

This group defines the parameters used for the External PID
controller (PID2) of the ACH550.
The operation of parameters 4201…4221 is analogous with
Process PID controller (PID1) set 1 parameters 4001…4021.

4228 ACTIVATE -6…12
Defines the source for enabling the external PID function.
• Requires 4230 TRIM MODE = 0 (NOT SEL).
0 = NOT SEL – Disables external PID control.
1 = DI1 – Defines digital input DI1 as the control for enabling external
PID control.
• Activating the digital input enables external PID control.
• De-activating the digital input disables external PID control.
enabling external PID control.
• See DI1 above.
7 = DRIVE RUN – Defines the start command as the control for enabling
external PID control.
• Activating the start command (drive is running) enables external PID
control.
8 = ON – Defines the power-on as the control for enabling external PID
control.
• Activating power to the drive enables external PID control.
9…12 = TIMER 1…4 – Defines the timer as the control for enabling
external PID control (Timer active enables external PID control).
enabling external PID control.
• Activating the digital input disables external PID control.
• De-activating the digital input enables external PID control.
as the control for enabling external PID control.
4229 OFFSET 0.0…100.0%
Defines the offset for the PID output.
• When PID is activated, output starts from this value.
• When PID is deactivated, output resets to this value.
• Parameter is not active when 4230 TRIM MODE <> 0 (i.e. trim mode is
active).


4230 TRIM MODE 0…2
Selects the type of trim, if any. With the trim it is possible to combine a
corrective factor to the drive reference.
0 = NOT SEL – Disables the trim function.
1 = PROPORTIONAL – Adds a trim factor that is proportional to the rpm/Hz
reference.
2 = DIRECT – Adds a trim factor based on the control loop’s maximum
limit.
4231 TRIM SCALE -100.0…100.0%
Defines the multiplier (as a percentage, plus or minus) used in the trim
mode.
4232 CORRECTION SRC 1…2
Defines the trimming reference for the correction source.
1 = PID2 REF – Uses appropriate REF MAX (Switch A OR B):
• 1105 REF 1 MAX when REF1 is active (A).
• 1108 REF 2 MAX when REF2 is active (B).
2 = PID2 OUTPUT – Uses the absolute maximum speed or frequency
(Switch C):
• 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED if 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE =
1 (VECTOR: SPEED).
• 2008 MAXIMUM FREQUENCY IF 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE =
3 (SCALAR: FREQ).
Add
Ramped ref
Trimmed ref
Switch Select
(par. 4230) trim scale Mul. Mul. +
Ext ref 1 max (A) off X

X
Ext ref 2 max (B) propor.
Abs Max Speed direct Select
Freq (C) (par. 4232)
Trimming PID2 ref
PID2 ref PID 2 Trimming PID2 out

Group 51: EXT COMM MODULE

This group defines set-up variables for an external fieldbus
communication module. Refer to the communication module
documentation for more information on these parameters.

5101 FBA TYPE
Displays the type of the connected fieldbus adapter module.
0 = NOT DEFINED – Module not found or not connected. Check chapter
Mechanical installation in the fieldbus user’s manual and check that
parameter 9802 is set to 4 = EXT FBA.
1 = PROFIBUS-DP
16 = INTERBUS
21 = LONWORKS
32 = CANopen
37 = DEVICENET
64 = MODBUS PLUS
101 = CONTROLNET
128 = ETHERNET
5102 FB PAR 2…FB PAR 26 0…65535
… Refer to the communication module documentation for more
5126 information on these parameters.
5127 FBA PAR REFRESH 0=DONE, 1=REFRESH
Validates any changed fieldbus parameter settings.
• After refreshing, the value reverts automatically to DONE.
5128 FILE CPI FW REV 0…0xFFFF
Displays the CPI firmware revision of the drive’s fieldbus adapter
configuration file. Format is xyz, where:
5129 FILE CONFIG ID 0…0xFFFF
Displays the revision of the drive’s fieldbus adapter module’s
configuration file identification.
• File configuration information depends on the drive application
program.
5130 FILE CONFIG REV 0…0xFFFF
Contains the revision of the drive’s fieldbus adapter module
configuration file.
Example: 1 = revision 1


5131 FBA STATUS 0…6
Contains the status of the adapter module.
0 = IDLE – Adapter not configured.
1 = EXEC. INIT – Adapter is initializing.
the adapter and the drive.
3 = CONFIG ERROR – Adapter configuration error.
• The major or minor revision code of the adapter’s CPI firmware
revision differs from that stated in the drive’s configuration file.
4 = OFF-LINE – Adapter is off-line.
5 = ON-LINE – Adapter is on-line.
6 = RESET – Adapter is performing a hardware reset.
5132 FBA CPI FW REV 0…0xFFFF
Contains the revision of the module’s CPI program. Format is xyz,
where:
5133 FBA APPL FW REV 0…0xFFFF
Contains the revision of the module’s application program. Format is
xyz, where:

Group 52: PANEL COMM

This group defines the communication settings for the control
panel port on the drive. Normally, when using the supplied
control panel (operator keypad), there is no need to change
settings in this group.
In this group, parameter modifications take effect on the next
power-up.

5201 STATION ID 1…247
Defines the address of the drive.
• Two units with the same address are not allowed on-line.
• Range: 1…247.
5202 BAUDRATE 9.6, 19.2, 38.4, 57.6,
Defines the communication speed of 115.2 kb/s
the drive in kbits per second (kb/s).
9.6 kb/s
19.2 kb/s
38.4 kb/s
57.6 kb/s
115.2 kb/s
5203 PARITY 0…3
Sets the character format to be used with the panel communication.
0 = 8N1 – No parity, one stop bit.
1 = 8N2 – No parity, two stop bits.
2 = 8E1 – Even parity, one stop bit.
3 = 8O1 – Odd parity, one stop bit.
5204 OK MESSAGES 0…65535
Contains a count of valid Modbus messages received by the drive.
• During normal operation, this counter is increasing constantly.
5205 PARITY ERRORS 0…65535
Contains a count of the characters with a parity error that is received
from the bus. For high counts, check:
• Parity settings of devices connected on the bus – they must not differ.
• Ambient electro-magnetic noise levels – high noise levels generate
errors.


5206 FRAME ERRORS 0…65535
Contains a count of the characters with a framing error that the bus
receives. For high counts, check:
• Communication speed settings of devices connected on the bus –
they must not differ.
errors.
5207 BUFFER OVERRUNS 0…65535
Contains a count of the characters received that cannot be placed in the
buffer.
• Longest possible message length for the drive is 128 bytes.
• Received messages exceeding 128 bytes overflow the buffer. The
excess characters are counted.
5208 CRC ERRORS 0…65535
Contains a count of the messages with a CRC error that the drive
receives. For high counts, check:
errors.
• CRC calculations for possible errors.

Group 53: EFB PROTOCOL

This group defines set-up variables used for an embedded
fieldbus (EFB) communication protocol. Refer to the
communication protocol documentation for more information on
these parameters.

5301 EFB PROTOCOL ID 0…0xFFFF
Contains the identification and program revision of the protocol.
• Format: XXYY, where xx = protocol ID, and YY = program revision.
5302 EFB STATION ID 0…65535
Defines the node address of the RS485 link.
• The node address on each unit must be unique.
5303 EFB BAUD RATE 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 19.2,
Defines the communication speed of 38.4, 57.6, 76.8 kb/s
the RS485 link in kbits per second (kb/s).
1.2 kb/s
2.4 kb/s
4.8 kb/s
9.6 kb/s
19.2 kb/s
38.4 kb/s
57.6 kb/s
76.8 kb/s
5304 EFB PARITY 0…3
Defines the data length parity and stop bits to be used with the RS485
link communication.
• The same settings must be used in all on-line stations.
0 = 8N1 – 8 data bits, no parity, one stop bit.
1 = 8N2 – 8 data bits, no parity, two stop bits.
2 = 8E1 – 8 data bits, even parity, one stop bit.
3 = 8O1 – 8 data bits, odd parity, one stop bit.
5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE 0…2
Selects the communication profile used by the EFB protocol.
0 = ABB DRIV LIM – Operation of the Control Word and Status Word
conforms to ABB Drives Profile, as used in ACS400.
1 = DCU PROFILE – Operation of Control/Status Words conforms to 32-bit
DCU Profile.
2 = ABB DRV FULL – Operation of Control/Status Words conforms to ABB
Drives Profile, as used in ACS600/800.
5306 EFB OK MESSAGES 0…65535
Contains a count of valid messages received by the drive.
• During normal operation, this counter is increasing constantly.


5307 EFB CRC ERRORS 0…65535
Contains a count of the messages with a CRC error received by the
drive. For high counts, check:
errors.
• CRC calculations for possible errors.
5308 EFB UART ERRORS 0…65535
Contains a count of the messages with a character error received by the
drive.
5309 EFB STATUS 0…7
Contains the status of the EFB protocol.
0 = IDLE – EFB protocol is configured, but not receiving any messages.
1 = EXEC. INIT – EFB protocol is initializing.
the network master and the EFB protocol.
3 = CONFIG ERROR – EFB protocol has a configuration error.
4 = OFF-LINE – EFB protocol is receiving messages that are NOT
addressed to this drive.
5 = ON-LINE – EFB protocol is receiving messages that are addressed to
this drive.
6 = RESET – EFB protocol is performing a hardware reset.
7 = LISTEN ONLY – EFB protocol is in listen-only mode.
5310 EFB PAR 10 0…65535
Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus Register 40005.
5311 EFB PAR 11 0…65535
5312 EFB PAR 12 0…65535
5313 EFB PAR 13 0…65535
5314 EFB PAR 14 0…65535
5315 EFB PAR 15 0…65535
5316 EFB PAR 16 0…65535
5317 EFB PAR 17 0…65535


5318 EFB PAR 18…EFB PAR 20 0…65535
… Reserved.
5320

Group 81: PFA CONTROL

This group defines a Pump and Fan Alternation (PFA) mode of
operation. The major features of PFA are:
• The ACH550 controls the motor of pump 1, varying the motor
speed to control the pump capacity. This motor is the speed
regulated motor.
• Direct line connections power the motor of pump 2 and
pump 3, etc. The ACH550 switches pump 2 (and then
pump 3, etc.) on and off as needed. These motors are
auxiliary motors.
• The ACH550 PID control uses two signals: a process
reference and an actual value feedback. The PID controller
adjusts the speed (frequency) of the first pump so that the
actual value follows the process reference.
• When demand (defined by the process reference) exceeds
the first motor’s capacity (user defined as a frequency limit),
the PFA automatically starts an auxiliary pump. The PFA also
reduces the speed of the first pump to account for the
auxiliary pump’s addition to total output. Then, as before, the
PID controller adjusts the speed (frequency) of the first pump
so that the actual value follows the process reference. If
demand continues to increase, PFA adds additional auxiliary
pumps, using the same process.
• When demand drops, so that the first pump speed falls below
a minimum limit (user defined by a frequency limit), the PFA
automatically stops an auxiliary pump. The PFA also
increases the speed of the first pump to account for the
auxiliary pump’s missing output.
• An Interlock function (when enabled) identifies off-line (out of
service) motors, and the PFA skips to the next available
motor in the sequence.
• An Autochange function (when enabled and with the
appropriate switchgear) equalizes duty time between the
pump motors. Autochange periodically increments the
position of each motor in the rotation – the speed-regulated
motor becomes the last auxiliary motor, the first auxiliary
motor becomes the speed regulated motor, etc.


8103 REFERENCE STEP 1 0.0…100%
Sets a percentage value that is added to the process reference.
• Applies only when at least one auxiliary (constant speed) motor is
running.
• Default value is 0%.
Example: An ACH550 operates three parallel pumps that maintain
water pressure in a pipe.
• 4011 INTERNAL SETPNT sets a constant pressure reference that
controls the pressure in the pipe.
• The speed regulated pump operates alone at low water consumption
levels.
• As water consumption increases, the first auxiliary (constant speed)
pump starts to operate, then the second one.
• As flow increases, the pressure at the output end of the pipe drops
relative to the pressure measured at the input end. As auxiliary
motors step in to increase the flow, the adjustments below correct the
reference to more closely match the output pressure.
• When the first auxiliary pump operates, increase the reference with
parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP 1.
• When two auxiliary pumps operate, increase the reference with
parameter 8103 reference step 1 + parameter 8104 reference step 2.
• When three auxiliary pumps operate, increase the reference with
parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP 1 + parameter 8104 REFERENCE
STEP 2 + parameter 8105 REFERENCE STEP 3.
• Applies only when at least two auxiliary (constant speed) motors are
running.
• See parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP1.
• Applies only when at least three auxiliary (constant speed) motors are
running.
• See parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP1.


8109 START FREQ 1 0.0…500 Hz
Sets the frequency limit used to start the first auxiliary motor. The first
auxiliary motor starts if:
• no auxiliary
motors are
f (Hz) P 8115
running.
• ACH550 output fMAX
frequency
exceeds the limit: (P 8109)+1
8109 + 1 Hz. P 8109
A
• output frequency
stays above a P 8112
B A
relaxed limit fMIN
(8109 - 1 Hz) for t
at least the time:
8115 AUX MOT
START D.
C
After the first 1
t
auxiliary motor 0
starts:
• Output frequency decreases by the value
(8109 START FREQ 1) - (8112 LOW FREQ 1).
• In effect, the output of the speed regulated motor drops to
compensate for the input from the auxiliary motor.
See figure, where:
• A = (8109 START FREQ 1) - (8112 LOW FREQ 1)
• B = Output frequency increase during the start delay.
• C = Diagram showing auxiliary motor’s run status as frequency
increases (1 = On).
Note: 8109 START FREQ 1 value must be between:
• 8112 LOW FREQ 1
• (2008 MAXIMUM FREQ) -1.
8110 START FREQ 2 0.0…500 Hz
Sets the frequency limit used to start the second auxiliary motor.
• See 8109 START FREQ 1 for a complete description of the operation.
The second auxiliary motor starts if:
• one auxiliary motor is running.
• ACH550 output frequency exceeds the limit 8110 + 1.
• output frequency stays above the relaxed limit (8110 - 1 Hz) for at
least the time 8115 AUX MOT START D.


8111 START FREQ 3 0.0…500 Hz
Sets the frequency limit used to start the third auxiliary motor.
The third auxiliary motor starts if:
• two auxiliary motors are running.
• ACH550 output frequency exceeds the limit 8111 + 1 Hz.
• output frequency stays above the relaxed limit (8111 - 1 Hz) for at
least the time 8115 AUX MOT START D.
8112 LOW FREQ 1 0.0…500 Hz
Sets the frequency limit used to stop the first auxiliary motor. The first
auxiliary motor stops if:
• the first auxiliary
motor is running f (Hz)
alone.
• ACH550 output fMAX
frequency drops
below the limit: P 8109
8112 - 1. A
• output frequency P 8112 A
stays below the (P 8112)-1
relaxed limit fMIN
B t
(8112 + 1 Hz) for
at least the time: P 8116
8116 AUX MOT
STOP D.
C
After the first
auxiliary motor 1
t
stops: 0
• Output frequency
increases by the value
(8109 START FREQ 1) - (8112 LOW FREQ 1).
• In effect, the output of the speed regulated motor increases to
compensate for the loss of the auxiliary motor.
See figure, where:
• A = (8109 START FREQ 1) - (8112 LOW FREQ 1)
• B = Output frequency decrease during the stop delay.
• C = Diagram showing auxiliary motor’s run status as frequency
decreases (1 = On).
• Grey path = Shows hysteresis – if time is reversed, the path
backwards is not the same. For details on the path for starting, see
the diagram at 8109 START FREQ 1.
Note: Low Frequency 1 value must be between:
• (2007 MINIMUM FREQ) +1 and 8109 START FREQ 1


8113 LOW FREQ 2 0.0…500 Hz
Sets the frequency limit used to stop the second auxiliary motor.
• See 8112 LOW FREQ 1 for a complete description of the operation.
The second auxiliary motor stops if:
• two auxiliary motors are running.
• ACH550 output frequency drops below the limit 8113 - 1.
• output frequency stays below the relaxed limit (8113 + 1 Hz) for at
least the time 8116 AUX MOT STOP D.
8114 LOW FREQ 3 0.0…500 Hz
Sets the frequency limit used to stop the third auxiliary motor.
The third auxiliary motor stops if:
• three auxiliary motors are running.
• ACH550 output frequency drops below the limit: 8114 - 1.
• output frequency stays below the relaxed limit (8114 + 1 Hz) for at
least the time 8116 AUX MOT STOP D.
8115 AUX MOT START D 0.0…3600 s
Sets the Start Delay for the auxiliary motors.
• The output frequency must remain above the start frequency limit
(parameter 8109, 8110 or 8111) for this time period before the
auxiliary motor starts.
8116 AUX MOT STOP D. 0.0…3600 s
Sets the Stop Delay for the auxiliary motors.
• The output frequency must remain below the low frequency limit
(parameter 8112, 8113 or 8114) for this time period before the
auxiliary motor stops.


8117 NR OF AUX MOT 0…4
Sets the number of auxiliary motors.
• Each auxiliary motor requires a relay output, which the drive uses to
send start/stop signals.
• The Autochange function, if used, requires an additional relay output
for the speed regulated motor.
The following describes the set-up of the required relay outputs.
Relay outputs
As noted above, each auxiliary motor requires a relay output, which the
drive uses to send start/stop signals. The following describes how the
drive keeps track of motors and relays.
• The ACH550 provides relay outputs RO1…RO3.
• An external digital output module can be added to provide relay
outputs RO4…RO6.
• Parameters 1401…1403 and 1410…1412 define, respectively, how
relays RO1…RO6 are used – the parameter value 31 (PFA) defines
the relay as used for PFA.
• The ACH550 assigns auxiliary motors to relays in ascending order. If
the Autochange function is disabled, the first auxiliary motor is the
one connected to the first relay with a parameter setting = 31 (PFA),
and so on. If the Autochange function is used, the assignments rotate.
Initially, the speed regulated motor is the one connected to the first
relay with the parameter setting = 31 (PFA), the first auxiliary motor is
the one connected to the second relay with a parameter setting =
31 (PFA), and so on.
• The fourth auxiliary motor uses the same reference step, low
frequency and start frequency values as the third auxiliary motor.
ACH550
Standard PFA mode

Relay Logic
ACH550
PFA with Autochange mode
The table below shows the ACH550 PFA motor assignments for some
typical settings in the Relay Output parameters (1401…1403 and
1410…1412), where the settings are either = 31 (PFA), or = X (anything
but 31), and where the Autochange function is disabled (8118
AUTOCHNG INTERV = 0).
Parameter setting ACH550 relay assignment

1 1 1 1 1 1 8 Autochange disabled
4 4 4 4 4 4 1 RO1 RO2 RO3 RO4 RO5 RO6
0 0 0 1 1 1 1
1 2 3 0 1 2 7
31 X X X X X 1 Aux. X X X X X
31 31 X X X X 2 Aux. Aux. X X X X
31 31 31 X X X 3 Aux. Aux. Aux. X X X
X 31 31 X X X 2 X Aux. Aux. X X X
X X X 31 X 31 2 X X X Aux. X Aux.
31 31 X X X X 1* Aux. Aux. X X X X
* One additional relay output for the PFA that is in use. One motor is
in “sleep” when the other is rotating.


The table below shows the ACH550 PFA motor assignments for some
typical settings in the Relay Output parameters (1401…1403 and
1410…1412), where the settings are either = 31 (PFA), or = X (anything
but 31), and where the Autochange function is enabled (8118 AUTOCHNG
INTERV = value > 0).
Parameter setting ACH550 relay assignment

1 1 1 1 1 1 8 Autochange enabled
4 4 4 4 4 4 1 RO1 RO2 RO3 RO4 RO5 RO6
0 0 0 1 1 1 1
1 2 3 0 1 2 7
31 31 X X X X 1 PFA PFA X X X X
31 31 31 X X X 2 PFA PFA PFA X X X
x 31 31 X X X 1 X PFA PFA X X X
X X X 31 X 31 1 X X X PFA X PFA
31 31 X X X X 0** PFA PFA X X X X
** No auxiliary motors, but the autochange function is in use. Working

as standard PID control.


8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0.0…336 h
Controls operation of the Autochange function and sets the interval
between changes.
• The Autochange time interval only applies to the time when the speed
regulated motor is running.
• See parameter 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL for an overview of the
Autochange function.
• The drive always coasts to stop when autochange is performed.
• Autochange enabled requires parameter 8120 INTERLOCKS =
value > 0.
0.0 = NOT SEL – Disables the Autochange function.
0.1…336 = The operating time interval (the time when the start signal is
on) between automatic motor changes.
WARNING! When enabled, the Autochange function requires the
interlocks (8120 interlocks = value > 0) enabled. During autochange the
power output is interrupted and the drive coasts to stop, preventing
damage to the contacts.
Relay Logic
ACS550
PFA with Autochange mode


8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL 0.0…100.0%
Sets an upper limit, as a percentage of output capacity, for the
autochange logic. When the output from the PID/PFA control block
exceeds this limit, autochange is prevented. For example, use this
parameter to deny autochange when the Pump-Fan system is operating
near maximum capacity.
Autochange overview
The purpose of the autochange operation is to equalize duty time
between multiple motors used in a system. At each autochange
operation:
• A different motor takes a turn connected to the ACH550 output – the
speed regulated motor.
• The starting order of the other motors rotates.
The Autochange function requires:
• external switchgear for changing the drive’s output power
connections.
• parameter 8120 INTERLOCKS = value > 0.
Autochange is performed when:
• The running time since the previous autochange reaches the time set
by parameter 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV.
• the PFA input is below the level set by parameter 8119 AUTOCHNG
LEVEL.


Note: The ACH550 always coasts to stop when autochange is
performed.
In an autochange, the Autochange function does all of the following
(see the figure):
PID Output A
4PFA
100%
2PFA
P 8119
3PFA
3PFA
4PFA
2PFA
1PFA t
P 8122
P 8118 P 8118
B
A = Area above 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL – autochange not allowed.
B = Autochange occurs.
1PFA, etc. = PID output associated with each motor.
• Initiates a change when the running time, since the last autochange,
reaches 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV and PFA input is below limit 8119
AUTOCHNG LEVEL.
• Stops the speed regulated motor.
• Switches off the contactor of the speed regulated motor.
• Increments the starting order counter, to change the starting order for
the motors.
• Identifies the next motor in line to be the speed regulated motor.
• Switches off the above motor’s contactor if the motor was running.
Any other running motors are not interrupted.
• Switches on the contactor of the new speed regulated motor. The
autochange switchgear connects this motor to the ACH550 power
output.
• Delays motor start for the time 8122 PFA START DELAY.
• Starts the speed regulated motor.
• Identifies the next constant speed motor in the rotation.
• Switches the above motor on, but only if the new speed regulated
motor had been running (as a constant speed motor) – This step
keeps an equal number of motors running before and after
autochange.
• Continues with normal PFA operation.


Starting order
counter Output
The operation of the frequency 2 aux
No aux 1 aux
starting order motors motor motors
counter: fMAX
• The relay output
parameter
definitions
(1401…1403 and
1410…1412)
establish the initial
motor sequence. Area
(The lowest Autochange
parameter number is allowed PID output
with a value 31
P 8119 100%
(PFA) identifies the
relay connected to
1PFA, the first motor, and so on.)
• Initially, 1PFA = speed regulated motor, 2PFA = 1st auxiliary motor,
etc.
• The first autochange shifts the sequence to: 2PFA = speed regulated
motor, 3PFA = 1st auxiliary motor, …, 1PFA = last auxiliary motor.
• The next autochange shifts the sequence again, and so on.
• If the autochange cannot start a needed motor because all inactive
motors are interlocked, the drive displays an alarm (2051, PFA
INTERLOCK).
• When the ACH550 power supply is switched off, the counter
preserves the current Autochange rotation positions in permanent
memory. When power is restored, the Autochange rotation starts at
the position stored in memory.
• If the PFA relay configuration is changed (or if the PFA enable value
is changed), the rotation is reset. (See the first bullet above.)


8120 INTERLOCKS 0…6
Defines operation of the Interlock function. When the Interlock function
is enabled:
• An interlock is active when its command signal is absent.
• An interlock is inactive when its command signal is present.
• The ACH550 will not start if a start command occurs when the speed
regulated motor’s interlock is active – the control panel displays an
alarm (2015, PFA INTERLOCK).
Wire each Interlock circuit as follows:
• Wire a contact of the motor’s On/Off switch to the Interlock circuit –
the drive’s PFA logic can then recognize that the motor is switched off
and start the next available motor.
• Wire a contact of the motor thermal relay (or other protective device in
the motor circuit) to the Interlock input – the drive’s PFA logic can then
recognize that a motor fault is activated and stop the motor.
0 = NOT SEL – Disables the Interlock function. All digital inputs are
available for other purposes.
• Requires 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV = 0 (The Autochange function
must be disabled if Interlock function is disabled.)


1 = DI1 – Enables the Interlock function, and assigns a digital input
(starting with DI1) to the interlock signal for each PFA relay. These
assignments are defined in the following table and depend on:
• the number of PFA relays (number of parameters 1401…1403 and
1410…1412 with value = 31 (PFA))
• the Autochange function status (disabled if 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV =
0, and otherwise enabled).
No. PFA Autochange disabled Autochange enabled

relays (P 8118) (P 8118)
0 DI1: Speed Reg Motor Not allowed
DI2…DI6: Free
1 DI1: Speed Reg Motor DI1: First PFA Relay
DI2: First PFA Relay DI2…DI6: Free
DI3…DI6: Free
DI2: First PFA Relay DI2: Second PFA Relay
DI3: Second PFA Relay DI3…DI6: Free
DI4…DI6: Free
DI3: Second PFA Relay DI3: Third PFA Relay
DI4: Third PFA Relay DI4…DI6: Free
DI5…DI6: Free
DI4: Third PFA Relay DI4: Fourth PFA Relay
DI5: Fourth PFA Relay DI5…DI6: Free
DI6: Free
DI5: Fourth PFA Relay DI5: Fifth PFA Relay
DI6: Fifth PFA Relay DI6: Free
6 Not allowed DI1: First PFA Relay
DI2: Second PFA Relay
DI3: Third PFA Relay
DI4: Fourth PFA Relay
DI5: Fifth PFA Relay
DI6: Sixth PFA Relay


1410…1412 with value = 31 (PFA))

relays (P 8118) (P 8118)
0 DI1: Free Not allowed
DI2: Speed Reg Motor
DI3…DI6: Free
1 DI1: Free DI1: Free
DI2: Speed Reg Motor DI2: First PFA Relay
DI4…DI6: Free
DI5…DI6: Free
DI5: Third PFA Relay DI5…DI6: Free
DI6: Free
DI6: Fourth PFA Relay DI6: Free
5 Not allowed DI1: Free
DI2: First PFA Relay
DI6: Fifth PFA Relay
6 Not allowed Not allowed


3 = DI3 – Enables the Interlocks function, and assigns a digital input
1410…1412 with value = 31 (PFA))

relays (P 8118) (P 8118)
0 DI1…DI2: Free Not allowed
DI4…DI6: Free
1 DI1…DI2: Free DI1…DI2: Free
DI5…DI6: Free
DI6: Free
DI6: Third PFA Relay DI6: Free
4 Not allowed DI1…DI2: Free
5…6 Not allowed Not allowed


1410…1412 with value = 31 (PFA))

relays (P 8118) (P 8118)
DI5…DI6: Free
DI6: Free
DI6: Second PFA Relay DI6: Free


1410…1412 with value = 31 (PFA))
relays (P 8118) (P 8118)
DI6: Free
DI6: First PFA Relay DI6: Free
6 = DI6 – Enables the Interlock function, and assigns digital input DI6 to
the interlock signal for the speed regulated motor.
• Requires 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV = 0.

relays


8121 REG BYPASS CTRL 0…1
Selects Regulator by-pass control. When enabled, Regulator by-pass
control provides a simple control mechanism without a PID regulator.
fOUT
fMAX
P 8110
P 8109
P 8113
P 8112
fMIN
P 4014
A B C (%)
A = No auxiliary motors running
B = One auxiliary motor running
C = Two auxiliary motors running
• Use Regulator by-pass control only in special applications.
0 = NO – Disables Regulator by-pass control. The drive uses the normal
PFA reference 1106 REF2 SELECT.
1 = YES – Enables Regulator by-pass control.
• The process PID regulator is bypassed.
Actual value of PID is used as the PFA reference (input). Normally
EXT REF2 is used as the PFA reference.
• The drive uses the feedback signal defined by 4014 FBK SEL (or
4114) for the PFA frequency reference.
• The figure shows the relation between the control signal 4014 FBK
SEL (OR 4114) and the speed regulated motor’s frequency in a three-
motor system.
Example: In the diagram below, the pumping station’s outlet flow is
controlled by the measured inlet flow (A).

Mains 3~ 3 Contactors
3
3 ACH550 P1
P2 3
M
P3 3 3~
3 P1 Outlet pipe 1
A Cooling
Sewagewater
tank
tank M
3~
P2 Outlet pipe 2
Inlet pipe
M
3~
P3 Outlet pipe 3
8122 PFA START DELAY 0…10 s

Sets the start delay for speed regulated motors in the system. Using the
delay, the drive works as follows:
• Switches on the contactor of the speed regulated motor – connecting
the motor to the ACH550 power output.
• Delays motor start for the time 8122 PFA START DELAY.
• Starts the speed regulated motor.
• Starts auxiliary motors. See parameter 8115 for delay.
WARNING! Motors equipped with star-delta starters require a PFA Start
Delay.
• After the ACH550 relay output switches a motor On, the star-delta
starter must switch to the star-connection and then back to the delta-
connection before the drive applies power.
• Thus, the PFA Start Delay must be longer than the time setting of the
star-delta starter.


8123 PFA ENABLE 0…1
Selects PFA control. When enabled, PFA control:
• Switches in, or out, auxiliary constant speed motors as output
demand increases or decreases. Parameters 8109 START FREQ 1 to
8114 LOW FREQ 3 define the switch points in terms of the drive output
frequency.
• Adjusts the speed regulated motor output down, as auxiliary motors
are added, and adjusts the speed regulated motor output up, as
auxiliary motors are taken off line.
• Provides Interlock functions, if enabled.
• Requires 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE = 3 (SCALAR: FREQ).
0 = NOT SEL – Disables PFA control.
1 = ACTIVE – Enables PFA control.


8124 ACC IN AUX STOP 0.0…1800 s
Sets the PFA acceleration time for a zero-to-maximum frequency ramp.
This PFA acceleration ramp:
• applies to the speed regulated motor, when an auxiliary motor is
switched off.
• replaces the acceleration ramp defined in Group 22: ACCEL/DECEL.
• applies only until the output of the regulated motor increases by an
amount equal to the output of the switched off auxiliary motor. Then
the acceleration ramp defined in Group 22: ACCEL/DECEL applies.
0 = NOT SEL
0.1…1800 = Activates this function using the value entered as the
acceleration time.
fOUT
A
B
P 8125 P 8124 t
Aux.
motor
1
t
0
• A = speed regulated motor accelerating using group 22 parameters
(2202 or 2205).
• B = speed regulated motor decelerating using group 22 parameters
(2203 or 2206).
• At aux. motor start, speed regulated motor decelerates using 8125
DEC IN AUX START.
• At aux. motor stop, speed regulated motor accelerates using 8124
ACC IN AUX STOP.
8125 DEC IN AUX START 0.0…1800 s
Sets the PFA deceleration time for a maximum-to-zero frequency ramp.
This PFA deceleration ramp:
• applies to the speed regulated motor when an auxiliary motor is
switched on.
• replaces the deceleration ramp defined in Group 22: ACCEL/DECEL.
• applies only until the output of the regulated motor decreases by an
amount equal to the output of the auxiliary motor. Then the
deceleration ramp defined in Group 22: ACCEL/DECEL applies.
0 = NOT SEL.
0.1…1800 = Activates this function using the value entered as the
deceleration time.


8126 TIMED AUTOCHANGE 0…4
Sets the autochange with timer. When enables, autochange is
controlled with the timed functions.
0 = NOT SEL.
1 = TIMER 1 – Enables autochange when timer 1 is active.
2…4 = TIMER 2…4 – Enables autochange when timer 2…4 is active.
8127 MOTORS 1…7
Sets the actual number of PFA controlled motors (maximum 7 motors,
1 speed regulated, 3 connected direct-on-line and 3 spare motors).
• This value includes also the speed regulated motor.
• This value must be compatible with the number of relays allocated to
PFA if the Autochange function is used.
• If Autochange function is not used, the speed regulated motor does
not need to have a relay output allocated to PFA but it needs to be
included in this value.
8128 AUX START ORDER 1…2
Sets the start order of the auxiliary motors.
1 = EVEN RUN TIME – The time sharing is active. The start order depends
on the run times.
2 = RELAY ORDER – The start order is fixed to be the order of the relays.

Group 98: OPTIONS

This group configures for options, in particular, enabling serial
communication with the drive.

9802 COMM PROT SEL 0…5
Selects the communication protocol.
0 = NOT SEL – No communication protocol selected.
1 = STD MODBUS – The drive communicates via a Modbus controller via
the RS485 serial link (X1 communications, terminal).
2 = N2 – The drive communicates via an N2 controller via the RS485
3 = FLN – The drive communicates via an FLN controller via the RS485
4 = EXT FBA – The drive communicates via a fieldbus adapter module in
option slot 2 of the drive.
• See also parameter Group 51: EXT COMM MODULE.
5 = BACNET – The drive communicates via a BACNET controller via the
RS485 serial link (X1 communications, terminal).

313
Complete parameter list

The following table lists all parameters and their default values for all
application macros. The user can enter desired parameter values
under the "User" column.
HVAC Cooling Booster

default Supply fan Return fan tower fan Condenser pump
Parameter Par.
name index 1 2 3 4 5 6
99 START-UP LANGUAGE 9901 ENGLISH ENGLISH ENGLISH ENGLISH ENGLISH ENGLISH

DATA APPLIC HVAC SUPPLY RETURN CLNG TWR CONDENS BOOSTER
MACRO 9902 DEFAULT FAN FAN FAN ER PUMP
MOTOR CTRL SCALAR: SCALAR: SCALAR: SCALAR: SCALAR: SCALAR:
MODE 9904 FREQ FREQ FREQ FREQ FREQ FREQ
MOTOR NOM 230/400/ 230/400/ 230/400/ 230/400/ 230/400/ 230/400/
VOLT 9905 460 V 460 V 460 V 460 V 460 V 460 V
MOTOR NOM
CURR 9906 1.0*IN 1.0*IN 1.0*IN 1.0*IN 1.0*IN 1.0*IN
MOTOR NOM
FREQ 9907 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz
MOTOR NOM 1440/ 1440/ 1440/ 1440/ 1440/ 1440/
SPEED 9908 1750 rpm 1750 rpm 1750 rpm 1750 rpm 1750 rpm 1750 rpm
MOTOR NOM
POWER 9909 1.0*PN 1.0*PN 1.0*PN 1.0*PN 1.0*PN 1.0*PN
ID RUN 9910 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
1 OPERATING SPEED 0102 - - - - - -

DATA OUTPUT
FREQ 0103 - - - - - -
CURRENT 0104 - - - - - -
TORQUE 0105 - - - - - -
POWER 0106 - - - - - -
DC BUS
VOLTAGE 0107 - - - - - -
OUTPUT
VOLTAGE 0109 - - - - - -
DRIVE TEMP 0110 - - - - - -

EXTERNAL
REF 1 0111 - - - - - -
EXTERNAL
REF 2 0112 - - - - - -
CTRL
LOCATION 0113 - - - - - -
RUN TIME (R) 0114 0h 0h 0h 0h 0h 0h
KWH
COUNTER (R) 0115 - - - - - -
APPL BLK
OUTPUT 0116 - - - - - -
DI 1-3 STATUS 0118 - - - - - -
DI 4-6 STATUS 0119 - - - - - -
AI1 0120 - - - - - -
AI2 0121 - - - - - -
RO 1-3
STATUS 0122 - - - - - -
314
Internal Dual Dual

Pump Internal timer, c. Floating setpoint setpoint Hand
alternation timer speeds point PID PID, c. sp. E-bypass control
Par.
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 index User
ENGLISH ENGLISH ENGLISH ENGLISH ENGLISH ENGLISH ENGLISH ENGLISH 9901

PUMP INT TIMER FLOATING DUAL DUAL HAND
ALTERN INT TIMER CS PNT SETPNT SPNT CS E-BYPASS CONTROL 9902
SCALAR: SCALAR: SCALAR: SCALAR: SCALAR: SCALAR: SCALAR: SCALAR:
FREQ FREQ FREQ FREQ FREQ FREQ FREQ FREQ 9904
230/400/ 230/400/ 230/400/ 230/400/ 230/400/ 230/400/ 230/400/ 230/400/
460 V 460 V 460 V 460 V 460 V 460 V 460 V 460 V 9905
1.0*IN 1.0*IN 1.0*IN 1.0*IN 1.0*IN 1.0*IN 1.0*IN 1.0*IN 9906
50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 9907

1440/ 1440/ 1440/ 1440/ 1440/ 1440/ 1440/ 1440/
1750 rpm 1750 rpm 1750 rpm 1750 rpm 1750 rpm 1750 rpm 1750 rpm 1750 rpm 9908
1.0*PN 1.0*PN 1.0*PN 1.0*PN 1.0*PN 1.0*PN 1.0*PN 1.0*P 9909
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 9910
- - - - - - - - 0102
- - - - - - - - 0103
- - - - - - - - 0104
- - - - - - - - 0105
- - - - - - - - 0106
- - - - - - - - 0107
- - - - - - - - 0109
- - - - - - - - 0110
- - - - - - - - 0111
- - - - - - - - 0112
- - - - - - - - 0113
0h 0h 0h 0h 0h 0h 0h 0h 0114
- - - - - - - - 0115
- - - - - - - - 0116
- - - - - - - - 0118
- - - - - - - - 0119
- - - - - - - - 0120
- - - - - - - - 0121
- - - - - - - - 0122
315

Parameter Par.
RO 4-6
STATUS 0123 - - - - - -
AO1 0124 - - - - - -
AO2 0125 - - - - - -
PID 1
OUTPUT 0126 - - - - - -
PID 2
OUTPUT 0127 - - - - - -
PID 1
SETPNT 0128 - - - - - -
PID 2
SETPNT 0129 - - - - - -
PID 1 FBK 0130 - - - - - -
PID 2 FBK 0131 - - - - - -

PID 1
DEVIATION 0132 - - - - - -
PID 2
DEVIATION 0133 - - - - - -
COMM RO
WORD 0134 0 0 0 0 0 0
COMM
VALUE 1 0135 0 0 0 0 0 0
COMM
VALUE 2 0136 0 0 0 0 0 0
PROCESS
VAR 1 0137 - - - - - -
PROCESS
VAR 2 0138 - - - - - -
PROCESS
VAR 3 0139 - - - - - -
RUN TIME 0140 0 kh 0 kh 0 kh 0 kh 0 kh 0 kh

MWH
COUNTER 0141 - - - - - -
REVOLUTION
CNTR 0142 0 0 0 0 0 0
DRIVE ON
TIME (HI) 0143 0 0 0 0 0 0
DRIVE ON
TIME (LO) 0144 0 0 0 0 0 0
MOTOR
TEMP 0145 0 0 0 0 0 0
CB TEMP 0150 - - - - - -
FB CMD
3 FB ACTUAL WORD 1 0301 - - - - - -
SIGNALS FB CMD
WORD 2 0302 - - - - - -
FB STS
WORD 1 0303 - - - - - -
FB STS
WORD 2 0304 0 0 0 0 0 0
FAULT
WORD 1 0305 0 0 0 0 0 0
FAULT
WORD 2 0306 0 0 0 0 0 0
FAULT
WORD 3 0307 0 0 0 0 0 0
ALARM
WORD 1 0308 0 0 0 0 0 0
ALARM
WORD 2 0309 0 0 0 0 0 0
316
Internal Dual Dual

Par.
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 index User
- - - - - - - - 0123
- - - - - - - - 0124
- - - - - - - - 0125
- - - - - - - - 0126
- - - - - - - - 0127
- - - - - - - - 0128
- - - - - - - - 0129
- - - - - - - - 0130
- - - - - - - - 0131
- - - - - - - - 0132
- - - - - - - - 0133
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0134
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0135
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0136
- - - - - - - - 0137
- - - - - - - - 0138
- - - - - - - - 0139
0 kh 0 kh 0 kh 0 kh 0 kh 0 kh 0 kh 0 kh 0140
- - - - - - - - 0141
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0142
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0143
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0144
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0145
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0150
- - - - - - - - 0301
- - - - - - - - 0302
- - - - - - - - 0303
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0304
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0305
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0306
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0307
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0308
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0309
317

Parameter Par.
4 FAULT LAST FAULT 0401 0 0 0 0 0 0

HISTORY
FAULT TIME 1 0402 0 0 0 0 0 0
FAULT TIME 2 0403 0 0 0 0 0 0

SPEED AT
FLT 0404 0 0 0 0 0 0
FREQ AT FLT 0405 0 0 0 0 0 0

VOLTAGE AT
FLT 0406 0 0 0 0 0 0
CURRENT AT
FLT 0407 0 0 0 0 0 0
TORQUE AT
FLT 0408 0 0 0 0 0 0
STATUS AT
FLT 0409 0 0 0 0 0 0
DI 1-3 AT FLT 0410 0 0 0 0 0 0
DI 4-6 AT FLT 0411 0 0 0 0 0 0

PREVIOUS
FAULT 1 0412 0 0 0 0 0 0
PREVIOUS
FAULT 2 0413 0 0 0 0 0 0
EXT1
10 START/ COMMANDS 1001 DI1 DI1 DI1 DI1 DI1 DI1
STOP/DIR EXT2
COMMANDS 1002 DI1 DI1 DI1 DI1 DI1 DI1
DIRECTION 1003 FORWARD FORWARD FORWARD FORWARD FORWARD FORWARD

KEYPAD REF REF 1 REF 1 REF 1 REF 1 REF 1 REF 1
11 REFERENCE SEL 1101 (Hz/rpm) (Hz/rpm) (Hz/rpm) (Hz/rpm) (Hz/rpm) (Hz/rpm)
SELECT EXT1/EXT2
SEL 1102 EXT1 EXT1 EXT1 EXT1 EXT1 EXT1
REF1 SELECT 1103 AI1 AI1 AI1 AI1 AI1 AI1

0.0 Hz / 0.0 Hz / 0.0 Hz / 0.0 Hz / 0.0 Hz / 0.0 Hz /
REF 1 MIN 1104 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm
50.0 Hz / 50.0 Hz / 50.0 Hz / 50.0 Hz / 50.0 Hz / 50.0 Hz /
1500 rpm 1500 rpm 1500 rpm 1500 rpm 1500 rpm 1500 rpm
60.0 Hz / 60.0 Hz / 60.0 Hz / 60.0 Hz / 60.0 Hz / 60.0 Hz /
REF 1 MAX 1105 1800 rpm 1800 rpm 1800 rpm 1800 rpm 1800 rpm 1800 rpm
REF2 SELECT 1106 PID1 OUT PID1 OUT PID1 OUT PID1 OUT PID1 OUT PID1 OUT
REF 2 MIN 1107 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0%
REF 2 MAX 1108 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0%

CONST
12 CONSTANT SPEED SEL 1201 DI3 DI3 DI3 DI3 DI3 DI3
SPEEDS CONST
SPEED 1 1202 5/6 Hz 5/6 Hz 5/6 Hz 5/6 Hz 5/6 Hz 5/6 Hz
CONST
CONST
CONST
CONST
318
Internal Dual Dual

Par.
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 index User
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0401
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0402
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0403
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0404
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0405
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0406
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0407
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0408
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0409
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0410
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0411
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0412
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0413
DI1 TIMER 1 DI1 DI1 DI1 DI1 DI1 NOT SEL 1001
DI1 TIMER 1 NOT SEL DI1 DI1 DI1 DI1 NOT SEL 1002
FORWARD FORWARD FORWARD FORWARD FORWARD FORWARD FORWARD FORWARD 1003

REF 1 REF 1 REF 1 REF 1 REF 1 REF 1 REF 1 REF 1
(Hz/rpm) (Hz/rpm) (Hz/rpm) (Hz/rpm) (Hz/rpm) (Hz/rpm) (Hz/rpm) (Hz/rpm) 1101
EXT1 EXT1 EXT1 EXT1 EXT1 DI2 EXT1 EXT1 1102
AI1 AI1 KEYPAD DI5U, 6D AI1 AI1 AI1 AI1 1103

0.0 Hz / 0.0 Hz / 0.0 Hz / 0.0 Hz / 0.0 Hz / 0.0 Hz / 0.0 Hz / 0.0 Hz /
52.0 Hz / 50.0 Hz / 50.0 H / 50.0 Hz / 50.0 Hz / 50.0 Hz / 50.0 Hz / 50.0 Hz /
1560 rpm 1500 rpm 1500 rpm 1500 rpm 1500 rpm 1500 rpm 1500 rpm 1500 rpm
62.0 H z/ 60.0 Hz / 60.0 Hz / 60.0 Hz / 60.0 Hz / 60.0 Hz / 60.0 Hz / 60.0 Hz /
PID1 OUT PID1 OUT AI2 AI2 PID1 OUT PID1 OUT PID1 OUT AI2 1106
0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 1107
100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 1108
NOT SEL NOT SEL TIMER 1 DI3 NOT SEL DI4, 5 NOT SEL NOT SEL 1201
319

Parameter Par.
CONST
CONST
TIMED MODE
SEL 1209 CS1/2/3/4 CS1/2/3/4 CS1/2/3/4 CS1/2/3/4 CS1/2/3/4 CS1/2/3/4
13 ANALOGUE MINIMUN AI1 1301 20.0% 20.0% 20.0% 20.0% 20.0% 20.0%
INPUTS
MAXIMUM AI1 1302 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0%
FILTER AI1 1303 0.1 s 0.1 s 0.1 s 0.1 s 0.1 s 0.1 s
MINIMUM AI2 1304 20.0% 20.0% 20.0% 20.0% 20.0% 20.0%
MAXIMUM AI2 1305 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0%
FILTER AI2 1306 0.1 s 0.1 s 0.1 s 0.1 s 0.1 s 0.1 s

RELAY
14 RELAY OUTPUT 1 1401 READY STARTED STARTED STARTED STARTED STARTED
OUTPUTS RELAY
OUTPUT 2 1402 RUN RUN RUN RUN RUN RUN
RELAY
OUTPUT 3 1403 FAULT (-1) FAULT (-1) FAULT (-1) FAULT (-1) FAULT (-1) FAULT (-1)
RO 1 ON
DELAY 1404 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s
RO 1 OFF
DELAY 1405 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s
RO 2 ON
DELAY 1406 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s
RO 2 OFF
DELAY 1407 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s
RO 3 ON
DELAY 1408 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s
RO 3 OFF
DELAY 1409 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s
RELAY
OUTPUT 4 1410 NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL
RELAY
RELAY
RO 4 ON
DELAY 1413 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s
RO 4 OFF
DELAY 1414 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s
RO 5 ON
DELAY 1415 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s
RO 5 OFF
DELAY 1416 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s
RO 6 ON
DELAY 1417 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s
RO 6 OFF
DELAY 1418 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s
320
Internal Dual Dual

Par.
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 index User
CS1/2/3/4 CS1/2/3/4 CS1/2/3/4 CS1/2/3/4 CS1/2/3/4 CS1/2/3/4 CS1/2/3/4 CS1/2/3/4 1209
20.0% 20.0% 0.0% 20.0% 20.0% 20.0% 20.0% 0.0% 1301
100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 1302
0.1 s 0.1 s 0.1 s 0.1 s 0.1 s 0.1 s 0.1 s 0.1 s 1303
20.0% 20.0% 0.0% 20.0% 20.0% 20.0% 20.0% 0.0% 1304
100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 1305
0.1 s 0.1 s 0.1 s 0.1 s 0.1 s 0.1 s 0.1 s 0.1 s 1306
PFA STARTED STARTED STARTED STARTED STARTED STARTED READY 1401
RUN RUN RUN RUN RUN RUN RUN RUN 1402
FAULT (-1) FAULT (-1) FAULT (-1) FAULT (-1) FAULT (-1) FAULT (-1) FAULT (-1) FAULT (-1) 1403
0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 1404
0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 1405
0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 1406
0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 1407
0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 1408
0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 1409
NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL 1410
0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 1413
0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 1414
0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 1415
0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 1416
0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 1417
0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 1418
321

Parameter Par.
AO1 OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT
15 ANALOGUE CONTENT 1501 FREQ FREQ FREQ FREQ FREQ FREQ
OUTPUTS AO1
CONTENT
MIN 1502 0.0 Hz 0.0 Hz 0.0 Hz 0.0 Hz 0.0 Hz 0.0 Hz
AO1
CONTENT 50.0/ 50.0/ 50.0/ 50.0/ 50.0/ 50.0/
MAX 1503 60.0 Hz 60.0 Hz 60.0 Hz 60.0 Hz 60.0 Hz 60.0 Hz
MINIMUM AO1 1504 4.0 mA 4.0 mA 4.0 mA 4.0 mA 4.0 mA 4.0 mA

MAXIMUM
AO1 1505 20.0 mA 20.0 mA 20.0 mA 20.0 mA 20.0 mA 20.0 mA
FILTER AO1 1506 0.1 s 0.1 s 0.1 s 0.1 s 0.1 s 0.1 s

AO2
CONTENT 1507 CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT
AO2
CONTENT
MIN 1508 0.0 A 0.0 A 0.0 A 0.0 A 0.0 A 0.0 A
AO2
CONTENT Defined by Defined by Defined by Defined by Defined by Defined by
MAX 1509 par. 0104 par. 0104 par. 0104 par. 0104 par. 0104 par. 0104
MINIMUM AO2 1510 4.0 mA 4.0 mA 4.0 mA 4.0 mA 4.0 mA 4.0 mA

MAXIMUM
AO2 1511 20.0 mA 20.0 mA 20.0 mA 20.0 mA 20.0 mA 20.0 mA
FILTER AO2 1512 0.1 s 0.1 s 0.1 s 0.1 s 0.1 s 0.1 s
16 SYSTEM RUN ENABLE 1601 NOT SEL DI2 DI2 DI2 DI2 DI2
CONTROLS PARAMETER
LOCK 1602 OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN
PASS CODE 1603 0 0 0 0 0 0

FAULT RESET
SEL 1604 KEYPAD KEYPAD KEYPAD KEYPAD KEYPAD KEYPAD
USER PAR
SET CHG 1605 NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL
LOCAL LOCK 1606 NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL
PARAM SAVE 1607 DONE DONE DONE DONE DONE DONE

START
ENABLE 1 1608 DI4 DI4 DI4 DI4 DI4 DI4
START
ENABLE 2 1609 NOT SEL DI5 DI5 DI5 DI5 DI5
DISPLAY
ALARMS 1610 NO NO NO NO NO NO
OVERRIDE
17 OVERRIDE SEL 1701 NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL
OVERRIDE
FREQ 1702 0.0 Hz 0.0 Hz 0.0 Hz 0.0 Hz 0.0 Hz 0.0 Hz
OVERRIDE
OVERR PASS
CODE 1704 0 0 0 0 0 0
OVERRIDE 1705 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
322
Internal Dual Dual

Par.
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 index User
OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT
0.0 Hz 0.0 Hz 0.0 Hz 0.0 Hz 0.0 Hz 0.0 Hz 0.0 Hz 0.0 Hz 1502
52.0/ 50.0/ 50.0/ 50.0/ 50.0/ 50.0/ 50.0/ 50.0/

4.0 mA 4.0 mA 4.0 mA 4.0 mA 4.0 mA 4.0 mA 4.0 mA 0.0 mA 1504
0.1 s 0.1 s 0.1 s 0.1 s 0.1 s 0.1 s 0.1 s 0.1 s 1506
PID 1 FBK CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT 1507
0.0% 0.0 A 0.0 A 0.0 A 0.0 A 0.0 A 0.0 A 0.0 A 1508
Defined by Defined by Defined by Defined by Defined by Defined by Defined by

100.0% par. 0104 par. 0104 par. 0104 par. 0104 par. 0104 par. 0104 par. 0104 1509
0.1 s 0.1 s 0.1 s 0.1 s 0.1 s 0.1 s 0.1 s 0.1 s 1512
DI2 DI2 DI2 DI2 DI2 NOT SEL D2 NOT SEL 1601
OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN 1602
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1603
KEYPAD KEYPAD KEYPAD KEYPAD KEYPAD KEYPAD KEYPAD KEYPAD 1604
DONE DONE DONE DONE DONE DONE DONE DONE 1607
NOT SEL DI4 DI4 DI4 DI4 NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL 1608
NOT SEL DI5 DI5 NOT SEL DI5 NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL 1609
NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO 1610
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1704
323

Parameter Par.
MINIMUM
20 LIMITS SPEED 2001 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm
MAXIMUM 1500/ 1500/ 1500/ 1500/ 1500/ 1500/
MAX
CURRENT 2003 1.1*IN 1.1*IN 1.1*IN 1.1*IN 1.1*IN 1.1*IN
UNDERVOLT ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE
CTRL 2006 (TIME) (TIME) (TIME) (TIME) (TIME) (TIME)
MINIMUM
MAXIMUM 50.0/ 50.0/ 50.0/ 50.0/ 50.0/ 50.0/
MIN TORQUE MIN MIN MIN MIN MIN MIN
SEL 2013 TORQUE 1 TORQUE 1 TORQUE 1 TORQUE 1 TORQUE 1 TORQUE 1
MAX TORQUE MAX MAX MAX MAX MAX MAX
SEL 2014 TORQUE 1 TORQUE 1 TORQUE 1 TORQUE 1 TORQUE 1 TORQUE 1
MIN TORQUE
1 2015 -300.0% -300.0% -300.0% -300.0% -300.0% -300.0%
MIN TORQUE
2 2016 -300.0% -300.0% -300.0% -300.0% -300.0% -300.0%
MAX TORQUE
1 2017 300.0% 300.0% 300.0% 300.0% 300.0% 300.0%
MAX TORQUE
2 2018 300.0% 300.0% 300.0% 300.0% 300.0% 300.0%
START
21 START/ FUNCTION 2101 AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO
STOP STOP
FUNCTION 2102 COAST COAST COAST COAST COAST COAST
DC MAGN
TIME 2103 0.30 s 0.30 s 0.30 s 0.30 s 0.30 s 0.30 s
DC HOLD CTL 2104 NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL
DC CURR
REF 2106 30% 30% 30% 30% 30% 30%
DC BRAKE
TIME 2107 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s
START
INHIBIT 2108 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
EM STOP SEL 2109 NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL
TORQ BOOST
CURR 2110 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100%
324
Internal Dual Dual

Par.
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 index User

1500/ 1500/ 1500/ 1500/ 1500/ 1500/ 1500/ 1500/
1.1*IN 1.1*IN 1.1*IN 1.1*IN 1.1*IN 1.1*IN 1.1*IN 1.1*IN 2003

ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE
(TIME) (TIME) (TIME) (TIME) (TIME) (TIME) (TIME) (TIME) 2006

52.0/ 50.0/ 50.0/ 50.0/ 50.0/ 50.0/ 50.0/ 50.0/
MIN MIN MIN MIN MIN MIN MIN MIN
TORQUE 1 TORQUE 1 TORQUE 1 TORQUE 1 TORQUE 1 TORQUE 1 TORQUE 1 TORQUE 1 2013
MAX MAX MAX MAX MAX MAX MAX MAX
TORQUE 1 TORQUE 1 TORQUE 1 TORQUE 1 TORQUE 1 TORQUE 1 TORQUE 1 TORQUE 1 2014
-300.0% -300.0% -300.0% -300.0% -300.0% -300.0% -300.0% -300.0% 2015
-300.0% -300.0% -300.0% -300.0% -300.0% -300.0% -300.0% -300.0% 2016
300.0% 300.0% 300.0% 300.0% 300.0% 300.0% 300.0% 300.0% 2017
300.0% 300.0% 300.0% 300.0% 300.0% 300.0% 300.0% 300.0% 2018
AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO 2101
COAST COAST COAST COAST COAST COAST COAST COAST 2102
0.30 s 0.30 s 0.30 s 0.30 s 0.30 s 0.30 s 0.30 s 0.30 s 2103
30% 30% 30% 30% 30% 30% 30% 30% 2106
0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 2107
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON 2108
100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 2110
325

Parameter Par.
ACC/DEC 1/2
22 ACCEL/ SEL 2201 NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL
DECEL ACCELER
TIME 1 2202 30.0 s 15.0 s 15.0 s 30.0 s 10.0 s 5.0 s
DECELER
TIME 1 2203 30.0 s 15.0 s 15.0 s 30.0 s 10.0 s 5.0 s
RAMP SHAPE
1 2204 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 1.0 s
ACCELER
TIME 2 2205 60.0 s 60.0 s 60.0 s 60.0 s 60.0 s 60.0 s
DECELER
TIME 2 2206 60.0 s 60.0 s 60.0 s 60.0 s 60.0 s 60.0 s
RAMP SHAPE
2 2207 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s
EM DEC TIME 2208 1.0 s 1.0 s 1.0 s 1.0 s 1.0 s 1.0 s

RAMP INPUT
0 2209 NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL
23 SPEED PROP GAIN 2301 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0
CONTROL INTEGRATION
TIME 2302 2.50 s 2.50 s 2.50 s 2.50 s 2.50 s 2.50 s
DERIVATION
TIME 2303 0 ms 0 ms 0 ms 0 ms 0 ms 0 ms
ACC
COMPEN-
SATION 2304 0.00 s 0.00 s 0.00 s 0.00 s 0.00 s 0.00 s
AUTOTUNE
RUN 2305 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
CRIT SPEED
25 CRITICAL SEL 2501 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
SPEEDS CRIT SPEED 0 Hz / 0 Hz / 0 Hz / 0 Hz / 0 Hz / 0 Hz /
1 LO 2502 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm
CRIT SPEED 0 Hz / 0 Hz / 0 Hz / 0 Hz / 0 Hz / 0 Hz /
1 HI 2503 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm
FLUX OPT
26 MOTOR ENABLE 2601 ON ON ON ON ON ON
CONTROLS FLUX
BRAKING 2602 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
IR COMP
VOLT 2603 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V
IR COMP
FREQ 2604 50% 50% 50% 50% 50% 50%
U/F RATIO 2605 SQUARED SQUARED SQUARED SQUARED SQUARED SQUARED

SWITCHING
FREQ 2606 4 kHz 4 kHz 4 kHz 4 kHz 4 kHz 4 kHz
SWITCH
FREQ CTRL 2607 ON ON ON ON ON ON
SLIP COMP
RATIO 2608 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0%
NOISE
SMOOTHING 2609 DISABLE DISABLE DISABLE DISABLE DISABLE DISABLE
326
Internal Dual Dual

Par.
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 index User
5.0 s 30.0 s 30.0 s 30.0 s 30.0 s 10.0 s 30.0 s 30.0 s 2202
5.0 s 30.0 s 30.0 s 30.0 s 30.0 s 10.0 s 30.0 s 30.0 s 2203
0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 2204
60.0 s 60.0 s 60.0 s 60.0 s 60.0 s 60.0 s 60.0 s 60.0 s 2205
60.0 s 60.0 s 60.0 s 60.0 s 60.0 s 60.0 s 60.0 s 60.0 s 2206
0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 2207
1.0 s 1.0 s 1.0 s 1.0 s 1.0 s 1.0 s 1.0 s 1.0 s 2208
10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 2301
2.50 s 2.50 s 2.50 s 2.50 s 2.50 s 2.50 s 2.50 s 2.50 s 2302
0 ms 0 ms 0 ms 0 ms 0 ms 0 ms 0 ms 0 ms 2303
0.00 s 0.00 s 0.00 s 0.00 s 0.00 s 0.00 s 0.00 s 0.00 s 2304

0 Hz / 0 Hz / 0 Hz / 0 Hz / 0 Hz / 0 Hz / 0 Hz / 0 Hz /
ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON 2601
0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 2603
50% 50% 50% 50% 50% 50% 50% 50% 2604
SQUARED SQUARED SQUARED SQUARED SQUARED SQUARED SQUARED SQUARED 2605
4 kHz 4 kHz 4 kHz 4 kHz 4 kHz 4 kHz 4 kHz 4 kHz 2606
ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON 2607
0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 2608
DISABLE DISABLE DISABLE DISABLE DISABLE DISABLE DISABLE DISABLE 2609
327

Parameter Par.
COOLING
29 MAINTE- FAN TRIG 2901 0.0 kh 0.0 kh 0.0 kh 0.0 kh 0.0 kh 0.0 kh
NANCE COOLING
TRIG FAN ACT 2902 0.0 kh 0.0 kh 0.0 kh 0.0 kh 0.0 kh 0.0 kh
REVOLUTION
TRIG 2903 0 Mrev 0 Mrev 0 Mrev 0 Mrev 0 Mrev 0 Mrev
REVOLUTION
ACT 2904 0 Mrev 0 Mrev 0 Mrev 0 Mrev 0 Mrev 0 Mrev
RUN TIME
TRIG 2905 0.0 kh 0.0 kh 0.0 kh 0.0 kh 0.0 kh 0.0 kh
RUN TIME
ACT 2906 0.0 kh 0.0 kh 0.0 kh 0.0 kh 0.0 kh 0.0 kh
USER MWH
TRIG 2907 0.0 MWh 0.0 MWh 0.0 MWh 0.0 MWh 0.0 MWh 0.0 MWh
USER MWH
ACT 2908 0.0 MWh 0.0 MWh 0.0 MWh 0.0 MWh 0.0 MWh 0.0 MWh
AI<MIN
30 FAULT FUNCTION 3001 NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL
FUNCTIONS PANEL COMM
ERR 3002 FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT
EXTERNAL
FAULT 1 3003 NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL
EXTERNAL
FAULT 2 3004 NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL
MOT THERM
PROT 3005 FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT
MOT THERM
TIME 3006 1050 s 1050 s 1050 s 1050 s 1050 s 1050 s
MOT LOAD
CURVE 3007 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100%
ZERO SPEED
LOAD 3008 70% 70% 70% 70% 70% 70%
BREAK POINT
FREQ 3009 35 Hz 35 Hz 35 Hz 35 Hz 35 Hz 35 Hz
STALL
FUNCTION 3010 FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT
STALL
FREQUENCY 3011 20.0 Hz 20.0 Hz 20.0 Hz 20.0 Hz 20.0 Hz 20.0 Hz
STALL TIME 3012 20 s 20 s 20 s 20 s 20 s 20 s

UNDERLOAD
FUNC 3013 NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL
UNDERLOAD
TIME 3014 20 s 20 s 20 s 20 s 20 s 20 s
UNDERLOAD
CURVE 3015 1 1 1 1 1 1
EARTH FAULT 3017 ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE

COMM FAULT
FUNC 3018 NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL
COMM FAULT
TIME 3019 10.0 s 10.0 s 10.0 s 10.0 s 10.0 s 10.0 s
AI1 FAULT
LIMIT 3021 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0%
AI2 FAULT
LIMIT 3022 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0%
WIRING
FAULT 3023 ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE
CB TEMP
FAULT 3024 1 1 1 1 1 1
328
Internal Dual Dual

Par.
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 index User
0.0 kh 0.0 kh 0.0 kh 0.0 kh 0.0 kh 0.0 kh 0.0 kh 0.0 kh 2901
0 Mrev 0 Mrev 0 Mrev 0 Mrev 0 Mrev 0 Mrev 0 Mrev 0 Mrev 2903
0 Mrev 0 Mrev 0 Mrev 0 Mrev 0 Mrev 0 Mrev 0 Mrev 0 Mrev 2904
0.0 MWh 0.0 MWh 0.0 MWh 0.0 MWh 0.0 MWh 0.0 MWh 0.0 MWh 0.0 MWh 2907
0.0 MWh 0.0 MWh 0.0 MWh 0.0 MWh 0.0 MWh 0.0 MWh 0.0 MWh 0.0 MWh 2908
FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT 3002
FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT 3005
1050 s 1050 s 1050 s 1050 s 1050 s 1050 s 1050 s 1050 s 3006
100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 3007
70% 70% 70% 70% 70% 70% 70% 70% 3008
35 Hz 35 Hz 35 Hz 35 Hz 35 Hz 35 Hz 35 Hz 35 Hz 3009
NOT SEL FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT 3010
20 s 20 s 20 s 20 s 20 s 20 s 20 s 20 s 3012
20 s 20 s 20 s 20 s 20 s 20 s 20 s 20 s 3014
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3015
ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE 3017
10.0 s 10.0 s 10.0 s 10.0 s 10.0 s 10.0 s 10.0 s 10.0 s 3019
0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 3021
0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 3022
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3024
329

Parameter Par.
NR OF
31 AUTOMATIC TRIALS 3101 5 5 5 5 5 5
RESET
TRIAL TIME 3102 30.0 s 30.0 s 30.0 s 30.0 s 30.0 s 30.0 s
DELAY TIME 3103 6.0 s 6.0 s 6.0 s 6.0 s 6.0 s 6.0 s

AR OVER-
CURRENT 3104 DISABLE DISABLE DISABLE DISABLE DISABLE DISABLE
AR OVER-
VOLTAGE 3105 ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE
AR UNDER-
VOLTAGE 3106 ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE
AR AI<MIN 3107 ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE

AR
EXTERNAL
FLT 3108 ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE
SUPERV 1 OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT
32 SUPER- PARAM 3201 FREQ FREQ FREQ FREQ FREQ FREQ
VISION SUPERV 1
LIM LO 3202 50.0 Hz 50.0 Hz 50.0 Hz 50.0 Hz 50.0 Hz 50.0 Hz
SUPERV 1
LIM HI 3203 50.0 Hz 50.0 Hz 50.0 Hz 50.0 Hz 50.0 Hz 50.0 Hz
SUPERV 2
PARAM 3204 CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT
SUPERV 2
LIM LO 3205 - - - - - -
SUPERV 2
LIM HI 3206 - - - - - -
SUPERV 3 OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT
PARAM 3207 TORQUE FREQ FREQ FREQ FREQ FREQ
SUPERV 3
LIM LO 3208 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0%
SUPERV 3
LIM HI 3209 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0%
Firmware Firmware Firmware Firmware Firmware Firmware
33 INFOR- FW VERSION 3301 version version version version version version
MATION
LP VERSION 3302 0 0 0 0 0 0
TEST DATE 3303 0 0 0 0 0 0

DRIVE
RATING 3304 - - - - - -
330
Internal Dual Dual

Par.
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 index User
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 3101
30.0 s 30.0 s 30.0 s 30.0 s 30.0 s 30.0 s 30.0 s 30.0 s 3102
6.0 s 6.0 s 6.0 s 6.0 s 6.0 s 6.0 s 6.0 s 6.0 s 3103
DISABLE DISABLE DISABLE DISABLE DISABLE DISABLE DISABLE 3104
ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE DISABLE ENABLE ENABLE 3105
ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE 3106
ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE DISABLE ENABLE ENABLE 3107

CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT 3204
- - - - - - - - 3205
- - - - - - - - 3206
100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 3208
100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 3209

Firmware Firmware Firmware Firmware Firmware Firmware Firmware Firmware
version version version version version version version version 3301
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3302
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3303
- - - - - - - - 3304
331

Parameter Par.
SIGNAL 1 OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT
34 PANEL PARAM 3401 FREQ FREQ FREQ FREQ FREQ FREQ
DISPLAY
SIGNAL 1 MIN 3402 0.0 Hz 0.0 Hz 0.0 Hz 0.0 Hz 0.0 Hz 0.0 Hz
SIGNAL 1 500.0/ 500.0/ 500.0/ 500.0/ 500.0/ 500.0/
MAX 3403 600.0 Hz 600.0 Hz 600.0 Hz 600.0 Hz 600.0 Hz 600.0 Hz
OUTPUT 1
DSP FORM 3404 9 9 9 9 9 9
OUTPUT 1
UNIT 3405 % % % % % %
OUTPUT 1
MIN 3406 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0%
OUTPUT 1 1000/ 1000/ 1000/ 1000/ 1000/ 1000/
MAX 3407 833.3% 833.3% 833.3% 833.3% 833.3% 833.3%
SIGNAL 2
PARAM 3408 CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT
SIGNAL 2 MIN 3409 0.0 A 0.0 A 0.0 A 0.0 A 0.0 A 0.0 A

SIGNAL 2
MAX 3410 - - - - - -
OUTPUT 2
DSP FORM 3411 9 9 9) 9 9 9
OUTPUT 2
UNIT 3412 A A A A A A
OUTPUT 2
MIN 3413 0.0 A 0.0 A 0.0 A 0.0 A 0.0 A 0.0 A
OUTPUT 2
MAX 3414 - - - - - -
SIGNAL 3
PARAM 3415 AI1 AI1 AI1 AI1 AI1 AI1
SIGNAL 3 MIN 3416 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0%

SIGNAL 3
MAX 3417 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0%
OUTPUT 3
DSP FORM 3418 9 9 9 9 9 9
OUTPUT 3
UNIT 3419 V/mA V/mA V/mA V/mA V/mA V/mA
OUTPUT 3 0.0 V / 0.0 V / 0.0 V / 0.0 V / 0.0 V / 0.0 V /
MIN 3420 0.0 mA 0.0 mA 0.0 mA 0.0 mA 0.0 mA 0.0 mA
OUTPUT 3 10.0 V / 10.0 V / 10.0 V / 10.0 V / 10.0 V / 10.0 V /
MAX 3421 20.0 mA 20.0 mA 20.0 mA 20.0 mA 20.0 mA 20.0 mA
SENSOR
35 MOTOR TYPE 3501 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE
TEMP INPUT
MEAS SELECTION 3502 AI1 AI1 AI1 AI1 AI1 AI1
130 °C / 130 °C / 130 °C / 130 °C / 130 °C / 130 °C /
4000 ohm / 4000 ohm / 4000 ohm / 4000 ohm / 4000 ohm / 4000 ohm /
ALARM LIMIT 3503 0 0 0 0 0 0
130 °C / 130 °C / 130 °C / 130 °C / 130 °C / 130 °C /
4000 ohm / 4000 ohm / 4000 ohm / 4000 ohm / 4000 ohm / 4000 ohm /
FAULT LIMIT 3504 0 0 0 0 0 0
332
Internal Dual Dual

Par.
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 index User

500.0/ 500.0/ 500.0/ 500.0/ 500.0/ 500.0/ 500.0/ 500.0/
9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 3404
% % % % % % % % 3405
0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 3406

1000/ 1000/ 1000/ 1000/ 1000/ 1000/ 1000/ 1000/
833.3% 833.3% 833.3% 833.3% 833.3% 833.3% 833.3% 833.3% 3407
CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT 3408
0.0 A 0.0 A 0.0 A 0.0 A 0.0 A 0.0 A 0.0 A 0.0 A 3409
- - - - - - - - 3410
9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 3411
A A A A A A A A 3412
0.0 A 0.0 A 0.0 A 0.0 A 0.0 A 0.0 A 0.0 A 0.0 A 3413
- - - - - - - - 3414
AI1 AI1 TORQUE TORQUE AI1 AI1 AI1 NOT SEL 3415
0.0% 0.0% -200.0% -200.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% - 3416
100.0% 100.0% 200.0% 200.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% - 3417
9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 3418
V/mA V/mA % % V/mA V/mA V/mA - 3419

0.0 V / 0.0 V / 0.0 V / 0.0 V / 0.0 V /
0.0 mA 0.0 mA -200.0% -200.0% 0.0 mA 0.0 mA 0.0 mA - 3420
10.0 V / 10.0 V / 10.0 V / 10.0 V / 10.0 V /
20.0 mA 20.0 mA 200.0% 200.0% 20.0 mA 20.0 mA 20.0 mA - 3421
NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 3501
AI1 AI1 AI1 AI1 AI1 AI1 AI1 AI1 3502

130 °C / 130 °C / 130 °C / 130 °C / 130 °C / 130 °C / 130 °C / 130 °C /
4000 ohm / 4000 ohm / 4000 ohm / 4000 ohm / 4000 ohm / 4000 ohm / 4000 ohm / 4000 ohm /
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3503
130 °C / 130 °C / 130 °C / 130 °C / 130 °C / 130 °C / 130 °C / 130 °C /
4000 ohm / 4000 ohm / 4000 ohm / 4000 ohm / 4000 ohm / 4000 ohm / 4000 ohm / 4000 ohm /
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3504
333

Parameter Par.
TIMERS
36 TIMED ENABLE 3601 NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL
FUNCTIONS PERIOD1
DAILY STR 3602 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00
PERIOD1
DAILY STP 3603 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00
PERIOD1
WEEKLY STR 3604 MONDAY MONDAY MONDAY MONDAY MONDAY MONDAY
PERIOD1
WEEKLY STP 3605 MONDAY MONDAY MONDAY MONDAY MONDAY MONDAY
PERIOD2
DAILY STR 3606 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00
PERIOD2
DAILY STP 3607 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00
PERIOD2
PERIOD2
PERIOD3
DAILY STR 3610 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00
PERIOD3
DAILY STP 3611 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00
PERIOD3
PERIOD3
PERIOD4
DAILY STR 3614 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00
PERIOD4
DAILY STP 3615 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00
PERIOD4
PERIOD4
BOOST SEL 3622 NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL
BOOST TIME 3623 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00
TIMER 1 SRC 3626 NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL
334
Internal Dual Dual

Pump Internal time, c. Floating setpoint setpoint Hand
Par.
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 index User
NOT SEL DI1 DI1 NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL 3601
0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 3602
0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 3603
MONDAY MONDAY MONDAY MONDAY MONDAY MONDAY MONDAY MONDAY 3604
0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 3606
0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 3607
0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 3610
0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 3611
0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 3614
0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 3615
NOT SEL DI3 DI3 NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL 3622
0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 0:00:00 3623

P1+P2+P3 P1+P2+P3
NOT SEL +P4+B +P4+B NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL 3626
335

Parameter Par.
40 PROCESS GAIN 4001 2.5 0.7 0.7 2.5 2.5 2.5

PID SET 1 INTEGRATION
TIME 4002 3.0 s 10.0 s 10.0 s 3.0 s 3.0 s 3.0 s
DERIVATION
TIME 4003 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s
PID DERIV
FILTER 4004 1.0 s 1.0 s 1.0 s 1.0 s 1.0 s 1.0 s
ERROR
VALUE INV 4005 NO NO NO NO YES NO
UNITS 4006 % % % % % %
UNIT SCALE 4007 1 1 1 1 1 1
0% VALUE 4008 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0%
100% VALUE 4009 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0%

SET POINT
INTERNAL
SETPNT 4011 40.0% 40.0% 40.0% 40.0% 40.0% 40.0%
SETPOINT
MIN 4012 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0%
SETPOINT
MAX 4013 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0%
FBK SEL 4014 ACT1 ACT1 ACT1 ACT1 ACT1 ACT1

FBK
MULTIPLIER 4015 NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL
ACT1 INPUT 4016 AI2 AI2 AI2 AI2 AI2 AI2

ACT1
MINIMUM 4018 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0%
ACT1
MAXIMUM 4019 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100%
ACT2
MINIMUM 4020 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0%
ACT2
MAXIMUM 4021 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100%
SLEEP
SELECTION 4022 NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL
PID SLEEP
LEVEL 4023 0.0 Hz 0.0 Hz 0.0 Hz 0.0 Hz 0.0 Hz 0.0 Hz
PID SLEEP
DELAY 4024 60.0 s 60.0 s 60.0 s 60.0 s 60.0 s 60.0 s
WAKE-UP
DEV 4025 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0%
WAKE-UP
DELAY 4026 0.50 s 0.50 s 0.50 s 0.50 s 0.50 s 0.50 s
PID 1 PARAM
SET 4027 SET 1 SET 1 SET 1 SET 1 SET 1 SET 1
336
Internal Dual Dual

Pump Internal time, c. Floating setpoint setpoint Hand
Par.
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 index User
2.5 2.5 1.0 2.5 2.5 0.7 2.5 1.0 4001
3.0 s 3.0 s 60.0 s 3.0 s 3.0 s 10.0 s 3.0 s 60.0 s 4002
0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 4003
1.0 s 1.0 s 1.0 s 1.0 s 1.0 s 1.0 s 1.0 s 1.0 s 4004
% % % % % % % % 4006
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 4007
0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 4008
100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 4009
KEYPAD KEYPAD AI1 KEYPAD INTERNAL INTERNAL KEYPAD AI1 4010
40.0% 40.0% 40.0% 40.0% 50.0% 50.0% 40.0% 40.0% 4011
0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 4012
100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 4013
ACT1 ACT1 ACT1 ACT1 ACT1 ACT1 ACT1 ACT1 4014
0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 4018
100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 4019
0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 4020
100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 4021
60.0 s 60.0 s 60.0 s 60.0 s 60.0 s 60.0 s 60.0 s 60.0 s 4024
0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 4025
0.50 s 0.50 s 0.50 s 0.50 s 0.50 s 0.50 s 0.50 s 0.50 s 4026
SET 1 SET 1 SET 1 SET 1 DI3 DI3 SET 1 SET 1 4027
337

Parameter Par.
41 PROCESS GAIN 4101 2.5 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0

PID SET 2 INTEGRATION
TIME 4102 3.0 s 60.0 s 60.0 s 60.0 s 60.0 s 60.0 s
DERIVATION
TIME 4103 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s
PID DERIV
FILTER 4104 1.0 s 1.0 s 1.0 s 1.0 s 1.0 s 1.0 s
ERROR
VALUE INV 4105 NO NO NO NO NO NO
UNITS 4106 % % % % % %
UNIT SCALE 4107 1 1 1 1 1 1
0% VALUE 4108 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0%
100% VALUE 4109 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0%

SET POINT
INTERNAL
SETPNT 4111 40.0% 40.0% 40.0% 40.0% 40.0% 40.0%
SETPOINT
MIN 4112 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0%
SETPOINT
MAX 4113 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0%

FBK

ACT1
MINIMUM 4118 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0%
ACT1
MAXIMUM 4119 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100%
ACT2
MINIMUM 4120 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0%
ACT2
MAXIMUM 4121 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100%
SLEEP
SELECTION 4122 NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL
PID SLEEP
LEVEL 4123 0.0 Hz 0.0 Hz 0.0 Hz 0.0 Hz 0.0 Hz 0.0 Hz
PID SLEEP
DELAY 4124 60.0 s 60.0 s 60.0 s 60.0 s 60.0 s 60.0 s
WAKE-UP
DEV 4125 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0%
WAKE-UP
DELAY 4126 0.50 s 0.50 s 0.50 s 0.50 s 0.50 s 0.50 s
338
Internal Dual Dual

Par.
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 index User
1.0 2.5 1.0 2.5 2.5 0.7 2.5 1.0 4101
60.0 s 3.0 s 60.0 s 3.0 s 3.0 s 10.0 s 3.0 s 60.0 s 4102
0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 4103
1.0 s 1.0 s 1.0 s 1.0 s 1.0 s 1.0 s 1.0 s 1.0 s 4104
% % % % % % % % 4106
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 4107
0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 4108
100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 4109
KEYPAD KEYPAD AI1 KEYPAD INTERNAL INTERNAL KEYPAD AI1 4110
40.0% 40.0% 40.0% 40.0% 100.0% 100.0% 40.0% 40.0% 4111
0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 4112
100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 4113
0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 4118
100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 4119
0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 4120
100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 4121
60.0 s 60.0 s 60.0 s 60.0 s 60.0 s 60.0 s 60.0 s 60.0 s 4124
0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 4125
0.50 s 0.50 s 0.50 s 0.50 s 0.50 s 0.50 s 0.50 s 0.50 s 4126
339

Parameter Par.
42 EXT/TRIM GAIN 4201 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0

PID INTEGRATION
TIME 4202 60.0 s 60.0 s 60.0 s 60.0 s 60.0 s 60.0 s
DERIVATION
TIME 4203 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s
PID DERIV
FILTER 4204 1.0 s 1.0 s 1.0 s 1.0 s 1.0 s 1.0 s
ERROR
VALUE INV 4205 NO NO NO NO NO NO
UNITS 4206 % % % % % %
UNIT SCALE 4207 1 1 1 1 1 1
0% VALUE 4208 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0%
100% VALUE 4209 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0%

SET POINT
SEL 4210 INTERNAL INTERNAL INTERNAL INTERNAL INTERNAL INTERNAL
INTERNAL
SETPNT 4211 40.0% 40.0% 40.0% 40.0% 40.0% 40.0%
SETPOINT
MIN 4212 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0%
SETPOINT
MAX 4213 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0%

FBK

ACT1
MINIMUM 4218 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0%
ACT1
MAXIMUM 4219 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100%
ACT2
MINIMUM 4220 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0%
ACT2
MAXIMUM 4221 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100%
ACTIVATE 4228 NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL
OFFSET 4229 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0%
TRIM MODE 4230 NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL
TRIM SCALE 4231 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0%

CORRECTION
SRC 4232 PID2 REF PID2 REF PID2 REF PID2 REF PID2 REF PID2 REF
340
Internal Dual Dual

Par.
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 index User
1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 4201
60.0 s 60.0 s 60.0 s 60.0 s 60.0 s 60.0 s 60.0 s 60.0 s 4202
0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 4203
1.0 s 1.0 s 1.0 s 1.0 s 1.0 s 1.0 s 1.0 s 1.0 s 4204
% % % % % % % % 4206
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 4207
0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 4208
100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 4209
INTERNAL INTERNAL INTERNAL INTERNAL INTERNAL INTERNAL INTERNAL AI1 4210
40.0% 40.0% 40.0% 40.0% 40.0% 40.0% 40.0% 40.0% 4211
0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 4212
100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 4213
0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 4218
100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 4219
0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 4220
100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 4221
0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 4229
100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 100.0% 4231
PID2 REF PID2 REF PID2 REF PID2 REF PID2 REF PID2 REF PID2 REF PID2 REF 4232
341

Parameter Par.
NOT NOT NOT NOT NOT NOT
51 EXT FBA TYPE 5101 DEFINED DEFINED DEFINED DEFINED DEFINED DEFINED
COMM FBA PAR 5102
MODULE 2…26 … 0 0 0 0 0 0
FBA PAR
REFRESH 5127 0 0 0 0 0 0
FILE CPI FW
REV 5128 0 0 0 0 0 0
FILE CONFIG
ID 5129 0 0 0 0 0 0
FILE CONFIG
REV 2130 0 0 0 0 0 0
FBA STATUS 5131 0 0 0 0 0 0

FBA CPI FW
REV 5132 0 0 0 0 0 0
FBA APPL FW
REV 5133 0 0 0 0 0 0
52 PANEL STATION ID 5201 1 1 1 1 1 1

COMM
BAUD RATE 5202 9.6 kb/s 9.6 kb/s 9.6 kb/s 9.6 kb/s 9.6 kb/s 9.6 kb/s
PARITY 5203 0 0 0 0 0 0
OK
MESSAGES 5204 - - - - - -
PARITY
ERRORS 5205 - - - - - -
FRAME
ERRORS 5206 - - - - - -
BUFFER
OVERRUNS 5207 - - - - - -
CRC ERRORS 5208 - - - - - -

EFB
PROTOCOL
53 EFB ID 5301 0 0 0 0 0 0
PROTOCOL EFB STATION
ID 5302 1 1 1 1 1 1
EFB BAUD
RATE 5303 9.6 kb/s 9.6kibs/s 9.6kibs/s 9.6kibs/s 9.6kibs/s 9.6kibs/s
EFB PARITY 5304 0 0 0 0 0 0

EFB CTRL
PROFILE 5305 0 0 0 0 0 0
EFB OK
MESSAGES 5306 0 0 0 0 0 0
EFB CRC
ERRORS 5307 0 0 0 0 0 0
EFB UART
ERRORS 5308 0 0 0 0 0 0
EFB STATUS 5309 0 0 0 0 0 0

EFB PAR 5310
10…20 … 0 0 0 0 0 0
342
Internal Dual Dual

Par.
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 index User
NOT NOT NOT NOT NOT NOT NOT NOT
DEFINED DEFINED DEFINED DEFINED DEFINED DEFINED DEFINED DEFINED 5101
5102…
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 5126
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 5127
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 5128
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 5129
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2130
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 5131
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 5132
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 5133
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 5201
9.6 kb/s 9.6 kb/s 9.6 kb/s 9.6 kb/s 9.6 kb/s 9.6 kb/s 9.6 kb/s 9.6 kb/s 5202
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 5203
- - - - - - - - 5204
- - - - - - - - 5205
- - - - - - - - 5206
- - - - - - - - 5207
- - - - - - - - 5208
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 5301
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 5302
9.6 kb/s 9.6 kb/s 9.6 kb/s 9.6 kb/s 9.6 kb/s 9.6 kb/s 9.6 kb/s 9.6 kb/s 5303
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 5304
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 5305
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 5306
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 5307
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 5308
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 5309
5310…
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 5320
343

Parameter Par.
REFERENCE
81 PFA STEP 1 8103 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0%
CONTROL REFERENCE
STEP 2 8104 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0%
REFERENCE
STEP 3 8105 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0%
START FREQ
1 8109 50.0 Hz 50.0 Hz 50.0 Hz 50.0 Hz 50.0 Hz 50.0 Hz
START FREQ
2 8110 50.0 Hz 50.0 Hz 50.0 Hz 50.0 Hz 50.0 Hz 50.0 Hz
START FREQ
3 8111 50.0 Hz 50.0 Hz 50.0 Hz 50.0 Hz 50.0 Hz 50.0 Hz
LOW FREQ 1 8112 25.0 Hz 25.0 Hz 25.0 Hz 25.0 Hz 25.0 Hz 25.0 Hz

AUX MOT
START D 8115 5.0 s 5.0 s 5.0 s 5.0 s 5.0 s 5.0 s
AUX MOT
STOP D 8116 3.0 s 3.0 s 3.0 s 3.0 s 3.0 s 3.0 s
NR OF AUX
MOT 8117 1 1 1 1 1 1
AUTOCHNG
INTERV 8118 NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL
AUTOCHNG
LEVEL 8119 50.0% 50.0% 50.0% 50.0% 50.0% 50.0%
INTERLOCKS 8120 DI4 DI4 DI4 DI4 DI4 DI4

REG BYPASS
CTRL 8121 NO NO NO NO NO NO
PFA START
DELAY 8122 0.50 s 0.50 s 0.50 s 0.50 s 0.50 s 0.50 s
PFA ENABLE 8123 NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL
ACC IN AUX
STOP 8124 NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL
DEC IN AUX
START 8125 NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL
TIMED
AUTOCHNG 8126 NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL
MOTORS 8127 2 2 2 2 2 2
AUX START
ORDER 8128 1 1 1 1 1 1
98 OPTIONS COMM PROT
SEL 9802 NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL
344
Internal Dual Dual

Par.
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 index User
0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 8103
0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 8104
0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 8105
5.0 s 5.0 s 5.0 s 5.0 s 5.0 s 5.0 s 5.0 s 5.0 s 8115
3.0 s 3.0 s 3.0 s 3.0 s 3.0 s 3.0 s 3.0 s 3.0 s 8116
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 8117
50.0% 50.0% 50.0% 50.0% 50.0% 50.0% 50.0% 50.0% 8119
DI4 DI4 DI4 DI4 DI4 DI4 DI4 DI4 8120
0.50 s 0.50 s 0.50 s 0.50 s 0.50 0.50 0.50 s 0.50 s 8122
ACTIVE NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL 8123
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 8127
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 8128
345
346
Diagnostics and maintenance

This chapter contains information on fault diagnostics, fault
correction, resetting and maintaining the drive.
WARNING! Do not attempt any measurement, parts

replacement or other service procedure not described in this
manual. Such action will void the warranty, may endanger
correct operation, and increase downtime and expense.
WARNING! All electrical installation and maintenance work

described in this chapter should only be undertaken by qualified
service personnel. The safety instructions on page 8 must be
followed.
Diagnostics and maintenance 347

Diagnostics displays
The drive detects error situations and reports them using:
• green and red LED on the body of the drive
• status LED on the control panel (if a HVAC control panel is
attached to the drive)
• control panel display (if a HVAC control panel is attached to
the drive)
• Fault Word and Alarm Word parameter bits (parameters 0305
to 0309). See Group 03: FB ACTUAL SIGNALS.
The form of the display depends on the severity of the error. You
can specify the severity for many errors by directing the drive to:
• ignore the error situation
• report the situation as an alarm
• report the situation as a fault.
Red – faults
The drive signals that it has detected a severe error, or fault, by:
• enabling the red LED on the drive (LED is either steady or
flashing)
• showing the steady red status LED on the control panel (if
attached to the drive)
• setting an appropriate bit in a Fault Word parameter (0305 to
0307)
• overriding the control panel display with the display of a fault
code
• stopping the motor (if it was on).
The fault code on the control panel display is temporary.
Pressing any of the following keys removes the fault message:
MENU, ENTER, UP or DOWN key. The message reappears
after a few seconds if the control panel is not touched and the
fault is still active.
348 Diagnostics and maintenance

Flashing green – alarms

For less severe errors, called alarms, the diagnostic display is
advisory. For these situations, the drive is simply reporting that it
had detected something “unusual”. In these situations, the drive:
• flashes the green LED on the drive (does not apply to alarms
that arise from control panel operation errors)
• flashes the green status LED on the control panel (if attached
to the drive)
• sets an appropriate bit in an Alarm Word parameter (0308 or
0309). See Group 03: FB ACTUAL SIGNALS for bit
definitions.
• overrides the control panel display with the display of an
alarm code and/or name.
Alarm messages disappear from the control panel display after a
few seconds. The message returns periodically as long as the
alarm condition exists.
Correcting faults
The recommended corrective action for faults is:
1. Use the Fault listing table on page 350 to find and address
the root cause of the problem.
2. Reset the drive. See section Fault resetting on page 358.

Fault listing
Fault Fault name in Description and

code the panel recommended corrective action
1 OVERCURRENT Output current is excessive. Check for and
correct:
• excessive motor load
• insufficient acceleration time (parameters
2202 ACCELER TIME 1 and 2205 ACCELER
TIME 2)
• faulty motor, motor cables or connections.
2 DC OVERVOLT Intermediate circuit DC voltage is excessive.
Check for and correct:
• static or transient over voltages in the
input power supply
• insufficient deceleration time (parameters
2203 DECELER TIME 1 and 2206 DECELER
TIME 2)
• undersized brake chopper (if present).
3 DEV OVERTEMP Drive heatsink is overheated. Temperature is
at or above 115°C (239°F). Check for and
correct:
• fan failure
• obstructions in the air flow
• dirt or dust coating on the heat sink
• excessive ambient temperature
• excessive motor load.
4 SHORT CIRC Fault current. Check for and correct:
• a short-circuit in the motor cable(s) or
motor
• supply disturbances.
5 RESERVED Not used.
6 DC UNDERVOLT Intermediate circuit DC voltage is not
sufficient. Check for and correct:
• missing phase in the input power supply
• blown fuse
• undervoltage in mains.


7 AI1 LOSS Analog input 1 loss. Analog input value is
less than AI1 FLT LIMIT (3021). Check for and
correct:
• source and connection for analog input
• parameter settings for AI1 FLT LIMIT (3021)
and 3001 AI<MIN FUNCTION.
8 AI2 LOSS Analog input 2 loss. Analog input value is
less than AI2 FLT LIMIT (3022). Check for and
correct:
• source and connection for analog input
• parameter settings for AI2 FLT LIMIT (3022)
and 3001 AI<MIN FUNCTION.
9 MOT OVERTEMP Motor is too hot, as estimated by the drive.
• Check for overloaded motor.
• Adjust the parameters used for the
estimate (3005…3009).
• Check the temperature sensors and
Group 35: MOTOR TEMP MEAS
parameters.
10 PANEL LOSS Panel communication is lost and either:
• the drive is in local control mode (the
control panel displays HAND), or
• the drive is in remote control mode
(AUTO) and is parameterized to accept
start/stop, direction or reference from the
control panel.
To correct, check:
• communication lines and connections
• parameter 3002 PANEL COMM ERROR
• parameters in Group 10: START/STOP/
DIR and Group 11: REFERENCE
SELECT (if drive operation is AUTO).
11 ID RUN FAIL The motor ID run was not completed
successfully. Check for and correct:
• motor connections.


12 MOTOR STALL Motor or process stall. Motor is operating in
the stall region. Check for and correct:
• excessive load
• insufficient motor power
• parameters 3010…3012.
14 EXT FAULT 1 Digital input defined to report the first
external fault is active. See parameter 3003
EXTERNAL FAULT 1.
15 EXT FAULT 2 Digital input defined to report the second

external fault is active. See parameter 3004
EXTERNAL FAULT 2.
16 EARTH FAULT The load on the input power system is out of

balance.
• Check for/correct faults in the motor or
motor cable.
• Verify that motor cable does not exceed
max. specified length.
17 UNDERLOAD Motor load is lower than expected. Check for
and correct:
• disconnected load
• parameters 3013 UNDERLOAD FUNCTION …
3015 UNDERLOAD CURVE.
18 THERM FAIL Internal fault. The thermistor measuring the
internal temperature of the drive is open or
shorted. Contact your local ABB
representative.
19 OPEX LINK Internal fault. A communication-related
problem has been detected between the
control and main circuit boards. Contact your
local ABB representative.
20 OPEX PWR Internal fault. Low voltage condition detected
on the main circuit board. Contact your local
ABB representative.


21 CURR MEAS Internal fault. Current measurement is out of
range. Contact your local ABB
representative.
22 SUPPLY PHASE Ripple voltage in the DC link is too high.
• missing mains phase
• blown fuse.
24 OVERSPEED Motor speed is greater than 120% of the
larger (in magnitude) of 2001 MINIMUM SPEED
or 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED. Check for and
correct:
• parameter settings for 2001 and 2002
• adequacy of motor braking torque
• applicability of torque control
• brake chopper and resistor.
26 DRIVE ID Internal fault. Configuration block drive ID is
not valid.
27 CONFIG FILE Internal configuration file has an error.
Contact your local ABB representative.
28 SERIAL 1 ERR Fieldbus communication has timed out.
• fault setup (3018 COMM FAULT FUNC and
3019 COMM FAULT TIME)
• communication settings (Group 51: EXT
COMM MODULE or Group 53: EFB
PROTOCOL as appropriate)
• poor connections and/or noise on line.
29 EFB CON FILE Error in reading the configuration file for the
fieldbus adapter.
30 FORCE TRIP Fault trip forced by the fieldbus. See the
fieldbus user’s manual.


31 EFB 1 Fault code reserved for the EFB protocol
application. The meaning is protocol
dependent.
dependent.
dependent.
34 MOTOR PHASE Fault in the motor circuit. One of the motor
phases is lost. Check for and correct:
• motor fault
• motor cable fault
• thermal relay fault (if used)
• internal fault.
35 OUTP WIRING Error in power wiring suspected. Check for
and correct:
• input power wired to drive output
• ground faults.
36 INCOMPATIBLE Loaded software is not compatible with the
SW current drive type. Contact your local ABB
representative.
37 CB OVERTEMP Drive control board is overheated. The fault
trip limit is 88ºC. Check for and correct:
• fan failure
• obstructions in the air flow.
101 SYSTEM ERROR Error internal to the drive. Contact your local
ABB representative and report the error
102 SYSTEM ERROR
number.
103 SYSTEM ERROR
104 SYSTEM ERROR
105 SYSTEM ERROR


201 SYSTEM ERROR Error in the system. Contact your local ABB
representative and report the error number.
202 SYSTEM ERROR
203 SYSTEM ERROR
204 SYSTEM ERROR
205 SYSTEM ERROR
206 SYSTEM ERROR
207 SYSTEM ERROR
1000 PAR HZRPM Parameter values are inconsistent. Check

for any of the following:
• 2001 MINIMUM SPEED > 2002 MAXIMUM
SPEED
• 2007 MINIMUM FREQ > 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ
• 2001 MINIMUM SPEED / 9908 MOTOR NOM
SPEED is outside the range -128…128
• 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED / 9908 MOTOR NOM
SPEED is outside the range -128…128
• 2007 MINIMUM FREQ / 9907 MOTOR NOM
FREQ is outside the range -128…128
• 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ / 9907 MOTOR NOM
FREQ is outside the range -128…128.
1001 PAR PFA REF NEG Parameter values are inconsistent. Check
for the following:
• 2007 MINIMUM FREQ is negative, when
8123 PFA ENABLE is active.
1003 PAR AI SCALE Parameter values are inconsistent. Check
• 1301 MINIMUM AI1 > 1302 MAXIMUM AI1
• 1304 MINIMUM AI2 > 1305 MAXIMUM AI2.
1004 PAR AO SCALE Parameter values are inconsistent. Check
• 1504 MINIMUM AO1 > 1505 MAXIMUM AO1
• 1510 MINIMUM AO2 > 1511 MAXIMUM AO2.


1005 PAR PCU 2 Parameter values for power control are
inconsistent: Improper motor nominal kVA or
motor nominal power. Check for the
following:
• 1.1 < (9906 MOTOR NOM CURR * 9905
MOTOR NOM VOLT * 1.73 / PN) < 2.6,
where: PN = 1000 * 9909 MOTOR NOM
POWER (if units are kW)
or PN = 746 * 9909 MOTOR NOM POWER (if
units are HP, e.g. in US).
1006 PAR EXT RO Parameter values are inconsistent. Check
for the following:
• extension relay module not connected
and
• 1410…1412 RELAY OUTPUTS 4…6 have
non-zero values.
1007 PAR FBUS Parameter values are inconsistent. Check
for and correct the following:
• A parameter is set for fieldbus control
(e.g. 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS = 10 (COMM)),
but 9802 COMM PROT SEL = 0.
1008 PAR PFA MODE Parameter values are inconsistent –
9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE must be =
3 (SCALAR: FREQ) when 8123 PFA ENABLE is
activated.
1009 PAR PCU 1 Parameter values for power control are
inconsistent: Improper motor nominal
frequency or speed. Check for both of the
following:
• 1 < (60 * 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ / 9908
MOTOR NOM SPEED) < 16
• 0.8 < 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED /
(120 * 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ / Motor
poles) < 0.992.
1010 PAR PFA & Override mode is enabled and PFA is
OVERRIDE activated at the same time. This cannot be
done because PFA interlocks cannot be
observed in the override mode.


1011 PAR OVERRIDE Parameter values are inconsistent. All
override mode parameters do not have
correct values when override mode is
enabled (parameter 1705 OVERRIDE ENABLE).
Check for any of the following:
• parameter 1701 OVERRIDE SEL, override
activation signal
• parameter 1702 OVERRIDE FREQ and 1703
OVERRIDE SPEED both zero.
1012 PAR PFA IO 1 IO configuration is not complete – not

enough relays are parameterized for PFA.
Or, a conflict exists between group 14,
parameter 8117 NR OF AUX MOT and
parameter 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV.
1013 PAR PFA IO 2 IO configuration is not complete – the actual
number of PFA motors (parameter 8127
MOTORS) does not match the PFA motors in
group 14 and parameter 8118 AUTOCHNG
INTERV.
1014 PAR PFA IO 3 IO configuration is not complete – the drive

is unable to allocate a digital input (interlock)
for each PFA motor (parameters 8120
INTERLOCKS and 8127 MOTORS).

Fault resetting
The ACH550 can be configured to automatically reset certain
faults. Refer to parameter Group 31: AUTOMATIC RESET.
WARNING! If an external source, e.g. AUTO key, is selected for

start command and it is active, the ACH550 may start
immediately after fault reset.
Flashing red LED

To reset the drive for faults indicated by a flashing red LED:
• Turn off the power for 5 minutes.
Red LED
To reset the drive for faults indicated by a red LED (on, not
flashing), correct the problem and do one of the following:
• From the control panel: press RESET.
• Turn the power off for 5 minutes.
Depending on the value of 1604, FAULT RESET SELECT, the
following could also be used to reset the drive:
• digital input
• serial communication.
When the fault has been corrected, the motor can be started.

History
For reference, the last three fault codes are stored into
parameters 0401, 0412 and 0413. For the most recent fault
(identified by parameter 0401), the drive stores additional data
(in parameters 0402…0411) to aid in troubleshooting a problem.
For example, parameter 0404 stores the motor speed at the time
of the fault.
To clear the fault history (all of Group 04: FAULT HISTORY
parameters), follow these steps:
1. In the control panel, Parameters mode, select parameter
0401.
2. Press EDIT.
3. Press the UP and DOWN keys simultaneously.
4. Press SAVE.
Correcting alarms
The recommended corrective action for alarms is:
• Determine if the alarm requires any corrective action (action
is not always required).
• Use Alarm listing below to find and address the root cause of
the problem.
Alarm listing
The following table lists the alarms by code number and
describes each.
Alarm
Display Description
code
2001 OVERCURRENT The current limiting controller is active. Check for
and correct:
• excessive motor load
• insufficient acceleration time (parameters 2202
ACCELER TIME 1 and 2205 ACCELER TIME 2)
• faulty motor, motor cables or connections.
2002 OVERVOLTAGE The overvoltage controller is active. Check for and
correct:
• static or transient overvoltages in the input
power supply
• insufficient deceleration time (parameters 2203
DECELER TIME 1 and 2206 DECELER TIME 2).

Alarm
Display Description
code
2003 UNDERVOLTAGE The undervoltage controller is active. Check for
and correct:
• undervoltage on mains.
2004 DIR LOCK The change in direction being attempted is not
allowed. Either:
• do not attempt to change the direction of motor
rotation, or
• change parameter 1003 DIRECTION to allow
direction change (if reverse operation is safe).
2005 IO COMM Fieldbus communication has timed out. Check for
and correct:
• fault setup (3018 COMM FAULT FUNC and 3019
COMM FAULT TIME)
• communication settings (Group 51: EXT COMM
MODULE or Group 53: EFB PROTOCOL as
appropriate)
• poor connections and/or noise on line.
2006 AI1 LOSS Analog input 1 is lost, or value is less than the
minimum setting. Check:
• input source and connections
• parameter that sets the minimum (3021)
• parameter that sets the Alarm/Fault operation
(3001).
2007 AI2 LOSS Analog input 2 is lost, or value is less than the
minimum setting. Check:
• input source and connections
• parameter that sets the minimum (3022)
• parameter that sets the Alarm/Fault operation
(3001).

Alarm
Display Description
code
2008 PANEL LOSS Panel communication is lost and either:
• the drive is in local control mode (the control
panel displays HAND), or
• the drive is in remote control mode (AUTO) and
parameterized to accept start/stop, direction or
reference from the control panel.
To correct check:
• communication lines and connections
• parameter 3002 PANEL COMM ERR
• parameters in Group 10: START/STOP/DIR and
Group 11: REFERENCE SELECT (if drive
operation is AUTO).
2009 DEVICE Drive heatsink is hot. This alarm warns that a
OVERTEMP DEVICE OVERTEMP fault may be near.
R1…R4: 100°C (212°F)
R5/R6: 110°C (230°F)
• fan failure
• obstructions in the air flow
• dirt or dust coating on the heat sink
• excessive motor load.
2010 MOTOR TEMP Motor is hot, based on either the drive’s estimate or
on temperature feedback. This alarm warns that a
Motor Overload fault trip may be near.
• Check for overloaded motor.
• Adjust the parameters used for the estimate
(3005…3009).
• Check the temperature sensors and Group 35:
MOTOR TEMP MEAS parameters.
2011 UNDERLOAD Motor load is lower than expected. This alarm
warns that a Motor Underload fault trip may be
near. Check:
• motor and drive ratings match (motor is NOT
undersized for the drive)
• settings on parameters 3013 to 3015.
2012 MOTOR STALL Motor is operating in the stall region. This alarm
warns that a Motor Stall fault trip may be near.

Alarm
Display Description
code
2013 AUTORESET This alarm warns that the drive is about to perform
(note 1) an automatic fault reset, which may start the motor.
• To control automatic reset, use parameter
Group 31: AUTOMATIC RESET.
2014 AUTOCHANGE This alarm warns that the PFA autochange function
(note 1) is active.
• To control PFA, use parameter Group 81: PFA
CONTROL and see also application the Pump
alternation macro.
2015 PFA I LOCK This alarm warns that the PFA interlocks are
active, which means that the drive cannot start:
• any motor (when Autochange is used),
• the speed regulated motor (when Autochange is
not used).
2017 OFF BUTTON This alarm warns that the OFF key has been
See pressed on the control panel when the local control
Note 1 lock is active.
• Disable the local control mode with parameter
1606 LOCAL LOCK and retry.
2018 PID SLEEP This alarm warns that the PID sleep function is
See active, which means that the motor could
Note 1 accelerate when the PID sleep function ends.
• To control PID sleep, use parameters
4022…4026 or 4122…4126.
2019 ID RUN Performing ID run.
2020 OVERRIDE Override mode activated.
2021 START ENABLE This alarm warns that the Start enable 1 signal is
1 MISSING missing.
• To control Start enable 1 function, use
parameter 1608.
To correct, check:
• digital input configuration
• communication settings.

Alarm
Display Description
code
2022 START ENABLE This alarm warns that the Start enable 2 signal is
2 MISSING missing.
• To control Start enable 2 function, use
parameter 1609.
To correct, check:
• digital input configuration
• communication settings.
2023 EMERGENCY Emergency stop activated.
STOP
2025 FIRST START Signals that the drive is performing a First Start
evaluation of motor characteristics. This is normal
the first time the motor is run after motor
parameters are entered or changed. See
parameter 9910 MOTOR ID RUN for a description of
motor models.
2026 INPUT PHASE The intermediate DC circuit DC voltage is
LOSS oscillating due to missing input power line phase or
blown fuse. The alarm is generated when the DC
voltage ripple exceeds 14% of the nominal DC
voltage.
• Check input power line fuses
• Check for input power supply imbalance.
Note 1. Even when the relay output is configured to indicate alarm conditions
(e.g. parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 = 5 (ALARM) or 16 (FLT/ALARM), this alarm
is not indicated by a relay output.

Maintenance intervals
WARNING! Read the safety instructions in on page 8 before

performing any maintenance on the equipment. Ignoring the
safety instructions can cause injury or death.
If installed in an appropriate environment, the drive requires very

little maintenance. The table lists the routine maintenance
intervals recommended by ABB.
Maintenance Interval Instruction

Heatsink Depends on the See Heatsink on
temperature check dustiness of the page 365.
and cleaning environment
(6…12 months)
Main cooling fan Every six years See Main fan
replacement replacement on
page 365.
Internal enclosure Every three years See Internal
cooling fan enclosure fan
replacement (IP54 replacement on
units) page 368.
Capacitor Every year when See Reforming on
reforming stored page 369.
Capacitor Every nine to See Replacement
replacement (frame twelve years, on page 369.
sizes R5 and R6) depending on the
ambient
temperature and
duty cycle
HVAC control panel Every ten years See Control panel
battery change. on page 370.

Heatsink
The heatsink fins accumulate dust from the cooling air. Since a
dusty sink is less efficient at cooling the drive, overtemperature
faults become more likely. In a “normal” environment (not dusty,
not clean), check the heatsink annually. In a dusty environment,
check more often.
Check the heatsink as follows (when necessary):
1. Remove power from the drive.
2. Remove the cooling fan (see Main fan replacement on page
365.
3. Blow clean compressed air (not humid) from bottom to top
and simultaneously use a vacuum cleaner at the air outlet to
trap the dust.
Note: If there a risk of the dust entering adjoining equipment,

perform the cleaning in another room.
4. Replace the cooling fan.

5. Restore power.
Main fan replacement

The drive’s main cooling fan has a life span of about 60,000
operating hours at maximum rated operating temperature and
drive load. The expected life span doubles for each 10ºC (18ºF)
drop in the fan temperature (fan temperature is a function of
ambient temperatures and drive loads).
Fan failure can be predicted by the increasing noise from fan
bearings and the gradual rise in the heatsink temperature in
spite of heatsink cleaning. If the drive is operated in a critical part
of a process, fan replacement is recommended once these
symptoms start appearing. Replacement fans are available from
ABB. Do not use other than ABB specified spare parts.

Main fan replacement (frame sizes R1…R4)

To replace the fan:
1. Remove power from the drive.
2. Remove the drive cover.
3. For frame sizes:
• R1 and R2: Press together the retaining clips on the fan
cover and lift.
• R3 and R4: Press in on the lever located on the left side
of the fan mount and rotate the fan up and out.
4. Disconnect the fan cable.
5. Install the fan in reverse order.
6. Restore power.
3
4
X0021

Main fan replacement (frame sizes R5 and R6)

To replace the fan:
1. Remove power Bottom view (R5)
from the drive.
2. Remove the
screws attaching 3
the fan.
2
3. Disconnect the
fan cable.
4. Install the fan in
reverse order.
X0023
5. Restore power.
Bottom view (R6) 3
X0022

Internal enclosure fan replacement

IP54 / UL Type 12 enclosures have an additional internal fan to
circulate air inside the enclosure.
Frame sizes R1…R4

To replace the internal enclosure fan in frame sizes R1…R4:
1. Remove power from the
4
drive.
2. Remove the front cover. 3
3. The housing that holds the 5
fan in place has barbed
retaining clips at each
corner. Press all four clips
toward the center to release
the barbs.
4. When the clips/barbs are
free, pull the housing up to
remove from the drive.
5. Disconnect the fan cable.
FM
6. Install the fan in reverse
order, noting that:
• the fan air flow is up (refer to the arrow on the fan)
• the fan wire harness is toward the front
• the notched housing barb is located in the right-rear
corner
• the fan cable connects just forward of the fan at the top
of the drive.
Frame sizes R5 and R6

To replace the internal enclosure fan in frame sizes R5 or R6:
• Remove power from the drive.
• Remove the front cover.
• Lift the fan out and disconnect the cable.
• Install the fan in reverse order.
• Restore power.

Capacitors
Reforming
The drive DC link capacitors need to be reformed (re-aged) if the
drive has been non-operational for more than one year. Without
reforming capacitors may be damaged when the drive starts to
operate. It is therefore recommended to reform the capacitors
once a year. See page 16 for how to check the date of
manufacture from the serial number shown on the drive labels.
For information on reforming the capacitors, refer to Guide for
Capacitor Reforming in ACS50/150/350/550 [3AFE68735190
(English)], available on the Internet (go to http://www.abb.com
and enter the code in the Search field).
Replacement
The drive intermediate circuit employs several electrolytic
capacitors. Capacitor life can be prolonged by lowering the
ambient temperature.
It is not possible to predict a capacitor failure. Capacitor failure is
usually followed by an input power fuse failure or a fault trip.
Contact ABB if capacitor failure is suspected. Replacements for
frame sizes R5 and R6 are available from ABB. Do not use other
than ABB specified spare parts.

Control panel
Cleaning
Use a soft damp cloth to clean the control panel. Avoid harsh
cleaners which could scratch the display window.
Battery
The battery keeps the clock operating in memory during power
interruptions.
The expected life for the battery is greater than ten years. To
remove the battery, use a coin to rotate the battery holder on the
back of the control panel. Replace the battery with type CR2032.

Technical data

This chapter contains the following information:
• ratings
• input power cable and fuses
• cable terminals
• input power (mains) connection
• motor connection
• control connections
• hardware description
• efficiency
• cooling
• dimensions and weights
• ambient conditions
• materials
• applicable standards
• provisions for fulfilling the requirements for CE and UL marks
• warranty
• product protection in the USA
• contact information.
Ratings
By type code, the tables below provide ratings for the ACH550
adjustable speed AC drive, including:
• IEC ratings
• NEMA ratings
• frame size
Abbreviated column headers are described in section Symbols
on page 376.
Technical data 371

Ratings, 380…480 volt drives

IEC ratings
Type code Valid up to 40°C Frame

size
I2N PN Max. current
ACH550-01- IMAX
A kW
02A4-4 2.4 0.75 3.1 R1
03A3-4 3.3 1.1 4.3 R1
04A1-4 4.1 1.5 5.9 R1
05A4-4 5.4 2.2 7.4 R1
06A9-4 6.9 3.0 9.7 R1
08A8-4 8.8 4.0 12.4 R1
012A-4 11.9 5.5 15.8 R1
015A-4 15.4 7.5 21.4 R2
023A-4 23 11 27.7 R2
031A-4 31 15 41 R3
038A-4 38 19 56 R3
044A-4 44 22 68 R4
059A-4 59 30 79 R4
072A-4 72 37 106 R4
096A-4 96 45 139 R5
124A-4 124 55 173 R6
157A-4 157 75 223 R6
180A-4 180 90 281 R6
195A-A 195 110 292 R6
00467918.xls A.7
IMAX: Maximum output current allowed for 2 seconds every minute
372 Technical data

NEMA ratings
Frame
Type code Valid up to 40°C
size
I2N PN Max. current IMAX
ACH550-UH-
A HP A
02A4-4 2.4 1.0 3.1 R1
03A3-4 3.3 1.5 4.3 R1
04A1-4 4.1 2.0 5.9 R1
06A9-4 6.9 3.0 9.7 R1
08A8-4 8.8 5.0 12.4 R1
012A-4 11.9 7.5 15.8 R1
015A-4 15.4 10.0 21.4 R2
023A-4 23 15 27.7 R2
031A-4 31 20 41 R3
038A-4 38 25 56 R3
044A-4 44 30 68 R4
059A-4 59 40 79 R4
072A-4 72 50 106 R4
077A-4 77 60 117 R5
096A-4 96 75 139 R5
124A-4 124 100 173 R6
157A-4 157 125 223 R6
180A-4 180 150 281 R6
00467918.xls A.7
Technical data 373

Ratings, 208…240 volt drives

IEC ratings
Frame
size
ACH550-01-
A kW A
04A6-2 4.6 0.75 6.3 R1
06A6-2 6.6 1.1 8.3 R1
07A5-2 7.5 1.5 11.9 R1
012A-2 11.8 2.2 13.5 R1
017A-2 16.7 4.0 21.2 R1
024A-2 24.2 5.5 30.1 R2
031A-2 30.8 7.5 43.6 R2
046A-2 46.2 11.0 55 R3
059A-2 59.4 15.0 83 R3
075A-2 74.8 18.5 107 R4
088A-2 88.0 22.0 135 R4
114A-2 114 30.0 158 R4
143A-2 143 37.0 205 R6
178A-2 178 45.0 270 R6
221A-2 221 55.0 320 R6
248A-2 248 75.0 346 R6
00467918.xls A.7
374 Technical data

NEMA ratings
Frame
size
ACH550-UH-
A HP A
04A6-2 4.6 1.0 6.3 R1
06A6-2 6.6 1.5 8.3 R1
07A5-2 7.5 2.0 11.9 R1
012A-2 11.8 3.0 13.5 R1
017A-2 16.7 5.0 21.2 R1
024A-2 24.2 7.5 30.1 R2
031A-2 30.8 10.0 43.6 R2
046A-2 46.2 15.0 55 R3
059A-2 59.4 20.0 83 R3
075A-2 74.8 25.0 107 R4
088A-2 88.0 30.0 135 R4
114A-2 114 40.0 158 R4
143A-2 143 50.0 205 R6
178A-2 178 60.0 270 R6
221A-2 221 75.0 320 R6
248A-2 248 100 346 R6
00467918.xls A.7
Technical data 375

Symbols
Typical ratings:
Nominal rating (10% overload capability)
I2N continuous rms current. 10% overload is allowed for one
minute every ten minutes through the whole speed
range.
PN typical motor power. The kilowatt power ratings apply to
most IEC, 4-pole motors. The horsepower ratings apply
to most 4-pole NEMA motors.
1,1x IN
IN
1 minute 9 minutes 1 minute
Sizing
The current ratings are the same regardless of the supply
voltage within one voltage range. To achieve the rated motor
power given in the table, the rated current of the drive must be
higher than or equal to the rated motor current.
Note 1: The ratings apply in ambient temperatures up to 40°C

(104°F).
376 Technical data

Derating
The load capacity (current and power) decreases if the
installation site altitude exceeds 1000 m (3300 ft), or if the
ambient temperature exceeds 40°C (104°F), or if 8 or 12 kHz
switching frequency (parameter 2606) is used.
Temperature derating
In the temperature range +40°C…50°C (+104°F…122°F), the
rated output current is decreased by 1% for every 1°C (1.8°F)
above 40°C (+104°F). The output current is calculated by
multiplying the current given in the rating table by the derating
factor.
Example: If the ambient temperature is 50°C (+122°F), the
derating factor is 100% - 1%/°C = 90% or 0.90.
The output current is then 0.90*I2N.
Altitude derating
In altitudes from 1000…4000 m (3300…13,200 ft) above sea
level, the derating is 1% for every 100 m (330 ft). If the
installation site is higher than 2000 m (6600 ft) above sea level,
please contact your local ABB distributor or office for further
information.
Single phase supply derating
For 208…240 volt series drives, a single phase supply can be
used. In that case, the derating is 50%.
Switching frequency derating
If the 8 kHz switching frequency (parameter 2606) is used,
derate PN and I2N to 80%.
If the 12 kHz switching frequency (parameter 2606) is used,
derate PN and I2N to 65%.
Technical data 377

Input power (mains) cable and fuses

A four conductor cable (three phases and ground/protective
earth) is recommended for the input power cabling. Shielding is
not necessary. Dimension the cables and fuses in accordance
with the input current. Always pay attention to local codes when
sizing the cables and fuses.
The input power connectors are at the bottom of the drive. Input
power cable routing must be done so that the distance from the
sides of the drive is at least 20 cm (8 in) to avoid excessive
radiation to the input power cable. In the case of shielded cable,
twist the cable screen wires together into a bundle not longer
than five times its width and connect to the PE terminal of the
drive (or PE terminal of input filter, if present).
Line current harmonics
The ACH550 fulfils IEC/EN 6100-3-12 limits for harmonic
currents.The harmonic levels under rated load conditions are
available on request.
378 Technical data

Fuses
Branch circuit protection must be provided by the end-user,
sized in accordance with the NEC and local codes.
Recommendations for fuses for short-circuit protection on the
mains cable are below.
Fuses, 380…480 volt drives
Input Mains fuses

ACH550-
current IEC269 gG UL class T Bussmann
01/UH-
A A A type1
02A4-4 2.4 10 10 JJS-10
03A3-4 3.3
04A1-4 4.1
05A4-4 5.4
06A9-4 6.9
08A8-4 8.8 15 JJS-15
012A-4 11.9 16
015A-4 15.4 20 JJS-20
023A-4 23 25 30 JJS-30
031A-4 31 35 40 JJS-40
038A-4 38 50 50 JJS-50
044A-4 44 60 JJS-60
059A-4 59 63 80 JJS-80
072A-4 72 80 90 JJS-90
077A-4 77 100 JJS-100
096A-4 96 125 125 JJS-125
124A-4 124 160 175 JJS-175
157A-4 157 200 200 JJS-200
180A-4 180 250 250 JJS-250
195A-4 195
00467918.xls A.7
1
Example
Technical data 379

Fuses, 208…240 volt drives
Input Mains fuses

ACH550-
current IEC269 gG UL class T Bussmann
01/UH-
A A A type1
04A6-2 4.6 10 10 JJS-10
06A6-2 6.6
07A5-2 7.5
012A-2 11.8 16 15 JJS-15
017A-2 16.7 25 25 JJS-25
024A-2 24.2 30 JJS-30
031A-2 30.8 40 40 JJS-40
046A-2 46.2 63 60 JJS-60
059A-2 59.4 80 JJS-80
075A-2 74.8 80 100 JJS-100
088A-2 88.0 100 110 JJS-110
114A-2 114 125 150 JJS-150
143A-2 143 200 200 JJS-200
178A-2 178 250 250 JJS-250
221A-2 221 315 300 JJS-300
248A-2 248 350 JJS-350
00467918.xls A.7
1
Example
Note: The use of ultra rapid fuses is recommended, but normal

HRC fuses, ABB Tmax moulded case circuit breakers (MCCB)
or ABB S200 B/C miniature circuit breakers (MCB) are sufficient.
Contact your local ABB representative for more information.
380 Technical data

Input power (mains) cable

The following table gives copper and aluminum cable types for
different load currents. These recommendations apply only for
the conditions listed at the top of the table.
Dimension the cables according to local safety regulations,
appropriate input voltage and the load current of the drive. In
any case, the cable must be less than the maximum limit defined
by the terminal size (see section Cable terminals on page 383).
IEC NEC
Based on: Based on:
• EN 60204-1 and IEC 60364-5-2/2001 • NEC Table 310-16 for copper
• PVC insulation wires
• 30°C (86°F) ambient temperature • 90°C (194°F) wire insulation
• 70°C (158°F) surface temperature • 40°C (104°F) ambient
temperature
• cables with concentric copper shield
• not more than three current-
• not more than nine cables laid on cable carrying conductors in
ladder side by side. raceway or cable, or earth
(directly buried)
• copper cables with
concentric copper shield.
Max Cu Max Al cable Max load Cu wire size
load cable load current
current current
A mm2 A mm2 A AWG/kcmil
14 3x1.5 61 3x25 22.8 14
20 3x2.5 75 3x35 27.3 12
27 3x4 91 3x50 36.4 10
34 3x6 117 3x70 50.1 8
47 3x10 143 3x95 68.3 6
62 3x16 165 3x120 86.5 4
79 3x25 191 3x150 100 3
98 3x35 218 3x185 118 2
119 3x50 257 3x240 137 1
153 3x70 274 3x 155 1/0
(3x50)
Technical data 381

IEC NEC
Based on: Based on:
• EN 60204-1 and IEC 60364-5-2/2001 • NEC Table 310-16 for copper
• PVC insulation wires
• 30°C (86°F) ambient temperature • 90°C (194°F) wire insulation
• 70°C (158°F) surface temperature • 40°C (104°F) ambient
temperature
• cables with concentric copper shield
• not more than three current-
• not more than nine cables laid on cable carrying conductors in
ladder side by side. raceway or cable, or earth
(directly buried)
• copper cables with
concentric copper shield.
Max Cu Max Al cable Max load Cu wire size
load cable load current
current current
A mm2 A mm2 A AWG/kcmil
186 3x95 285 2x 178 2/0
(3x95)
215 3x120 205 3/0
249 3x150 237 4/0
284 3x185 264 250 MCM or
2x1
291 300 MCM or
2 x 1/0
319 350 MCM or
2 x 2/0
Note 1: Mains cable sizing is based on a correction factor of 0.71

(maximum of 4 cables laid on a cable ladder side by side, ambient
temperature 30°C (86°F), EN 60204-1 and IEC 364-5-523). For other
conditions, dimension the cables according to local safety regulations,
appropriate input voltage and the load current of the drive. In any case, the
cable must be between the minimum limit defined in this table and the
maximum limit defined by the terminal size (see section Cable terminals on
page 383.)
382 Technical data

Cable terminals
Mains and motor cable maximum sizes (per phase) accepted at
the cable terminals, and the tightening torques are listed in the
following table.
Frame U1, V1, W1

size U2, V2, W2 Earthing PE Control
Maximum Torque Maximum Torque Maximum Torque

wire size wire size wire size1
mm2 AWG Nm lb-ft mm2 AWG Nm lb-ft mm2 AWG Nm lb-ft
R1 6 8 1.4 1.0 4 10 1.4 1.0
R2 10 6 1.4 1.0 10 8 1.4 1.0
1.5 16 0.4 0.3
R3 25 3 1.8 1.3 16 6 1.8 1.3
R4 50 1/0 2.0 1.5 35 2 2.0 1.5
R5 70 2/0 15 11.1 70 2/0 15 11.1
R6 185 350 40 29.5 95 4/0 8 5.9
MCM
1 Values given for solid wires.
00467918.xls A.7
For stranded wires, the maximum size is 1 mm2.
Input power (mains) connection
Input power (mains) connection specifications

Voltage (U1) 208/220/230/240 VAC 3-phase (or 1-phase)
+10%…15% for 230 VAC units
400/415/440/460/480 VAC 3-phase
+10%…15% for 400 VAC units
Prospective Maximum allowed prospective short-circuit
short-circuit current in the supply is 65 kA in a second
current providing that the mains cable of the drive is
(IEC 629) protected with appropriate fuses. US: 65,000
AIC
Frequency 48…63 Hz
Imbalance Max. ±3% of nominal phase-to-phase input
voltage
Fundamental 0.98 (at nominal load)
power factor
(cos phi1)
Technical data 383

Input power (mains) connection specifications

Cable 90°C (194°F) rating minimum
temperature
rating
Motor connection
Motor connection specifications

Voltage (U2) 0…U1, 3-phase symmetrical, Umax at the field
weakening point
Frequency 0…500 Hz
Frequency 0.01 Hz
resolution
Current See section Ratings on page 371.
Field 10…500 Hz
weakening
point
Switching Selectable: 1, 4, 8 or 12 kHz.
frequency Note: 12 kHz only for frame sizes R1…R4.
Cable 90°C (194°F) rating minimum
temperature
rating
Maximum See section Motor cable length below.
motor cable
length
384 Technical data

Motor cable length

The table below shows the maximum motor cable lengths for
400 V drives with different switching frequencies. Examples for
using the table are also given.
Maximum cable lengths (400 V)
EMC limits Operational limits
With
Second environment First environment du/dt
(category C31) (category C21) Basic unit filters
Frame 8/12
size 1 kHz 4 kHz 8 kHz 1 kHz 4 kHz 8 kHz 1/4 kHz kHz
R1 300 300 300 300 300 300 100 100 150
R2 300 300 300 300 100 30 200 100 250
R3 300 300 300 300 75 75 200 100 250
R4 300 300 300 300 75 75 200 100 300
R5 100 100 100 100 100 100 300 1502 300
R6 100 100 3 100 100 3 300 1502 300
1
See the new terms in section IEC/EN 61800-3 (2004) Definitions on page 413.
2
12 kHz switching frequency is not available.
3 Not tested.
Sine filters further extend the cable lengths.
Under heading “Operational limits”, the “Basic unit” columns

define the cable lengths with which the basic drive unit works
without problems within the drive specification, without installing
any further options. Column “With du/dt filters” defines the cable
lengths when an external du/dt filter is used.
The columns under heading “EMC limits” show the maximum
cable lengths with which the units have been tested for EMC
emissions. The factory guarantees that these cable lengths
meet the EMC standard requirements.
If external sine filters are installed, longer cable lengths can be
used. With sine filters the limiting factors are the voltage drop of
the cable, which has to be taken into account in engineering, as
well as the EMC limits (where applicable).
The default switching frequency is 4 kHz.
WARNING! Using a motor cable longer than specified in the

table above may cause permanent damage to the drive.
Technical data 385

Examples for using the table

Requirements Checking and conclusions
R1 frame size, Check operational limits for R1 and 8 kHz ->
8 kHz swf, for a 150 m cable a du/dt filter is needed.
Category C2,
150 m cable Check EMC limits -> EMC requirements for
Category C2 are met with a 150 m cable.
4 kHz swf, a 300 m cable cannot be used even with a
Category C3, du/dt filter. A sine filter must be used and the
300 m cable voltage drop of the cable must be taken into
account in the installation.
Check EMC limits -> EMC requirements for
Category C3 are met with a 300 m cable.
8 kHz swf, for a 150 m cable the basic unit is sufficient.
Category C3,
150 m cable Check EMC limits -> EMC requirements for
Category C3 cannot be met with a 300 m
cable. The installation configuration is not
possible. An EMC plan is recommended to
overcome the situation.
4 kHz swf, for a 150 m cable the basic unit is sufficient.
EMC limits not
applicable, EMC limits do not need to be checked as
150 m cable there are no EMC requirements.
386 Technical data

Control connections
Control connection specifications

Analog inputs See section Hardware description on page
and outputs 388.
Digital inputs See the footnote under the table in section
Hardware description on page 388.
Relays (digital • Max. contact voltage: 30 VDC, 250 VAC
outputs) • Max. contact current/power: 6 A, 30 VDC;
1500 VA, 250 AC
• Max. continuous current: 2 A rms (cos = 1),
1 A rms (cos = 0.4)
• Minimum current:10 mA, 12 VDC
• Contact material: Silver-nickel (AgN)
• Isolation between relay digital outputs, test
voltage: 2.5 kV ms, 1 minute.
Terminal See section Cable terminals on page 383.
sizes
Cable See section Control cables on page 33.
specifications
Technical data 387

Hardware description
X1 Hardware description
1 SCR Terminal for signal cable screen (connected internally to
chassis ground).
2 AI1 Analog input channel 1, programmable.
Default2 = frequency reference. Resolution 0.1%,
accuracy ±1%.
Two different DIP switch types can be used.
J1: AI1 OFF: 0…10 V (Ri = 312 kohm)
ON
ON
1
J1: AI1 ON: 0…20 mA (Ri = 100 ohm)
ON
ON
1
Analog I/O
3 AGND Analog input circuit common (connected internally to the

chassis ground through 1 Mohm).
4 +10 V 10 V/10 mA reference voltage output for analog input
potentiometer (1…10 kohm), accuracy ±2%.
5 AI2 Analog input channel 2, programmable. Default2 = not
used. Resolution 0.1%, accuracy ±1%.
Two different DIP switch types can be used.
J1: AI2 OFF: 0…10 V (Ri = 312 kohm)
ON
ON
2
J1: AI2 ON: 0…20 mA (Ri = 100 ohm)
ON
ON
6 AGND Analog input circuit common (connected internally to the

chassis ground through 1 Mohm).
7 AO1 Analog output, programmable. Default2 = frequency.
0…20 mA (load < 500 ohm)
8 AO2 Analog output, programmable. Default2 = current.
0…20 mA (load < 500 ohm)
9 AGND Analog output circuit common (connected internally to
the chassis ground through 1 Mohm).
388 Technical data

X1 Hardware description
10 +24V Auxiliary voltage output 24 VDC / 250 mA (reference to
GND). Short circuit protected.
11 GND Auxiliary voltage output common (connected internally as
floating).
12 DCOM Digital input common. To activate a digital input, there
must be ≥+10 V (or ≤-10 V) between the input and
Digital inputs1
DCOM. The 24 V may be provided by the ACH550

(X1:10) or by an external 12…24 V source of either
polarity.
13 DI1 Digital input 1, programmable. Default2 = start/stop.
14 DI2 Digital input 2, programmable. Default2 = not used.
15 DI3 Digital input 3, programmable. Default2 = constant
speed 1 (1202).
16 DI4 Digital input 4, programmable. Default2 = Start enable 1
(1608).
19 RO1C Relay output 1, programmable
Default2 = Ready
20 RO1A
Maximum: 250 VAC / 30 VDC, 2 A
21 RO1B Minimum: 500 mW (12 V, 10 mA)
Relay outputs

Default2 = Running
23 RO2A
Default2 = Fault (-1)
26 RO3A
1 Digital input impedance 1.5 kohm. Maximum voltage for digital
inputs is 30 V.
2
Default values depend on the macro used. Values specified are for
the default macro. See chapter Application macros and wiring.
Note: Terminals 3, 6, and 9 are at the same potential.
Note: For safety reasons the fault relay signals a “fault” when
the ACH550 is powered down.
Technical data 389

The terminals on the control board as well as on the optional

modules attachable to the board fulfil the Protective Extra Low
Voltage (PELV) requirements stated in EN 50178, provided that
the external circuits connected to the terminals also fulfil the
requirements and the installation site is below 2000 m (6562 ft).
Note: For safety reasons the fault relay signals a “fault” when
the ACH550 is powered down.
You can wire the digital input terminals in either a PNP or NPN
configuration.
PNP connection (source) NPN connection (sink)
X1 X1
10 +24V 10 +24V
11 GND 11 GND
12 DCOM 12 DCOM
13 DI1 13 DI1
14 DI2 14 DI2
15 DI3 15 DI3
16 DI4 16 DI4
17 DI5 17 DI5
18 DI6 18 DI6
390 Technical data

Communications
Terminals 28…32 are for RS485 modbus communications. Use
shielded cables.
X1 Identification Hardware description1
28 Screen RS485 Multidrop application
Other Modbus devices
29 B 28 SCR
SCR
30 A 29 B
B
A 30 A
31 AGND
GND 31 AGND
32 Screen 32 SCR
B
A
GND
SCR RS485 interface
J2 J5 J2 J5
ON ON
ON ON
off position on position
Bus termination
1
For functional descriptions, see chapters Application macros and
wiring and Parameter listing and descriptions.
Efficiency
Approximately 98% at nominal power level.
Cooling
Cooling specifications
Method Internal fan, flow direction from
bottom to top
Free space around the • 200 mm (8 in) above and
unit below the unit
• 0 mm (0 in) along each side
of the unit
Technical data 391

Air flow, 380…480 volt drives

The following table lists heat loss and air flow data for 380…480
volt drives at full load.
Drive Heat loss Air flow

ACH550-01/UH- Frame size W BTU/Hr m3/h ft3/min
02A4-4 R1 30 101 44 26
03A3-4 R1 40 137 44 26
04A1-4 R1 52 178 44 26
05A4-4 R1 73 249 44 26
06A9-4 R1 97 331 44 26
08A8-4 R1 127 434 44 26
012A-4 R1 172 587 44 26
015A-4 R2 232 792 88 52
023A-4 R2 337 1151 88 52
031A-4 R3 457 1561 134 79
038A-4 R3 562 1919 134 79
044A-4 R4 667 2278 280 165
059A-4 R4 907 3096 280 165
072A-4 R4 1120 3825 280 165
077A-4 R5 1295 4423 250 147
096A-4 R5 1440 4918 250 147
124A-4 R6 1940 6625 405 238
157A-4 R6 2310 7889 405 238
180A-4 R6 2810 9597 405 238
195A-4 R6 3050 10416 405 238
00467918.xls A.7
392 Technical data

Air flow, 208…240 volt drives

The following table lists heat loss and air flow data for 208…240
volt drives.
Drive Heat loss Air flow
ACH550-01/UH- Frame size W BTU/Hr m3/h ft3/min
04A6-2 R1 55 189 44 26
06A6-2 R1 73 249 44 26
07A5-2 R1 81 276 44 26
012A-2 R1 118 404 44 26
017A-2 R1 161 551 44 26
024A-2 R2 227 776 88 52
031A-2 R2 285 973 88 52
046A-2 R3 420 1434 134 79
059A-2 R3 536 1829 134 79
075A-2 R4 671 2290 280 165
088A-2 R4 786 2685 280 165
114A-2 R4 1014 3463 280 165
143A-2 R6 1268 4431 405 238
178A-2 R6 1575 5379 405 238
221A-2 R6 1952 6666 405 238
248A-2 R6 2189 7474 405 238
00467918.xls A.7
Dimensions and weights

The dimensions and mass for the ACH550 depend on the frame
size and enclosure type. If unsure of frame size, find first the
“Type” code on the drive labels. Then look up this type code in
section Ratings on page 371 to determine the frame size.
Pages 397…408 show the dimensional drawings of the different
frame sizes for each degree of protection. A complete set of
dimensional drawings for ACH550 drives can be found in the
HVAC Info Guide CD [3AFE68338743 (English)].
Technical data 393

Mounting dimensions
W1
W2
See detail A
H1
a
c
See detail B b d
Detail A Detail B X0032
IP54 / UL Type 12 and IP21 / UL Type 1 – Dimensions for each frame size
R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6
Ref.
mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in
W1* 98.0 3.9 98.0 3.9 160 6.3 160 6.3 238 9.4 263 10.4
W2* -- -- -- -- 98.0 3.9 98.0 3.9 -- -- -- --
H1* 318 12.5 418 16.4 473 18.6 578 22.8 588 23.2 675 26.6
a 5.5 0.2 5.5 0.2 6.5 0.25 6.5 0.25 6.5 0.25 9.0 0.35
b 10.0 0.4 10.0 0.4 13.0 0.5 13.0 0.5 14.0 0.55 14.0 0.55
c 5.5 0.2 5.5 0.2 8.0 0.3 8.0 0.3 8.5 0.3 8.5 0.3
d 5.5 0.2 5.5 0.2 6.5 0.25 6.5 025 6.5 0.25 9.0 0.35
* Center-to-center dimension
394 Technical data

Weights and mounting screws
Frame Frame Mounting Mounting

Frame weight weight screws screws
size kg lb. Metric Imperial
IP21/IP54 IP21/IP54 units units
R1 6.5 / 8 14 / 18 M5 #10
R2 9.0 / 11 20 / 24 M5 #10
R3 16 / 17 35 / 38 M5 #10
R4 24 / 26 53 / 57 M5 #10
R5 34 / 42 75 / 93 M6 1/4 in
R6 69 / 86 152 / 190 M8 5/16 in
Technical data 395

Control panel (operator keypad) dimensions and

mounting
The control panel overall dimensions are shown in the table
below.
mm in
Height 100 3.9
Width 70 2.8
Depth 20 0.8
Use the panel mounting option kit to mount the panel on a

cabinet door to maintain the IP54 degree of protection. The kit
includes a 3-meter extension cable, gasket, mounting template
and mounting screws. The figure below shows how to mount the
control panel with the gasket.
396 Technical data

Frame size R1 (IP54 / UL Type 12)
Technical data 397

398 Technical data

Technical data 399

400 Technical data

Technical data 401

402 Technical data

Technical data 403

404 Technical data

Technical data 405

406 Technical data

Technical data 407

408 Technical data

Ambient conditions
The following table lists the ACH550 environmental
requirements.
Ambient environment requirements
Installation site Storage and transportation in the

protective package
Altitude • 0…1000 m (0…3,300 ft)

• 1000…2000 m
(3,300…6,600 ft) if PN and
I2 derated 1% for every 100
m above 1000 m (300 ft
above 3,300 ft)
Ambient temperature • -15…40°C (5…104°F) -40…70°C (-40…158°F)

• Max. 50°C (122°F) if PN
and I2 derated to 90%
Relative humidity <95% (non-condensing)
Contamination levels • No conductive dust allowed Storage

(IEC 721-3-3) • The ACH550 should be • No conductive dust allowed
installed in clean air • chemical gases: Class 1C2
according to enclosure • solid particles: Class 1S2
classification. Transportation
• Cooling air must be clean, • No conductive dust allowed
free from corrosive • Chemical gases: 2C2
materials and free from • Solid particles: Class 2S2
electrically conductive dust.
• Chemical gases: Class 3C2
• Solid particles: Class 3S2
Sinusoidal vibration • Mechanical conditions: • In accordance with ISTA 1A

(IEC 60068-2-6) Class 3M4 (IEC60721-3-3) and 1B specifications.
• 2…9 Hz 3.0 mm (0.12 in)
• 9…200 Hz 10 m/s2 (33 ft/
s2 )
Shock (IEC 68-2-29) Not allowed Max.100 m/s2 (330 ft/s2), 11 ms
Free fall Not allowed • 76 cm (30 in), frame size R1

• 61 cm (24 in), frame size R2
Technical data 409

Materials
Material specifications
Drive • PC/ABS 2.5 mm, color NCS 1502-Y or NCS 7000-N
enclosure • Hot-dip zinc coated steel sheet 1.5…2 mm,
thickness of coating 20 micrometers. If the surface is
painted, the total thickness of the coating (zinc and
paint) is 80…100 micrometers.
• Cast aluminum AlSi
• Extruded aluminum AlSi
Package Corrugated board (drives and option modules),
expanded polystyrene. Plastic covering of the
package: PE-LD, bands PP or steel.
Disposal The drive contains raw materials that should be
recycled to preserve energy and natural
resources. The package materials are
environmentally compatible and recyclable. All
metal parts can be recycled. The plastic parts can
either be recycled or burned under controlled
circumstances, according to local regulations.
Most recyclable parts are marked with recycling
marks.
If recycling is not feasible, all parts excluding
electrolytic capacitors and printed circuit boards
can be landfilled. The DC capacitors contain
electrolyte and the printed circuit boards contain
lead, both of which will be classified as hazardous
waste within the EU. They must be removed and
handled according to local regulations.
For further information on environmental aspects
and more detailed recycling instructions, please
contact your local ABB distributor.
410 Technical data

Applicable standards
The drive complies with the following standards:
Applicable standards
EN 50178 (1997) Electronic requirement for use in power
installations.
IEC/EN 61800-5-1 Electrical, thermal and functional safety
(2003) requirements for adjustable frequency
a.c. power drives
IEC/EN 60204-1 Safety of machinery. Electrical
(1997) + equipment of machines. Part 1: General
Amendment A1 requirements. Provisions for compliance:
(1999) The final assembler of the machine is
responsible for installing:
• an emergency-stop device
• a supply disconnecting device.
IEC/EN 60529 Degrees of protection provided by
(1991) enclosures (IP code)
IEC 60664-1 Insulation coordination for equipment
(1992) within low-voltage systems. Part 1:
Principles, requirements and tests
IEC/EN 61800-3 Adjustable speed electrical power drive
(2004) systems. Part 3: EMC requirements and
specific test methods
IEC/EN 61000-3-12 EMC standard limiting harmonic currents
produced by equipment connected to
public low-voltage systems
UL 508C UL Standard for Safety, Power
Conversion Equipment, third edition
CE marking
A CE mark is attached to the drive to verify that the drive follows
the provisions of the European Low Voltage and EMC Directives
(Directive 73/23/EEC, as amended by 93/68/EEC, and Directive
89/336/EEC, as amended by 93/68/EEC).
Compliance with the EMC Directive

The EMC Directive defines the requirements for immunity and
emissions of electrical equipment used within the European
Technical data 411

Union. The EMC product standard [IEC/EN 61800-3 (2004)]

covers requirements stated for drives.
Compliance with IEC/EN 61800-3 (2004)

See page 413.
C-Tick marking
The ACH550 carries C-Tick marking.
C-Tick marking is required in Australia and New Zealand. A
C-Tick mark is attached to the drive to verify compliance with the
relevant standard (IEC 61800-3 (2004) – Adjustable speed
electrical power drive systems – Part 3: EMC product standard
including specific test methods), mandated by the Trans-Tasman
Electromagnetic Compatibility Scheme.
The Trans-Tasman Electromagnetic Compatibility Scheme
(EMCS) was introduced by the Australian Communication
Authority (ACA) and the Radio Spectrum Management Group
(RSM) of the New Zealand Ministry of Economic Development
(NZMED) in November 2001. The aim of the scheme is to
protect the radio frequency spectrum by introducing technical
limits for emission from electrical/electronic products.
Compliance with IEC/EN 61800-3 (2004)

See page 413.
UL marking
The ACH550 is suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering
not more than 65,000 RMS symmetrical amperes, 480 V
maximum. The ACH550 has an electronic motor protection
feature that complies with the requirements of UL 508C. When
this feature is selected and properly adjusted, additional
overload protection is not required unless more than one motor
is connected to the drive or unless additional protection is
required by applicable safety regulations. See parameters 3005
(MOT THERM PROT) and 3006 (MOT THERM RATE).
The drives are to be used in a controlled environment. See
section Ambient conditions on page 409 for specific limits.
Note: For open type enclosures, i.e. drives without the conduit
box and/or cover for IP21 / UL Type 1 drives, or without the
conduit plate and/or top cover for IP54 / UL Type 12 drives, the
412 Technical data

drive must be mounted inside an enclosure in accordance with

National Electric Code and local electrical codes.
IEC/EN 61800-3 (2004) Definitions

EMC stands for Electromagnetic Compatibility. It is the ability of
electrical/electronic equipment to operate without problems
within an electromagnetic environment. Likewise, the equipment
must not disturb or interfere with any other product or system
within its locality.
First environment includes establishments connected to a low-
voltage network which supplies buildings used for domestic
purposes.
Second environment includes establishments connected to a
network not directly supplying domestic premises.
Drive of category C2: drive of rated voltage less than 1000 V and
intended to be installed and commissioned only by a
professional when used in the first environment.
Note: A professional is a person or organisation having
necessary skills in installing and/or commissioning power drive
systems, including their EMC aspects.
Category C2 has the same EMC emission limits as the earlier
class first environment restricted distribution. EMC standard
IEC/EN 61800-3 does not any more restrict the distribution of
the drive, but the using, installation and commissioning are
defined.
Drive of category C3: drive of rated voltage less than 1000 V,
intended for use in the second environment and not intended for
use in the first environment.
Category C3 has the same EMC emission limits as the earlier
class second environment unrestricted distribution.
Compliance with the IEC/EN 61800-3 (2004)

The immunity performance of the drive complies with the
demands of IEC/EN 61800-3, category C2 (see page 413 for
IEC/EN 61800-3 definitions). The emission limits of IEC/
EN 61800-3 are complied with the provisions described below.
Technical data 413

First environment (drives of category C2)

1. The internal EMC filter is connected.
2. The motor and control cables are selected as specified in
this manual.
3. The drive is installed according to the instructions given in
this manual.
4. The motor cable length does not exceed the allowed
maximum length specified in section Motor cable length on
page 385 for the frame size and switching frequency in use.
WARNING! In a domestic environment, this product may cause
radio inference, in which case supplementary mitigation
measures may be required.
Second environment (drives of category C3)

1. The internal EMC filter is connected.
2. The motor and control cables are selected as specified in
this manual.
3. The drive is installed according to the instructions given in
this manual.
4. The motor cable length does not exceed the allowed
maximum length specified in section Motor cable length on
page 385 for the frame size and switching frequency in use.
WARNING! A drive of category C3 is not intended to be used on
a low-voltage public network which supplies domestic premises.
Radio frequency interference is expected if the drive is used on
such a network.
Note: It is not allowed to install a drive with the internal EMC

filter connected on IT (ungrounded) systems. The supply
network becomes connected to ground potential through the
EMC filter capacitors which may cause danger or damage the
drive.
Note: It is not allowed to install a drive with the internal EMC
filter connected to a corner grounded TN system as this would
damage the drive.
414 Technical data

Equipment warranty and liability

The manufacturer warrants the equipment supplied against
defects in design, materials and workmanship for a maximum
period of thirty (30) months from the date of manufacturing. The
local ABB office or distributor may grant a warranty period
different to the above and refer to local terms of liability as
defined in the supply contract.
The manufacturer is not responsible for
• any costs resulting from a failure if the installation,
commissioning, repair, alternation, or ambient conditions of the
drive do not fulfil the requirements specified in the
documentation delivered with the unit and other relevant
documentation.
• units subjected to misuse, negligence or accident
• units comprised of materials provided or designs stipulated by
the purchaser.
In no event shall the manufacturer, its suppliers or
subcontractors be liable for special, indirect, incidental or
consequential damages, losses or penalties.
This is the sole and exclusive warranty given by the
manufacturer with respect to the equipment and is in lieu of and
excludes all other warranties, express or implied, arising by
operation of law or otherwise, including, but not limited to, any
implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular
purpose.
If you have any questions concerning your ABB drive, please
contact the local distributor or ABB office. The technical data,
information and specifications are valid at the time of printing.
The manufacturer reserves the right to make modifications
without prior notice.
Technical data 415

Product protection in the USA

This product is protected by one or more of the following US
patents:
4,920,306 5,301,085 5,463,302 5,521,483 5,532,568
5,589,754 5,654,624 5,799,805 5,940,286 5,942,874
5,952,613 6,094,364 6,147,887 6,175,256 6,184,740
6,195,274 6,229,356 6,252,436 6,265,724 6,305,464
6,313,599 6,316,896 6,335,607 6,370,049 6,396,236
6,448,735 6,498,452 6,552,510 6,597,148 6,741,059
6,774,758 6,844,794 6,856,502 6,859,374 6,922,883
6,940,253 6,934,169 6,956,352 6,958,923 6,967,453
6,972,976 6,977,449 6,984,958 6,985,371 6,992,908
6,999,329 7,023,160 7,034,510 7,036,223 7,045,987
D503,931 D510,319 D510,320 D511,137 D511,150
D512,026 D512,696
Other patents pending.
416 Technical data

Contact information
Albania (Tirana) Canada (Montreal)
Tel: +355 4 234 368 Tel: +1 514 215 3006
Tel: +355 4 363 854 Fax: +1 514 332 0609
Fax: +355 4 363 854
Algeria Chile (Santiago)
Tel: +212 2224 6168 Tel: +56 2 471 4391
Fax: +212 2224 6171 Fax: +56 2 471 4399
Argentina (Valentin Alsina) China (Beijing)

Tel: +54 (0)114 229 5707 Tel: +86 10 5821 7788
Fax: +54 (0)114 229 5593 Fax: +86 10 5821 7618
Australia (Victoria - Notting Hill) Colombia (Bogotá)

Tel: +1800 222 435 Tel: +57 1 417 8000
Tel: +61 3 8544 0000 Fax: +57 1 413 4086
Fax: +61 3 8544 0004
Austria (Vienna) Costa Rica (San Jose)
Tel: +43 1 60109 0 Tel: +506 288 5484
Fax: +43 1 60109 8312 Fax: +506 288 5482
Azerbaijan (Baku) Croatia (Zagreb)

Tel: +994 12 498 54 75 Tel: +385 1 600 8550
Fax: +994 12 493 73 56 Fax: +385 1 619 5111
Bahrain (Manama) Czech Republic (Prague)

Tel: +973 725 377 Tel: +420 234 322 327
Fax: +973 725 332 Fax: +420 234 322 310
Bangladesh (Dhaka) Denmark (Skovlunde)

Tel: +88 02 8856468 Tel: +45 44 504 345
Fax: +88 02 8850906 Fax: +45 44 504 365
Belarus (Minsk) Dominican Republic (Santo Domingo)

Tel: +375 228 12 40 Tel: +809 561 9010
Tel: +375 228 12 42 Fax: +809 562 9011
Fax +375 228 12 43
Belgium (Zaventem) Ecuador (Quito)
Tel: +32 2 718 6313 Tel: +593 2 2500 645
Fax: +32 2 718 6664 Fax: +593 2 2500 650
Bolivia (La Paz) Egypt (Cairo)

Tel: +591 2 278 8181 Tel: +202 6251630
Fax: +591 2 278 8184 Fax: +202 6251638
Bosnia Herzegovina (Tuzla) El Salvador (San Salvador)

Tel: +387 35 246 020 Tel: +503 2264 5471
Fax: +387 35 255 098 Fax: +503 2264 2497
Brazil (Osasco) Estonia (Tallinn)

Tel: 0800 014 9111 Tel: +372 6801 800
Tel: +55 11 3688 9282 Fax: +372 6801 810
Fax: +55 11 3688 9421
Bulgaria (Sofia) Ethiopia (Addis Abeba)
Tel: +359 2 981 4533 Tel: +251 1 669506
Fax: +359 2 980 0846 Tel: +251 1 669507
Fax: +251 1 669511
Technical data 417

Finland (Helsinki) Kazakhstan (Almaty)
Tel: +358 10 22 11 Tel: +7 3272 583838
Tel: +358 10 222 1999 Fax: +7 3272 583839
Fax: +358 10 222 2913
France (Montluel) Kenya (Nairobi)
Tel: +33 (0)4 37 40 40 00 Tel: +254 20 828811/13 to 20
Fax: +33 (0)4 37 40 40 72 Fax: +254 20 828812/21
Germany (Ladenburg) Kuwait (Kuwait City)

Tel: +01805 222 580 Tel: +965 2428626 ext. 124
Tel: +49 (0)6203 717 717 Fax: +965 2403139
Fax: +49 (0)6203 717 600
Greece (Athens) Latvia (Riga)
Tel: +30 210 289 1 651 Tel: +371 7 063 600
Fax: +30 210 289 1 600 Fax: +371 7 063 601
Guatemala (Guatemala City) Lithuania (Vilnius)

Tel: +502 363 3814 Tel: +370 5 273 8300
Fax: +502 363 3624 Fax: +370 5 273 8333
Hungary (Budapest) Luxembourg (Leudelange)

Tel: +36 1 443 2224 Tel: +352 493 116
Fax: +36 1 443 2144 Fax: +352 492 859
India (Bangalore) Macedonia (Skopje)

Tel: +91 80 837 0416 Tel: +389 2 118 010
Fax: +91 80 839 9173 Fax: +389 2 118 774
Indonesia (Jakarta) Malaysia (Kuala Lumpur)

Tel: +62 21 590 9955 Tel: +603 5628 4888
Fax: +62 21 590 0115 Fax: +603 5635 8200
Fax: +62 21 590 0116
Iran (Tehran) Mauritius (Casablanca)
Tel: +98 21 2222 5120 Tel: +230 208 7644
Fax: +98 21 2222 5157 Tel: +230 211 8624
Fax: +230 211 4077
Ireland (Dublin) Mexico (Mexico City)
Tel: +353 1 405 7300 Tel: +52 (55) 5328 1400 ext. 3008
Fax: +353 1 405 7312 Fax: +52 (55) 5328 7467
Israel (Haifa) Morocco

Tel: +972 4 850 2111 Tel: +212 2224 6168
Fax: +972 4 850 2112 Fax: +212 2224 6171
Italy (Milan) The Netherlands (Rotterdam)

Tel: +39 02 2414 3085 Tel: +31 (0)10 407 8886
Fax: +39 02 2414 3979 Fax: +31 (0)10 407 8433
Ivory Coast (Abidjan) New Zealand (Auckland)

Tel: +225 21 35 42 65 Tel: +64 9 356 2170
Fax: +225 21 35 04 14 Fax: +64 9 357 0019
Japan (Tokyo) Nigeria (Ikeja, Lagos)

Tel: +81(0)3 5784 6010 Tel: +234 1 4937 347
Fax: +81(0)3 5784 6275 Fax: +234 1 4937 329
Jordan (Amman) Norway (Oslo)

Tel: +962 6 562 0181 Tel: +47 03500
Fax: +962 6 562 1369 Fax: +47 22 872 541
418 Technical data

Oman (Muscat) Slovenia (Ljubljana)
Tel: +968 2456 7410 Tel: +386 1 2445 440
Fax: +968 2456 7406 Fax: +386 1 2445 490
Pakistan (Lahore) South Africa (Johannesburg)

Tel: +92 42 6315 882-85 Tel: +27 11 617 2000
Fax: +92 42 6368 565 Fax: +27 11 908 2061
Panama (Panama City) South Korea (Seoul)

Tel: +507 209 5400 Tel: +82 2 528 2794
Tel: +507 209 5408 Fax: +82 2 528 2338
Fax: +507 209 5401
Peru (Lima) Spain (Barcelona)
Tel: +51 1 561 0404 Tel: +34 (9)3 728 8700
Fax: +51 1 561 3040 Fax: +34 (9)3 728 8743
The Philippines (Metro Manila) Sri Lanka (Colombo)

Tel: +63 2 821 7777 Tel: +94 11 2399304/6
Fax: +63 2 823 0309 Fax: +94 11 2399303
Fax: +63 2 824 4637
Poland (Lodz) Sweden (Västerås)
Tel: +48 42 299 3000 Tel: +46 (0)21 32 90 00
Fax: +48 42 299 3340 Fax: +46 (0)21 14 86 71
Portugal (Oeiras) Switzerland (Zürich)

Tel: +351 21 425 6000 Tel: +41 (0)58 586 0000
Fax: +351 21 425 6390 Fax: +41 (0)58 586 0603
Fax: +351 21 425 6354
Qatar (Doha) Syrian Arab Republic
Tel: +974 444 1789 Tel: +9626 5620181 ext. 502
Fax: +974 444 6189 Fax: +9626 5621369
Romania (Bucharest) Taiwan (Taipei)

Tel: +40 21 310 4377 Tel: +886 2 2577 6090
Fax: +40 21 310 4383 Fax: +886 2 2577 9467
Fax: +886 2 2577 9434
Russia (Moscow) Tanzania (Dar es Salaam)
Tel: +7 495 960 22 00 Tel: +255 51 2136750
Fax: +7 495 913 96 96 Tel: +255 51 2136751, 2136752
Fax: +7 495 913 96 95 Fax: +255 51 2136749
Saudi-Arabia (Al Khobar) Thailand (Bangkok)
Tel: +966 (0)3 882 9394 ext. 240, 254, 247 Tel: +66 (0)2665 1000
Fax: +966 (0)3 882 4603 Fax: +66 (0)2665 1042
Senegal (Dakar) Tunis (Tunis)

Tel: +221 832 1242 Tel: +216 71 860 366
Tel: +221 832 3466 Fax: +216 71 860 255
Fax: +221 832 2057, 832 1239
Serbia and Montenegro (Belgrade) Turkey (Istanbul)
Tel: +381 11 3094 320 Tel: +90 216 528 2200
Tel: +381 11 3094 300 Fax +90 216 365 2944
Fax: +381 11 3094 343
Singapore (Singapore) Uganda (Nakasero, Kampala)
Tel: +65 6776 5711 Tel: +256 41 348 800
Fax: +65 6778 0222 Fax: +256 41 348 799
Slovakia (Banska Bystrica) Ukraine (Kiev)

Tel: +421 48 410 2324 Tel: +380 44 495 22 11
Fax: +421 48 410 2325 Fax: +380 44 495 22 10
Technical data 419

The United Arab Emirates (Dhabi) Venezuela (Caracas)
Tel: +971 4 3147500 Tel: +58 212 203 1949
Tel: +971 4 3401777 Fax: +58 212 237 6270
Fax: +971 4 3401771, 3401539
United Kingdom (Daresbury, Warrington) Vietnam (Hochiminh)
Tel: +44 1925 741 111 Tel: +84 8 8237 972
Fax: +44 1925 741 693 Fax: +84 8 8237 970
Uruguay (Montevideo) Zimbabwe (Harare)

Tel: +598 2 707 7300 Tel: +263 4 369 070
Tel: +598 2 707 7466 Fax: +263 4 369 084
USA (New Berlin)

Tel: +1 800 752 0696
Tel: +1 262 785 3200
Fax: +1 262 785 0397
420 Technical data

Index
A
acceleration
/deceleration, parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
at aux. stop (PFA), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
compensation, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
ramp select, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
ramp shape, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
ramp time (PFA), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
ramp zero select, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
time, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
activate (external PID), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
actual input (PID), parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
actual max. (PID), parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
actual min. (PID), parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
actual signals, parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
ai loss
alarm codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
fault codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
air flow
208...240 volt drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
380...480 volt drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
alarm
codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
correcting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
words, data parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
ambient conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
analog I/O
connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
spec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
analog input
connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
fault limit, parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
filter, parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
less than min. auto. reset, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
less than min., fault parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
loss, alarm codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
loss, fault codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
maximum, parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
minimum, parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
ref. correction formula. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
analog output
connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
content max., parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141, 203
Index 421
content min., parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141, 203

current max., parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141, 203
current min., parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141, 203
data content, parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141, 202
data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
filter, parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142, 203
parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
application (macro) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
booster pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
condenser. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
cooling tower fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
dual setpoint PID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
dual setpoint PID with constant speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
e-bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
floating point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
hand control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
HVAC default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
internal timer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
internal timer with constant speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
powered roof ventilator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
pump alternation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
return fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
supply fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
application block output, data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
application macro, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
application macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
arrow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
assistant
see start-up assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
auto control
see AUTO mode
AUTO mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66, 67
autochange
alarm code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
interval, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
level, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
starting order counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
timed, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
automatic reset
see reset, automatic
autoreset, alarm code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
auxiliary motor
see motor, auxiliary
B
backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
battery
replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
422 Index
replacement interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364

baud rate (RS-232), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
BMS, Building Management System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
boost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
select, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
time, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
booster pump application macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
break point frequency, fault parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
buffer overruns (count), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
bus termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
C
cable terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
cable, control panel (operator keypad) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
cables
control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 49, 53
input power (mains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46, 50, 378, 381
motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29, 46, 50, 385
cabling instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
capacitors
maintenance intervals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
reforming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
category
C2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
C3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
CB
see control board
CE marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
changed parameters mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
clock set mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
comm
config file CPI firmware revision, parameter . . . . . . 135, 282
config file id revision, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135, 282
config file revision, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135, 282
fault codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
fault function, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144, 242
fault time, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144, 242
fieldbus CPI firmware revision, parameter . . . . . . . 136, 283
fieldbus module’s appl. program rev., parameter . . 136, 283
fieldbus parameter refresh, parameter . . . . . . . . . . 135, 282
fieldbus parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135, 282
fieldbus status, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136, 283
fieldbus type, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135, 282
profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148, 160
protocol select, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134, 312
relay output word, data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Index 423
values, data parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

compatibility
manual
with control panel (operator keypad) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
with drive firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
condenser application macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
config file
CPI firmware revision, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135, 282
fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
id revision, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135, 282
revision, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135, 282
connections
communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
analog I/O. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
digital inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
relay outputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
input power (mains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
constant speed
see speed, constant
contact information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
control
connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66, 67
location, data parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
control board
overtemperature, fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
overtemperature, fault parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
temperature, data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
control panel (operator keypad) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
comm error, fault parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
display decimal point (format), parameters . . . . . . . . . . 251
display max., parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
display min., parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
display process variables, parameter group . . . . . . . . . . 249
display selection, parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
display units, parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
mounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
parameter lock, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
pass code, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
reference control, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
signal max., parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
signal min., parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
control word, serial communication
bit definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
424 Index
cooling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
fan maintenance trigger, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
fan run time (counter), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
fan run time trigger, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
cooling tower fan application macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
corner grounded TN system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
correction source (PID), parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
counter
cooling fan run time, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
drive power consumption, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
drive run time, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
motor revolutions, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
CRC errors (count), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
critical speeds (avoiding)
high, parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
low, parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
C-Tick marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
current
at fault, history parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
max. limit, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
measurement, fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
D
DC
brake time, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
bus voltage, data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
current braking selection, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
current ref., parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
magnetizing time, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
overvoltage, fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
undervoltage, fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
deceleration
at aux. start (PFA), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
emergency time, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
ramp select, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
ramp shape, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
ramp time (PFA), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
ramp zero select, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
time, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
default factory settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
degree of protection (IP code). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
derating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
derivation time (PID), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
derivation time, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
device overtemperature
Index 425
alarm code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361

fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
displays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
digital input
at fault, history parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
status, data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
dimensional drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
frame size R1 (IP21 / UL Type 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
frame size R1 (IP54 / UL Type 12) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
control panel (operator keypad) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
mounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
direction
control, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137, 183
lock, alarm code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
display
alarms, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
see also panel display
downloading parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
drive
id, fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
maintenance trigger, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
on time, data parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
operating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
parameter backup mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
power consumption (counter), parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . 235
power consumption trigger, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
rating, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
run time (counter), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
run time trigger, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
status information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
dual setpoint PID application macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
dual setpoint PID with constant speeds appl. macro . . . . . . 110
426 Index
E
earth fault
fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
e-bypass application macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
EFB (embedded fieldbus) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
baud rate, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
config file, fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
control profile, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
CRC errors (count), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
fault codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
OK messages (count), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287, 288
parity, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
protocol id, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
protocol, parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
station id, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
status, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
UART errors (count), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
efficiency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
ELV (extra low voltage) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49, 54
embedded field bus
see EFB
EMC
considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9, 44, 45
limits for motor cable length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
product standard (IEC/EN 61800-3) compliance . . . . . . 413
emergency
deceleration time, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
stop select, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
stop, alarm code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
enclosure (IP code) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
error value inversion (PID), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
EXT FBA, plug-in fieldbus adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
external
comm module, parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
commands selection, parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137, 181
control selection, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137, 185
fault
automatic reset, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
fault codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
reference, data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
F
fan
Index 427
internal enclosure, replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368

main, replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
replacement intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
fault
codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
correcting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
current at, history parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
digital input status at, history parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
frequency at, history parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
functions, parameter group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
history, parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
last, history parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
logger mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
previous, history parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
reset select, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143, 206
resetting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
speed at, history parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
status at, history parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
time of, history parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
torque at, history parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
voltage at, history parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
words, data parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
FBA, fieldbus adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
feedback
multiplier (PID), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
select (PID), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
fieldbus
command words, data parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
control interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
CPI firmware revision, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136, 283
fault codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
module’s application program revision, parameter . 136, 283
parameter refresh, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135, 282
parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135, 282
profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148, 160
status words, data parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
status, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136, 283
type, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135, 282
firmware test date, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
firmware version, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
first environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
first start, alarm code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
floating point application macro. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
flux braking, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
flux optimization, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
force trip, fault code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
frame errors (count), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
428 Index
frame size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
frequency
min. limit, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
switching, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
fuses
input power (mains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
208...240 volt drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
380...480 volt drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
G
gain (PID), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
H
hand control
see HAND mode
hand control application macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
HAND mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66, 67
hardware description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
heatsink
maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
maintenance interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
HVAC default application macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
I
I/O settings mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
id run
alarm code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
fail, fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
identification
drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
incompatible sw, fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
information, parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
input phase loss, alarm code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
preparing for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
see also mounting
integration time (PID), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
integration time, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
interlock function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
interlocks, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
internal setpoint (PID), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Index 429
internal timer application macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

internal timer with constant speeds application macro . . . . . 104
IO communication, alarm code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
IP code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
IR compensation
frequency, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
voltage, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
IT system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
K
keypad
reference select, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
see also control panel
kWh counter, data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
L
labels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
language, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61, 348
green . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
red . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348, 358
lifting the drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
limits, parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
load package version, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
local control
see HAND mode
local control (HAND mode) lock, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
low frequency (PFA), parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
M
macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
booster pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
condenser. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
cooling tower fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
dual setpoint PID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
dual setpoint PID with constant speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
e-bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
floating point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
hand control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
HVAC default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
internal timer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
internal timer with constant speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
powered roof ventilator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
pump alternation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
return fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
supply fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
430 Index
battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
capacitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
heatsink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
internal enclosure fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
main fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
triggers, parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
manual compatibility
with control panel (operator keypad) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
with drive firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
manuals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
maximum
torque limit, parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
torque select, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
minimum
torque limit, parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
torque select, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
changed parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
clock set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
drive parameter backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
fault logger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
I/O settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
standard display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
start-up assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
motor
aux. start delay (PFA), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
aux. stop delay (PFA), parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
control mode, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
id run, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
load curve break point frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
load curve max., fault parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
load curve zero speed load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
maintenance trigger, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
nominal current, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
nominal frequency, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
nominal power, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
nominal speed, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
nominal voltage, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
number of aux., parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
overtemperature, alarm code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
overtemperature, fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
phase, fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
revolution (counter), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Index 431
revolution counter, data parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

revolution trigger, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
stall, alarm code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
stall, fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
temperature alarm limit, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
temperature fault limit, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
temperature measurement, parameter group. . . . . . . . . 254
temperature sensor selection, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . 257
temperature sensor type, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
thermal protection, fault parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
thermal time, fault parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
motor control
IR compensation, parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
motors
(PFA) parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
mounting control panel (operator keypad) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
mounting drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
IP21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
IP54 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
location, preparing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
suitable location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11, 39
mounting EXT FBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
MWh
counter, data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
drive power consumption (counter), parameter . . . . . . . 235
drive power consumption trigger, parameter . . . . . . . . . 235
N
noise smoothing, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
NPN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
O
off button, alarm code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
offset (PID), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
OK messages (count), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
operating data, parameter group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
operating drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
operator keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
see control panel
OPEX
link, fault code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
power, fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
432 Index
options, parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

output frequency, data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
output voltage, data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
output wiring, fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
overcurrent
alarm code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
automatic reset, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
override
alarm code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
parameter set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75, 167
overspeed, fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
overvoltage
alarm code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
P
package. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
panel
display variables, parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
see also control panel
panel loss
alarm code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
parameter
analog input scale, fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
analog output scale, fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
change lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
external relay output, fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
fieldbus miss, fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
groups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
hz rpm, fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
override, fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
PCU 1 (power control unit), fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
PCU 2 (power control unit), fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
PFA and override, fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
PFA IO, fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
PFA mode, fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
PFA ref. neg., fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
save changes, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143, 208
sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
parameters
complete list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
list and descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
parity (RS-232), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
parity errors (count), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Index 433
patents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
PE earth
earth fault, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
PELV (protective extra low voltage) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
PFA
acceleration time, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
aux. motor start delay, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
aux. motor stop delay, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
aux. start order, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
control, parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
deceleration time, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
enable, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
interlock, alarm code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
low frequency, parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
motors, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
number of aux. motors, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
reference step, parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
start delay, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
start frequency, parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
PID
0% (actual signal), parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
100% (actual signal), parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
actual input select, parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
actual value max., parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
actual value min., parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
adjustment procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
controllers, overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
correction source, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
decimal point (actual signal), parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
derivation filter, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
derivation time, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
deviation, data parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
error feedback inversion, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
external / trimming, parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
external source activate, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
feedback multiplier, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
feedback select, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
feedback, data parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
gain, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
integration time, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
internal setpoint, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
offset, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
output, data parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
parameter set select, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
process sets, parameter groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267, 279
scaling (0%...100%), parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
setpoint maximum, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
setpoint minimum, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
setpoint select, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144, 271
setpoint, data parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
434 Index
sleep delay, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

sleep level, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
sleep selection, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
sleep, alarm code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
trim mode, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
trim scale, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
units (actual signal), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
wake-up delay, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
wake-up deviation, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
PNP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
power
data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
drive consumption (counter), parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
drive MWh consumption trigger, parameter . . . . . . . . . . 235
powered roof ventilator application macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
previous faults, history parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
process PID sets, parameter groups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267, 279
process variables, data parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148, 160
proportional gain, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
protection, degree of (IP code) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
PT100 temperature sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
PTC temperature sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
pump alternation application macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
R
ramp pair (accel/decel), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
IEC, 208...240 V drives. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
IEC, 380...480 V drives. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
NEMA, 208...240 V drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
NEMA, 380...480 V drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
real-time clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80, 117
reference
analog input corrections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
corrections for parameter values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
keypad control, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
maximum, parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
minimum, parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
select source, parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137, 186
select, parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
reference step (PFA), parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
reforming capacitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
regulator by-pass control, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
relay output
activation condition parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139, 197
connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
off-delay, parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Index 435
on-delay, parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
status, data parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
remote control
see AUTO mode
replacement
battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
capacitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
internal enclosure fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
main fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
reset, automatic
analog input less than min., parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
delay time, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
external fault, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
number of trials, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
overcurrent, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
overvoltage, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
trial time, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
undervoltage, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
resonance (avoiding)
restore the default factory setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
return fan application macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
revolution, motor
(counter), parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
counter, data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
trigger, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
RS-232
baud rate, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
panel, parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
parity, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
station id, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
RS-232 counts
buffer overruns, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
CRC errors, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
frame errors, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
OK messages, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
parity errors, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
RS485 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
run enable
source select, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143, 205
run time
cooling fan (counter), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
cooling fan trigger, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
drive (counter), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
drive trigger, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
run time, data parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171, 173
436 Index
S
safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7, 8
scalar control mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
screws, mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
s-curve ramp, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
second environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
sensor type, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
sensorless vector control mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
serial 1 error, fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
serial communications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
setpoint maximum (PID), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
setpoint minimum (PID), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
setpoint select (PID), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144, 271
sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
short circuit, fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
sleep selection (PID), parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
slip compensation ratio, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
speed
data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
min. limit, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
speed control
acceleration compensation, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
automatic tuning, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
derivation time, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
integration time, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
proportional gain, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
speed, constant
digital input selection parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
timer-activated mode selection, parameter . . . . . . . . . . 194
stall
frequency, fault parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
function, fault parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
time, fault parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
standard display mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
start
aux order (PFA), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
aux. motor (PFA), parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
aux. motor delay (PFA), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
day, parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
DC magnetizing time, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Index 437
delay (PFA), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

frequency (PFA), parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
function, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
inhibit, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
time, parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
torque boost current, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
start enable
missing, alarm codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
source select, parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
start mode
automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
automatic torque boost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
DC magnetizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
flying start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
start/stop, parameter group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
start/stop/dir, parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
starting order counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
start-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
by changing the parameters individually . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
by using the start-up assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
start-up data, parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
station id (RS-232), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
status at fault, history parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
status information of drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
status word, serial communication
bit definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
stop
aux. motor (PFA), parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
aux. motor delay (PFA), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
day, parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
DC brake time, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
DC current braking selection, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
DC current ref., parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
emergency select, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
emergency, alarm code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
flux braking, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
function, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
time, parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
supervision
parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
parameter high limit, parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
parameter low limit, parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
parameter selection, parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
supply fan application macro. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
supply phase, fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
switching frequency control, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
438 Index
switching frequency, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

system controls, parameter group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
T
template
control panel (operator keypad) mounting . . . . . . . . . . . 396
drive mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11, 39
terminal layout
R1...R4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
R5...R6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
terminals
cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
terminals, I/O. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
test date, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
thermal fail, fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
time period
start day, parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
start time, parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
stop day, parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
stop time, parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
timed
autochange, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
timed functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
boost select, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
boost time, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
start day, parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
start time, parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
stop day, parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
stop time, parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
timer source, parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
timers enable, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
enable, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
source, parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
TN system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
torque
boost current, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
max. limit select, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
max. limit, parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
min. limit select, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
min. limit, parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
trim mode (PID), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
trim scale (PID), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
two-wire sensor, connection example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Index 439
type code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
U
U/f ratio, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
UL marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
underload
alarm code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
curve, fault parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
function, fault parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
time, fault parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
undervoltage
alarm code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
control enable, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
units (PID), parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
uploading parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
user parameter set
change control, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
V
version, drive firmware, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
voltage
at fault, history parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
voltage/frequency ratio, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
W
wake-up delay (PID), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
wake-up deviation (PID), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393, 395
wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49, 53
fault, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46, 50
terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44, 45
XYZ
zero speed load, fault parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
440 Index
© 2006 ABB Oy. All rights reserved.
3AFE68258537 REV C / EN
EFFECTIVE: 24.05.2006
ABB Inc. ABB Limited

Automation Technologies Daresbury Park
Drives & Motors Daresbury
16250 West Glendale Drive Warrington
New Berlin, WI 53151 Cheshire
USA WA4 4BT
Telephone 262 785-3200 UNITED KINGDOM
800-HELP-365 Telephone +44 1925 741111
Fax 262 780-5135 Fax +44 1925 741212
ABB Oy ABB Beijing Drive Systems Co. Ltd.

AC Drives No. 1, Block D, A-10 Jiuxianqiao Beilu
P.O. Box 184 Chaoyang District
FI-00381 HELSINKI Beijing, P.R. China, 100015
FINLAND Telephone +86 10 5821 7788
Telephone +358 10 22 11 Fax +86 10 5821 7618
Fax +358 10 22 22681 Internet http://www.abb.com
Internet http://www.abb.com

ABB ACH550usermanual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ABB ACH550usermanual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

ABB ACH550usermanual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ACH550

2. Preparing for installation

3. Installing the drive

4. Start-up and control panel

5. Application macros and wiring

6. Real-time clock and timed functions

8. Parameter listing and descriptions

9. Diagnostics and maintenance

1. Contents of this manual ............................................. 7

2. Preparing for installation.......................................... 13

3. Installing the drive..................................................... 39

Mounting the drive (IP21)........................................... 43

4. Start-up and control panel........................................ 61

5. Application macros and wiring ................................ 85

6. Booster pump ........................................................ 98

6. Real-time clock and timed functions..................... 117

7. Serial communications ........................................... 129

8. Parameter listing and descriptions........................ 165

9. Diagnostics and maintenance................................ 347

10. Technical data........................................................ 371

UL marking .............................................................. 412

Contents of this manual

What this chapter contains

Contents of this manual 7

Use of warnings and notes

WARNING! The ACH550 should ONLY be installed by a

WARNING! Even when the motor is stopped, dangerous voltage

WARNING! Dangerous voltage is present when input power is

8 Contents of this manual

WARNING! When the control terminals of two or more drive

WARNING! If a drive whose EMC filter is not disconnected is

WARNING! The ACH550 is not a field repairable unit. Never

WARNING! The ACH550 will start up automatically after an

WARNING! The heat sink may reach a high temperature. See

Contents of this manual 9

WARNING! Do not control the motor with an AC contactor or

Note: For more technical information, contact the factory or your

10 Contents of this manual

Contents of this manual 11

Lifting the drive

Note: Lift the drive only from the metal chassis.

12 Contents of this manual

Preparing for installation

What this chapter contains

Note: The installation must always be designed and made

Preparing for installation 13

Note: The location of the labels may vary between different

14 Preparing for installation

Note: The location of the labels may vary between different

Preparing for installation 15

AC, HVAC Drive – 550 product series

Construction (region specific)

Output current rating

16 Preparing for installation

Preparing for installation 17

Mark the frame size of your drive in the box on

Note: For detailed technical information, see chapter Technical

18 Preparing for installation

ABB Oy, Electrical Machines

Collect the following information: